ANNUAL REPORT 1978-79
NIEPA DC
JFWa vn
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA MINISTRY OF EDUCATION AND SOCIAL WELFARE (Department of Education and Department of Culture) NEW DELHI PUBLICATION NUMBER 1209
Z i y n
■ y ! > / ' ) /
PRINTED BY THE MANAGER, GOVT. OF INDIA PRESS, RING ROAD, M E W D )E L IH I-j-l 100 6 4 1979 CONTENTS
P a g e s
I. INTRODUCTORY ...... (i— viii)
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION
ClAPTER
I School Education ...... 1— 26
T Higher Education and Research ..... 27— 80
II Technical Education ...... 81— 98
V S c h o l a r s h i p s ...... 99— 105
' B ook Prom otion and C o p y r i g h t ...... 106— 116
V Y outh S e r v i c e s ...... 117— 122
VI Physical Education and S p o r t s ...... 123— 137
V II L a n g u a g e s ...... 138-— 15]
I) Indian National Commission for Cooperation with Unesco 152— 154
' Adult Education ...... 155— 156
X Education in the Union Territories .... 167__202
XI Activities in Common and Clearing House Functions . 203__219
DEPARTMENT OF CULTURE
I Cultural A f f a i r s ...... 223'__239
II A rchaeology ...... 240—248
III A n t h r o p o l o g y ...... 249__253
IV A r c h i v e s ...... 254— 259
V Museums and Libraries and their Conservation and Deve lopm ent ...... 260— 283
II IN A N C IA L A L L O C A T I O N S ...... 284— 298
HI ADMINISTRATIVE CHARTS DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION INTRODUCTORY
Poliy and Approach
"he year 1978-79 was marked by efforts to translate into actia the new policies and approaches identified in consultation withthe States during 1977-78 to give a meaningful egalitarian orieration to the educational efforts of the Government. The natiaal objective of universal literacy has now been spelt out in tiie-bound action programmes for universalisation of element ary ducation and spread of adult education. The content of eduction is being revised at all stages of education to base it uporthe best in our tradition and make it relevant to local needs and nvironment. The emphasis will be on the development of the Dtal personality of the individual and promotion of social and loral values.
Eduction Ministers’ Conference
A Conference of Ministers of Education of Stales and Union TerriDries was held in July 1978 to discuss the programmes of actioj drawn up to implement the policies and priorities that emered during 1977-78.
Te Conference approved the framework of action for the impleientation of universalisation of elementary education on a time-ound basis based on the recommendations of a working group set up in collaboration with the States and the Planning Comiission. The frame-work of action envisaged a national target of enrolment of 320 lakhs of children in the age group 6— 1> during the next 5 years 1978— 83. This will imply enrol ment >f 90 per cent of the children in the age group 6— 14. The Confeence emphasised the need for special efforts for the enrol ment ind retention of girls, Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribe: through, wherever necessary, a properly designed pro- gramre of incentives.
Tb Conference agreed that school education should com prise lementary, secondary and higher secondary stages of 12 years’luration; the undergraduate stage of higher education may be o f} years’ duration. However, where a State so desires it can hf/e 2-years’ pass and a 3-years’ honours course. The Con- ferenc welcomed the efforts to recast the content of education at all le stages. C ii)
The Conference supported action to be taken for the innplple- mentation of National Adult Education Programme and reesojlvtved to give the highest priority to the programme.
Draft National Policy on Education Based on extensive consultations and discussions the Mliniiststry had attempted a draft National Policy on Education whicch wwas placed before the Conference of Education Ministers. Thee (C o n ference while broadly approving the outlines of the policy ' waint itcd time for the communication of the remarks of the State GJowenrn- ments. These remarks have since been received. Thee ■ dnralt Policy has since been revised keeping in view the remarks, oif t the State Governments and other Central Ministries. It is hojpeed 1 to finalise the draft Policy very soon and place it before thie ccoiunintry and Parliament.
Universalisation of Elementary Education Elementary education has been accepted as one of tlhe hiaigh priority areas of action by the Government along witlh addult education. Time-bound plans have been drawn up> f for ‘ t the universalisation of elementary education in the country. Im I line with the recommendations made by a working group sett tup 3 in collaboration with the Planning Commission and the Sttattes.s, a provision of Rs. 900 crores—nearly 46 per cent of tlhe taotal provision for education—was made in the draft Five Te;ar PPlafl for Education. This represents a substantial increase frrorm the provisions made in the previous plans which have ranged airoound 30 per cent. It also meant nearly doubling the pr oviisicon i of Rs. 410 crores made for elementary education in the Filfthi FFive Year Plan. The States were requested to draw up pllams for universal elementary education in their jurisdiction andl tlhe pl»lans were discussed in regional conferences with the autihoiritiies s of the State Governments. These plans emphasised not mejrctly en rolment but also efforts to stabilise attendance and efffoirtss to bring down the dropout rates. An entirely new featur e lhass bbeen the emphasis on non-formal education programmes for tlhe oblder children who have dropped out of school and those whio Jhawe : not been to school. These non-formal education programmers dlessign- ed to suit the needs and requirements of these children wlho > are mostly girls and drawn from weaker sections of the lpojpullatition. are expected to ensure extension of educational oppcortiunnities to the weaker sections and at the same time reduce tlhe drroppout rates. Particular attention is being given to the 9 Statees wl'hich (iii) havi lagged behind in elementary education and which have 75 percent of the non-enrolled children. These are Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Jammu and Kashmir, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa, Rajisthan, Uttai Pradesh and West Bengal. The States have alsc been advised during the discussions on the draft Five Year Plai 1978-83 and Annual Plan 1979-80 to ensure that adequate pro'ision is made for the elementary education sector. However, it nust oe mentioned here that due to difficult resources position sone of these States are encountering difficulties in providing adequate funds for elementary education. } It may, however, be posible through more intensive utilization of educational facilities and also redeployment of the resources available to the Education Departments to secure greater impact. Government of India are aimne at 90 per cent enrolment of the children in the age group 6— 14 by 1982-83.
Coitent of Education The Report of the Committee to review the curriculum at the school stage has been accepted by the Central Government. It vas discussed at the Ministers’ Conference and broadly ap- pro'ed. The Central Board of Secondary Education has reviewed its (urrieulum dropping the academic load on the lines recom- merded by the Committee. The Conference of Chairmen of the Stat-. Boards of Education lias also accepted a majority of the reconmendations which are under various Stages of implemen tation in the State. Government objective is to move towards a revision of the contents of education basing it on the best in our traditions and making it relevant to our needs and environ- men.
Aduf Education
"he National Adult Education Programme, which was drawn up ;fter detailed and wide ranging discussions at various levels was naugurated on 2nd October, 1978. A provision of Rs. 200 crors has been made for the adult education programme in the Plan 1978— 83 which represents nearly 10 per cent of the total plan provision for education.
discussions have been held with the State authorities for the impfmentation of the programme in the States. The State Boads of Adult Education are in position in all the States and Unicn Territories. The Administrative infrastructure has moved into oosition in most of the States and Union Territories. Volun (iv) tary organisations are being mobilised in most of the St ates tanand they are seeking the assistance of the Central Government throiuglugh the State Governments on a large scale. The Ministry is ailsolso setting up an evaluation and monitoring machinery to ensure tthahat the impact of the programme is being carefully evaluated ;anand monitored.
Y ocationalisation The programme of vocationalisation of secondary educattioiion has picked up momentum during the year under review. TThifhe Centre’s role in the schemc is mainly to ensure countrywide acc;epep- tance of this concept and to assist the State Governments ii in establishing the relevance of vocationalisation to our socio-e;coco- nomic needs. The provision of funds in the Central s.ector fo for assisting the States in their efforts in the field of vocationalisatfiouon of higher secondary education, has been utilized in full and th'the general response of the State Governments has been quite encxuiou- raging. Financial assistance has been released to 80 dhstrictss ii in 14 States for taking up vocationalisation.
Higher Education The University Grants Commission finalised the policy frainume for the development of higher education in India for the niexext 10—15 years and also the approach to development of hi«;hc,hcr education for the next 5 years. The policy framework envisaigciged a flexible and dynamic system of education providing for opponor- tunities for life long learning and reduction of disparities. Thfhe approach paper lays emphasis on quality improvement proro- grammes designed to raise the standards of teaching, research anand expansion of educational facilities will receive very low prioirityity.
Two regional conferences of vice-chancellors endorsed th the policy and priorities accepted by the U.G.C. These co>nferemceices emphasised that the universities must give greater irmportaincnce to extension programme. The State Governments have been ac ad vised to set up inter-university coordination boards so as; to nuakake use of all available resources and expertise for the coordimateited development of the academic programmes of the various univcers:rsi- ties in each State.
The Commission has appointed a standing committee to adivisvise it on the general policy regarding restructuring of coursess s at the undergraduate stage. A set of guidelines have also been c:orram- (V) municated to the universities for restructuring of courses of study at the first degree level with the general principle of relevance and flexibility so that they would be related to local needs and environ ment.
The Commission has agreed to implement the scheme of adult education through universities and a beginning has been made in selected universities. The Commission has also suggested to universities the inclusion of Gandhian studies as one of the themes under foundation courses as part of the reorganisation of the courses of study. The Commission has agreed to provide assistance to universities and colleges to help them to provide remedial courses to students coming from weaker sections of the society.
Apart from these measures. Government have over the past one year dismantled the authoritarian structure developing in the education system and provided for the democratic institutions to function at all levels. The students' unions and organisations of various categories of staff have all started functioning normally. The State Governments and universities have al-o been advised to set up suitable representative bodies to look into the grievances of the vario is groups and provide for prompt remedies
Physical Education, Games and Sports
The All India Council of Sports was reorganised to make it more functional and effective. The Council has been asked to advise the Government on a draft National Policy on Games and Sports. The Central rchemcs for the development of sports and physical education were reviewed by a working group which has recommended the continuance of the existing schemes with suit able modifications to make them more broad based and rural centered.
The All India Rural Sports Talent organised with a view to involving the youth in the rural areas in sports activities has now become a regular annual programme with a participation of about 12 lakhs rural youth from the block to the national level. The National Sports Festival for Women first organised in 1975 has also become a significant annua! feature of the cur rent sports calendar. This year the festival was organised in January 1979 in Calcutta in which 1600 sportswomen belonging to 27 States and Union Territories took part. Our improved (Vi)
performance at the Asian Games is an encouraging sign of our progress in sports.
Government have agreed to stage the Asian Games 1982 in New Delhi and preparations are underway for organising these Games.
Technical Education The efforts aimed at consolidation, diversification and faculty development in the sector of technical education were continued last year. The report of the Working Group set up to review the present status of the nations’ needs during the coming decade and to make recommendations in regard to existing programmes was fully endorsed by fhc All India Council for Technical Educa tion in February, 1978. Action is being initiated on the recom mendations of the Working Group for which the main responsi bility is with the State Governments. Action has been taken by the Ministry through an Expert Committee for the identification of 28 polytechnics in the country as community polytechnics which will be used as focal points to promote transfer of technology. The rural development and advancc research programmes adopted by the Indian Institutes of Technology are progressing satisfac torily.
Book Promotion and Languages
The National Book Trust was reconstituted. The Trust has made a beginning by publishing in a few Indian Languages in collaboration with the Adult Education Directorate books meant for neo-literates. The Ninth National Book Fair held at Bangalore was the largest ever National Book Fair.
A Seminar was organised on the theme of Publishing in the Next Decade. The Trust has taken several measures to improve its sale programme. During 1978-79 the import policy for books was rationalised and liberalised and considerable simplification of the procedures was also effected.
At the invitation of the Government of India, UNESCO and WIPO jointly organised a Regional Seminar on Copyright and Neighbouring Rights for Asian and Pacific States and Territories in New Delhi in December, 1978. The Seminar was attended by fifteen countries from the region. The diverse programmes undertaken for the development of languages in the country were continued during the year.
Youth Services
The National Youth Board was reconstituted to advise the Government on the formulation of a National Youth Policy. The Board has undertaken a critical review of the programmes for the welfare of student and non-student youth. It held its first meeting in December, 1978. The coverage of the National Service Scheme Programme is likely to reach four lakh students at the end of the current year and it is now in operation in all the States and Universities. The N.S.S. students did commendable work in the wake of natural tragedies in different parts of the country
UNESCO An Indian Delegation of officials and non-officials participated in the 20th Session of the General Assembly of UNESCO in Paris from 24th October to 28th November, 1978.
Culture The year under review has been significant on account of the steps taken to reorient policy and programming in the Depart ment of Culture. The Department recognised that it was not enough to look after the national institutions in the field. It was also nccessary to make full use of cultural manifestations as an educational tool. With this in view, the Department set up a Working Group on Art and Culture, as also several Sub Committees and Functional Groups. The task of these Working Groups and Functional Groups was to devise ways and means by which there could be a long range programme of the preser vation and conservation of the cultural heritage, its fostering and dissemination at various levels, specially at the rural and tribal levels. The Working Group on Art and Culture and the several Functional Groups made a scries of recommendations on different facets of the development of culture. Their recommendations could be divided into two broad categories : —
(i) The linkages of culture with other developmental programmes specially those of education of rural and tribal population. (viii)
(ii) The development and strengthening of the national institutions in the field of culture, such as Archaeolo gical Survey of India, Anthropological Survey of India, National Archives of India, the National Museum and the other functional museums, the ins titutions of higher Tibetan Studies, the National Library and other functional public and specialised libraries, memorials.
The Working Group also gave its recommendations in regard to programmes and schemes which would foster and disseminate various aspects of Indian Culture and encourage talent. Action on these recommendations will be initiated in 1979-80,
During the year under report, a National Advisory Com mittee was set up to advise the Government on the preservation of folk and tribal art.
Cultural Exchange Til] the end of last year, cultural agreements had been con cluded with 51 countries. During the period under report, cul tural agreements were signed with Malaysia, Zaire, Vietnam, Syria, Republic of Korea, Cuba and Tunisia.
Archaeology The Archaeological Survey of India and 13 Universities and one Research Institute have undertaken a village-to village survey of antiquerian remains in the country.
The Survey set up a laboratory in Agra to conduct tests as also to study the air-polution problems in and around the monu ments in Agra.
The other activities and programmes in the different areas of the Department of Culture, are recorded in the relevant chap ters in this Report. C H A PTER I
SCHOOL EDUCATION
The main programmes in the field of School Education are :— (i) Universal free and compulsory elementary educaton; (ii) Reorganisation of the educational pattern; (iii) Vocational of higher secondary education; (iv) Reorganisation and expansion of science teaching at the school level; (v) Quality improvement programmes in school educa tion; (vi) Educational technology project; and (vii) Provision of schooling facilities of transferable Central Government employees.
These programmes aim not only at expanding educational facilities at the base but also raising the standard of school education.
The programmes are carried out, among others, through spe cialised institutions, set up for the purpose. They are : (i) The National Council of Educational Research and Training, New Delhi; (ii) The Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathali, New Delhi; and (iii) The Central Board of Secondary Education, New Delhi.
Universal, Free and Compulsory Elementary Education
The programme of universalising elementary education cons titutes one of the two top most priority programmes in the field of education, the other being National Adult Education Programme, according to the Government’s decision to achieve universal literacy in the country within a definite time-frame of not more than 10 years. 2
Enrolment
As recommenced in the report of the Working Group on tne Universalisation of Elementary Education, the National target of additional enrolment during the medium-term Plan period is 320 lakhs. If this is realised, 90 per cent of children of the age-group 6— 14 would be in classes 1— VIII in 1982-83 compris ing 110 per cent in 6— 11 age-group (classes I—V) and 57 per cent in 11— 14 age-group (classes VI—VIII). The report of the Working Group was submitted in February, 1978 and the follow ing constitute the major steps taken during the year for this pro gramme :—
(i) On the basis of the guidelines given by the Centre, State Master Plants for Universalisation were pre pared and discussed in a series of meetings held with State Government officials in August-September, 1978. The States were requested to revise or modify their plans on the basis of discussions.
(ii) To collect most up-to-date data for the preparation and implementation of the programme of Universalis- ing Elementary Education, the Fourth Educational Survey has been mounted in all States and Union Territories of the country with 30th September, 1978 as the reference date. Considerable progress has been made and the State data are expected in March, 1979.
(iii) For this programme it is essential to monitor not only enrolment but also attendance figures. Alongwith the collection of Fourth Survey Data Monitoring of quarterly attendance figures in primary and middle schools of the country has been introduced for the first time. As per arrangements made, block-level quarterly attendance returns will be received by the Centre for computerisation and quick processing and feedback to the States for remedial steps, wherever necessary.
(iv) A special study on elementary education administra tion in 9 States where the problem of non-enrolment and non-attendance is disproportionately larger, has been undertaken with hundred per cent Central assis tance, for completion within 6 months. 3
(v) Work on the preparation of a Centrally-Sponsoted Scheme of ‘Experimental Programmes for Non-formal Education for 9—-14 age-group Children’ has been initiated. In preparing State Master Plans for Universalisation attempts have been made to identify the; magnitude of the problem and suggest specific strategies for bringing into the school system Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes children and girls. It is ihc.y who constitute the hard core of non-enrolled children. The mam strategy to cover them would be to launch non-formal education programmes on a massive scale, particularly in the cdHcationally backward States. Steps have been, taken to pre pare local-specific curricula and instructional packages on a decentralised basis, which would be relevant to the needs and life situations of children in various areas. [ The State Plans for Universalising Elemental'} Education have proposed a number of measures for retaining cnildrcn in school system up to Class VIII. These include measures like ungraded school system at the primary stage, policy of "no detention till class VIII but with comprehensive1 evaluation, multiple-point entry in formal schools, introduction of play-way methods in Classes i-—II with adoption of dynamic teaching, teacher improvement and above all. reform of primary curriculum including socially useful productive work, recommended by the Ishwarfchai Patel Committee. These measures, when implemented, woulc! enhance fix holding power of the primary and middle schools. The following table indicates the position and target of enrolment at the elementary stage : (in lakhs)
Target 1950-51 1977-78 1982-83
Agc-.U'roup 6— 11 Enrolment: Classes I—V . . . 191.55 701.50 9 2 1 .5 0 Enrolment as percentage of age-group population ..... 4 2 .6 8 2 .8 10 4 .3 Age-group 11— 14 Enrolment : Classes VI—VIII . . 31.20 177.67 27 7 .6 7 Enrolment as percentage of age-group population ..... 12.7 3 7 .9 5 4 .8 Age-group 6-— 14 Enrolment : Classes I—VIII . . 222.75 879.17 1199, 17 Enrolment as percentage of age-group p o p u la t io n ...... 3 2 .4 6 6 .9 8 6 .3 1*6 ESW/78—2 4
Free Education
Education in Classes I—V is already free in GovemixiciU Schools and in schools run by local bodies in all parts of the coun try. It is also free in Classes VI—VIII in all States except for boys in Orissa. Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal.
Legislation
All States except Bihar, Manipur, Meghalaya, Nagaland, Sikkim and Tripura have enacted legislation for compulsory education. As for the Union Territories such legislation is avail able in Delhi, Andaman and Nicobar Islands and Chandigarh.
School Feeding Programmes (Mid-day-Meals Programme) vMid-day-Meals programmes have been in operation for children in primary schools. While the primary objective of any nutrition programme is to enhance the nutritional status in chil dren, particularly of the weaker sections of the community, experience says that such programmes help in attracting children to schools and retaining them there. Under the Minimum Needs Programme of the Five Year Plan funds arc provided to the States for the operation of such programmes with indigenous foot! materials. 1
CARE has been assisting with the supply of food commuditie-. in operating the Programme in 14 States/Union Territories, namely, Andhra Pradesh, Gujarat, Haryana, Karnataka, Kerala. Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Orissa, Punjab, Rajasthan, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal and Pondicherry. In 1977-78, 76 lakh children have been benefited under CARE-assistcd Programme. This coverage has been increased to 107 lakh during the year. For CARE food commodities the State Govern ments bear the cost of transportation and administration.
Science Education Programme at the Elementary Stage
Started in 1969-70 on a pilot basis, Science Education Pro gramme at the Elementary Stage has been continued on a wider phase during the Fifth Plan period, with assistance from UNICEF. The achievements so far recorded are as below :—
(i) With 8,999 primary science kits supplied during 1978 79 the total number of primary schools provided with science kits comes to 47,571. 5
(ii) With 13,500 primary teachers trained luring 1073-79 the totn! number of teachers tra'inei so far is 61,697. Besides, 22,053 of other personnel like inspectors, methods masters, head-masters et.\ have been trained.
(iii) 149 teacher training schools have been selected during the year for strengthening with the supply of science equipment and books, bringing the ‘ota! number to 822.
(ivj 1,800 metric tonnes of paper have been supplied during the year for printing of textbooks, touchers guides, etc.
(v) Under pilot, programme on Nutrition, Health E du cation, and Environmental Sanitation, five regional centres at Baroda, Calcutta, Coimbatore, Jabalpur and Ludhiana have developed cirricular materials in Fnglish and regional languages fir introduction as an integral part of science education programme, besides undertaking programmes for trailing of teachers in the concerned regions.
(vi) Through a series of workshops a hand-book for yvi- iivary science: teachers has been leveloped in regard to environmental science and improvisation of local resources.
Quality Improvement Programme
Three significant programmes, namely, Primary Education Curriculum Renewal’, ‘Developmental Activties in Community Education and Participation,’ and ‘Children’s Media Laboratory’ have also been in operation, on a pilot basis, vith assistance from UNICEF.
The first programme has been in operation in 15 States with the participation of 10 primary schools linked t> each of 3 teacher training schools in each State. The institution have been selec ted in backward areas covering the needs of veaiker sections of society. The programme has developed i.no'vative curricula adjusted to the life-style and socio-economic opiportunities of 6 children, oaid related instructional materials, techniques, etc. for such children as are likely to remain in schools only for a few years or as are not reached at all, besides undertaking training programmes for primary teachers and other personnel.
Under the second programme, two communities in each of the 15 States have been selected and programmes and activities for various target groups, particularly for drop-outs, out-of-school children a J i d adults have been developed so that the educational activities, ma'inly ol' non-formal nature, could meet the needs of those who are partly or totally deprived of any education.
The third programme, namely. Children's Media Laboratory, has been functioning in the Centre for Educational Technology ; NCERT). Under this programme studies of available toys and play materials in 4 States have been undertaken and manual lor teachers prepared for 2 States. Further, a National Work shop on low cost and simple play materials and games for child ren was held in October 1978. Besides, work on monitoring radio programmes for young children has been done in Delhi and strips of 10 illustrated graphic books have been developed while 2 books have been printed. This programme aims at developing inexpensive and effective media of educational and entertainment value for 4— 8 age-group children.
Vocationalisation of Higher Scctmdan Kducation
Launched as a centrally sponsored scheme from February 1977. it has been proposed for inclusion in the Plan (1978-83). The Centre's role in the scheme is mainly to ensure country-wide acceptance of this new concept and to assist State Governments in establishing the relevance of the vocationalisation to our socio economic needs. By the end of December 1978, financial assis tance was released for conducting vocational surveys in 80 selec ted districts of Assam, Gujarat. Jammu and Kashmir, Haryana, Karnataka. Nagaland, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra. Manipur. Orissa. Rajasthan, Sikkim, Tamil Nadu and Tripura. Vocational courses were introduced in three districts of Karnataka from the academic session 1977-78. The introduction of vocational courses has also been approved for live districts of Maharashtra' and six more districts of Karnataka from the academic session 1978-79. To strengthen the efforts of the Government of West Bengal in this direction, financial assistance for purchase of equipment has also been released. 7
The reports of the National Review Committee on Higticr Secondary Education with special reference to vocationalisaton and the Working Group on Vocationalisation were considered at the Conference of Education, Ministers held in New Delhi in July 1978 and at the Special Session of the Conference of Boards of Secondary Education in India held in September, 1978 in Nrcw Delhi. The recommendations of the National Review Comnnt.ec and the Working Group have been approved by them for inv:^:- mentation.
Structure of School Education
The Education Ministers’ Conference convened in July 1^78 considered the structure of formal education in the crnntry. It took note of the fact that 26 States and Union, Terri ories have already introduced the 10+2 + 3 structure, as recomnended by the Education Commission 1964-66 and the Nationa Policy of Education, 1968. The Conference further considerd the obligation of the States in regard to elementary education and was o' the wjw that this structure did not in any way run counter to the Dnecave Principle of the State Policy so long as the obligation to provide education free up to the age of 14 (standard VIII) is recogn -ed and accepted. The Conference agreed that the school education slould c•• ->v- prisc elementary, secondary and higher secondary stigcs of 12 years duration. Educational Technology Programme
I. Centre for Educational Technology The Centre has undertaken the following programnes during the year : “ Educational Radio
(i) A feasibility project on teaching Hindi as a firs: language to children in class T to ITT with the help of radio and Supportive materials has been designed. As a part of Phase I of tie project, a 10 day workshop was held in Mount Abu and a week-long workshop in Delhi for preparing outlines of radio piogranunes and supportive materials. Actual broadcasts would conmenco in July 1979 for Class T and for classes II and III in he subse quent years. >; On the request of Unesco. the Centre organised a 3 vu-i-k joint Indo-Maldives training programme for educational racli'- production to familiarise the Indian as well as Maldivian purlL' pants with the techniques of style and presentation of ecii.'Ch'rional broadcasting and to give them operational skills of. j r ^ V i C : H S .
(iii) A training course at Bangalore was organised for script writer* for primary school radio broadcasts. The scripts written in difercnt formats were produced, tried out and revised in the ligr,: - f reactions of the prim ary school children.
Educational Television : The Centre organised two selection-cum-orientation workshops one at Lucknow and the other at Srinagar for train ing ( - ETV scripts writers as a part of its programmes to devw lop pool of trained EI'V script writers in different parts of the country where educational TV programmes arc tclccast or propped to be tclccast in the near future. {>') At the request of the Municipal Corporation of Delhi the Centre organised a training programme to train 160 TV user teachers of primary schools of the Corporation.
Distance Learning/ Correspondence Education
A scries of 5 Iwo-dav regional seminars on corres pond!, nee education were organised in Novcmber-Dccembcr 1978 at Bhopal. Delhi, Ajmer. Mysore and Bombay. The aims of these seminars were to provide a forum to discuss various as pects of open and distant learning systems and ways and means to jn.prove and strengthen them. Some of the experts from abroad who had come to India to attend the International Con- fcrenc*. on Correspondence Education in Novem ber 1978 provid ed consultancy in these seminars.
Educational Toys/Games A number of folk and traditional toys played by Indian children were sent by the Centre to Unesco for exhibition at the time of 20th General Conference in Paris. A slidc-cum-tape programme, a video-tape, a short film and a broclrurc were pre pared to go with the toys. The Centre organised in Delhi a national workshop on low- costAimplc play materials and ga'mcs for children. Low cost/ 9 sifT.iVe play materials were displayed, and their preparation and uses a> aids for teaching children were demonstrated and dis cussed.
Multi-Media Package .. The Centre organised at Jorhat in Assam a 4-day workshop for demonstration of the multi-media package developed by the Centre, for in-service training of primary' teachers in science. Teacher trainers and other officials concerned with training of primary teachers from West Bengal, Mizoram, Nagaland, Assam. Arunachal and Manipur participated. Similar demons tration camps in Port Blair for teachers of Andaman and Nicobai Islands were organised. Prwfection The Centre has produced a number of films entitled . reaching of Nutrition Vigyan K.i Padai . : Educational Toys Soviet Puppet Show Innovations in Education IE, Educational Technology Cells in the States
. % nh the setting up of LT Cells in Haryana. Sikkim and Wesl Bengal, the total number of such cells in the country is now 3 9. Cells in the remaining States are likely to be set up shorljy.. These Cells are c-xpcctcd to ster and promote the dcve- loprntr.. of the programme at the Stale level. The entire expendi ture >.'i7. the setting up and maintenance of the State Educational Tochrofogy Cells is being met by the Government of India. Some of the activities undertaken by the State Educational Technology Cells ::re noted below :
(i> Andhra Pradesh : Training programmes for user teachers and ript writers for radio broadcast programmes and educa tional television programmes were conducted in collaboration with AH India Radio and Doordarshan, Hyderabad.
Tv.,o evaluation studies on SITE programmes and use of radio school broadcast programmes by secondary and primary schools were completed. A State level seminar on educational technology 10 was organised. Booklets on utilisation of TV and Radio Broad casts programmes for teachers were published.
(ii) Gujarat : Auto-instructional materials for the subject English for students of Standard VI and VII are being prepared Intensive inservice education programmes weie taken up anc 10,000 elementary teachers were trained in the teaching of Eng lish. A radio lesson for these teachers is also broadcast. 30-proto types of teaching kits and some booklets on specific topics have been prepared for non-formal education programmes. A few liims were screened in villages where non-formal education centres are working for arousing awareness about non-formal education anti adult education. A tapc-rccorded library is being organised for the collection of nursery rhymes. Workshops for script writer,- of radio and television educational programmes were held.
(iii) Karnataka : Educational Technology Cell co-ordiiuted with the All India Radio, Bangalore in the preparation of material for school broadcasts for both Primary and High Schools. The first batch of 50 primary school teachers out of 300 have been trained so far. 19 persons having knowledge of writing literature for children have been trained for writing scripts for school broadcasts.
(iv) M anipur : The Educational Technology Cell organised a two-day course on Educational Technology for Assistant Inspec tors of Schools for making them conversant with the role tit be played by Educational Technology towards achieving univ ^rea lisation of elementary education and the need to involve die community in educational programmes. Educational broadcasts in a miniature form has been started as part of the genera] children’s programme. The programme is on Social Studies for children of the age-group 6— 13 and is broadcast every Sunday. (v) Orissa : Educational Television programmes are conti nued to be telecast under the Community Viewing Scheme. Schools in 650 villages co.vered within 50 Km. radius of the transmission arc benefited by these programmes. The St?.;e i* also taking steps for supply of radio sets to schools, making nidjo listening compulsory, preparing a panel of teachers for sen p t writing, maintaining log books, supplying teachers note.s. and orienting script writers of radio programmes. Teachers NotcK are being published in the Mother tongue also. A State level seminar on educational technology was organised to bring out awareness 11
of the concept of educational technology and enlisting support of all concerned for implementing the programmes.
Since 25 per cent of the total population of the State are tribals, the teaching of regional language ‘Oriya’ poses a great problem for teachers. The Educational Technology Cell proposes to prepare some graphic materials, like Hash cards and charts, for the use of teachers working in the tribal areas to make the language teaching for tribal children meaningful and interesting.
( v i) Rajasthan—School broadcast programmes are being broadcast regularly for students of VI to XI classes for teaching English, Hindi and General Science, for teachers and for non- formal education. Educational television programmes are being utilised by schools having TV sets. There arc about 500 sets in six districts of Rajasthan. The Cell has published a direc tory of educational teaching aids.
(vii) Tamil Nadu—Educational Technology Cell launched upon a massive programme of providing Radio sets in all the schools in the State with the help of the local community. The drive has yielded good results as 31,383 schools are equipped with radio sets. The Cell is rendering all assistance to All India Radio in the actual preparation and production of school broad cast programmes. Teachers’ hand books and programme charts were distributed to all the schools in the State. A study on the utilisation o! school broadcasts was undertaken. A large scale teacher training programme using correspondence-cum-radio-cum- contact approach and its evaluation was undertaken in colla boration with SCERT and All India Radio, Madras. The train ing was imparted to 600 teachers in 3 batches. In order to provide trained script writers to Doordarshari Kendra for writing script for ETV, a course was organised at Technical Teaeh'crs’ Training Institute, Adyar, Madras. 64 teachers have been trained so far. 200 user teachers for educational television programmes were also trained.
Cviii) Uttar Pradesh—Arrangements for provision of radio/ transistors to schools and utilisation of radio broadcast pro grammes by 4,000 schools in the State arc in progress. Several films produced by the Education Expansion Department, Allahabad are being telecast by Doordarshan, Lucknow for aon- formal education of adults. In-service teacher training pro gramme is also being organised and about 1,000 teachers have benefited. 12
. Working Group on Educational Teachnology
Tile Ministry of Education and Social Welfare set up a Working Group on Educational Technology with a view to identifying areas of priorities, working out detailed schemes and indicating financial implications- The representatives of the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Doordarshan, All India Radio, Department of Social Welfare. State Governments and some members of the Press were included in the Working Group. The Working Group has recommended the continuation of "Central financial support for the Educational Technology Programme for all States and Union Territories at least for another five years. It also recommended the setting up of an institute of Educational Technology in each State which could absorb the Educational Technology Cells wherever they existed. These Educational Technology Cells will function as a separate wing of the S1E or SCERT in the States. The report of the Working Group has been published and is ready for distribution to the States. The States would be asked to prepare a blue print for an Educational Technology Wing in the SIE or SCERT. They would be left free to formulate programmes according to ’heir needs.
NATIONAL COUNCIL OF EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH & TRAINING
..The National Council of Educational Research and Training continued to undertake research, development, extension/training activities for the qualitative improvement of school education in the country, in line with the change in educational policy. The highlights of the programmes and activities for the year are given below :
I. Curriculum Development Work
{i - Preparation of textbooks under 10 + 2 Pattern of E,duea:a;n : As per recommendations of the Ishwarbhai Patel Comnu ice's Report, work in scrutinising curricula and textbooks main.'; with a view to reducing the load and burden was taken up.
The revision of 19 titles for classes 1. II, III and X was undertaken, besides the development of new textbooks in variu..' subjects. 13
h: the area of curriculum development the activities included 'preparation of model draft curriculum .samples in socially useful productive work on food, shelter, clothing, health, hygiene and soda! and community services through workshops of key persons, prinl'ng of 10 story picture books for primary children, and a school-rcadiness kit for direct new entrants to primary schools and holding of 3 workshops for developing instructional and evaluation material, one in history, geography and civics for class VIII, the second in Hindi for classes XI, Xll and the third 'or developing unit tests in Biology at +2 stage.
{■:; Vocaiionalization of Education at the + 2 Stage: NCERT conducted orientation programmes and guided district vocational services in Karnataka, Tamil Nadu and" Harvana. It also conducted a study of educational opportunities in Andhra lJradc>h and a critical study of the progress of vocational courses in Karnataka.
II. Training Programmes
<■)*. summer institutes were held— 34 for science and mathe matics and 55 in language and humanities. Besides, an orienta tion course in micro-teaching for the personnel of the SIE’s, '.raining programmes for authors and evaluators of textbooks and
Mi. Extension Programmes
it the context of the recommendations of the Workin" Group on Universalisation of Elementary Education that there3 should ic no detention up to class VIII, but with periodic evaluation and assessment to maintain standards, a conference of evaluation » StatC Evaluatl0n u 'iits was held in May, 1978 iiesides m evaluation, an all-India training course and a seminar were neld at Simla in June, 1978. Further, a seminai on management of public examinations was held at Delhi in October, 14
While the work on the annual seminar on Readiness Pro gramme for Elementary and Secondary Teacher Educators, which is organised every year, was in progress, workshops lor secon dary teachers in four States, namely, Rajasthan, Andhra Pradesh. West Bengal and Madhya Pradesh, were organised under Inten sive Teacher Education Programme (1TEP).
Textbooks Evaluation : Two NCERT textbooks in languages and social sciences were evaluated in a workshop held in August, 1978, while 3 language textbooks were taken up for try out in 12 schools in various States. Besides, 40 textbooks c: minority languages of Madhya Pradesh for classes 1 to V were evaluated.
IV. Regional Colleges of Education
The four Regional Colleges of Education continued to orga nise pre-service and in-service training programmes.
(i) Pre-Service Training : Besides continuing to offer one- year B.Ed. course, and a new specialised course introduced in 1977-78 at B.Ed. level in elementary education to prepare persons competent to supervise and train teachers in elementary educa tion, M.Ed. courses were continued as below : Ajmer — Science Education Bhopal — Elementary Education Bhubaneswar— Curricula Construction, Educational Administration and Education'll Measurement.
The Mysore College offers a two-year post-graduate course of M.Sc. M.Ed. in physics, chemistry and mathematics.
(ii) In Service Training : In regard to in-service training the Regional Colleges continued the programme of summer schools- cum-correspondence course with an enrolment of 1000 teacher:-, correspondence-ofm-contact programme for secondary teachers with an enrolment of 10,000 teachers and the correspondence- cwm-contact programme for elementary teacher-educators with an enrolment of 600 teacher-educators. A number of short in-service training programmes were also conducted. 15
V. Survey and Research Activities (i) Survey : As indicated earlier, the Fourth All India Edu cational Survey in the field of school education in all States and Union Territories was mounted during the year. The various schedule and necessary analysis at the block, district and slate levels were prepared, printed and supplied in adequate numbers to the states for preparing the survey tables. Two training pro grammes were organized at the national level to orient the State- level officers who were incharge of the survey, the NCERT also helped in the organisation of training programmes for the field- level officers in the States involved in the survey work. (ii) Research : Approved by the Educational Research and innovation Committee (ERIC), 44 research projects in school education have been in progress in the various departments of the NCERT and its Regional Colleges. A sum of Rs. 5,41,340 has been sanctioned for these projects. 36 research projects undertaken by individuals or institutions were approved with a total expenditure of Rs. 2,36,100-
VI, Special Programmes/Projects
(i) Universalization of Elementary education : Universaliza tion of elementary education through formal and non-formal ap proaches has been receiving prior attention in the Council in line with the declared policy of the Government. Programmes of non-formal education have been taken up in 5 centres in tribal, hilly, rural and scheduled caste areas and in the urban slums located in Uttar Pradesh, Gujarat, Bihar and Delhi, as alter native programmes to formal education. Further, learning pack ages for non-formal education for school drop-outs have been developed for the various target groups and sent for printing. These will be tried out in non-formal education centres in all the Hindi-speaking States, to be set up according to the State pl;;ns of universalisation. "
(ii) Population Education : The Unit in Population Educa tion has taken a base-line survey to prepare the ground for the development of a national project on population education to be funded by UNFPA. Work on the following items has been completed, (i) co-operative development of learning units in population education; (ii) a national source book on Population Education; and (iii) a country ease study on Co-ordination between Population and Educational Policies. 16
(iii) National Integration Project : Two National Integration camps, one for teachers and the other for students, were orga nised. (iv) National Talent Search: During 1978 the NCliRi' h.-.-- held the National Talent Search Tests at three different .tiagk-'. i.e. class X, class XI and class Xll. The number of candidate-; who appeared in these tests and the number of awards made arc as follows :
No. of No. ot Cai.dUla- \« ra .- ICS
Class \ ...... '7.640 25»
( lass XI ...... 8.760 100 C lassX ir...... 17,831 150
(v) National Science Exhibition : The V III National Scion:: Exhibition for children was held at Teen Murti Bhavan, New Delhi in November, 1978. Over 400 science exhibits mostly fabricated by school children of 26 States/Union Territories were on display.
VII. Collaboration with the Stales
The 18 Field Units of NCERT in various StalCi./UnKv.-. Territories continued their work relating to dissemination of in formation, collection of useful feed back and maintaining liaison with the State Governments/Union Territory Administrations m implementing the Council's major projects and activities. Besides, the various departments of the Council pursued a number oi activities in collaboration with the States. Mention may be made of developing- suitable primers and teachers’ guides for adult education programme in collaboration with Madhya Pradesh, a training programme covering 160 T.V. user primary schools ol the Municipal Corporation of Delhi, development of diagnostic tests in modern mathematics for primary teachers in a 15-day workshop organised by the GET and orienting key persons in geography at the secondary stage in collaboration with Kerala.
V m . International Contacts
The Council continued to keep contact with educational agen cies and organisations in other countries and to follow programmes 17 with international agencies, besides providing training programmes (o l'oreign nationals. Mention may be made of a workshop in Novembcr-Deeember, 1978, sponsored by Unesco and participat ed by Afghanistan, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal and Indonesia, on laboratory maintenance and procedures in secondary schools with special reference to biology, two-month training programmes lor primary teachers of Afghanistan and the contribution of a collection of toys alongwilh a slide-cvwMape programme, a video tape, a short film and a brochure, for exhibition at the 20th General Conference of Unesco in Paris. A number of NCERT officers were deputed abroad under Cultural Exchange Programmes and also in connection with vari ous workshops, seminars and conferences held under international auspices in various areas of school education.
IX. Development oS Audio-Visual and Ancillary Materials
I he following constitute the main features of the programme of developing audio-visual materials during the year : —
(i) Proto-typc of low-cost teaching aids like charts, pos ters, flash-cards, games, etc. for rural primary tea- chcrs ;
(ii) Audio-visual material for non-formal education of rural adults and for population education : and
(iii) Five new prints, six English versions of films produc ed earlier, a video tape on toys' making and a few tape-cff/H-slidc programmes.
Further, a production-orientcd workshop to produce aids in natural and social sciences for classes IX and X and a national workshop on low-cost simple play materials and games were organised. w
X. Publication and Documentation
The Council continued to publish during the year, its five journals, namely, Indian Educational Review (English), the Jour nal of Indian Education (English), School Science (English) Primary Teacher/Primary Shikshak (English and Hindi), and NCERT Newsletter (English).
The Council also published 163 textbooks through its Publi cation Department, 44 textbooks through private publishers, 14 18 research monographs, 2 supplementary rea'ders and 7 miscellane ous reports. The Documentation Cell continued to prepare educational abstracts and bibliographies and brought out 5 titles.
CENTRAL BOARD OF SECONDARY EDUCATION
The Central Board of Secondary Education is an autonomous organisation under this Ministry. It conducts Secondary and Higher Secondary examinations for the schools affiliated to it. The 12 year higher secondary pattern of education was imple mented by it from 1st May, 1975, beginning with Class X. Conse quently, the first examination at the secondary stage was conduct ed in March, 1977 and the first batch of class XI entered in plus 'wo stage in the academic year 1977-78 and will be completing class XII in 1978-79. The Board, taking into consideration the recommendations of the Review Committees on Curricula for the 10 year school and higher secondary pattern decided as follows : —
A. Reduction in Curriculum Load (i) Substantial reduction made in the language textbooks and in the syllabi of Sciences, Mathematics and Social Sciences were made for Secondary School Examination, 1978. (ii) At plus two stage also the syllabi were pruned wherever iiccessary and circulated with respect to the then Class XI of the plus two stage appearing at the Senior School Certificate Exami nation. 1979. (iii) The textbooks were also revised and fresh editions brought out after deleting the relevant portions in consonance with the recommendations of the Review Committee. (iv) Two subjects, Economics and Commerce, were dropped from the courses of Social Sciences for class IX of the academic session 1977-78, scheduled to appear at the Secondary School Examinations, 1979.
B. Dropping of the Semester System and Reorganisation of the Syllabi According to the pattern suggested in the NCERT document ‘Higher Secondary Education and its Vocationalisation’, the semes- ur system was adopted at the plus two stage. The semester system wis not however found to be practicable on account of varied geographical factors obtaining in different parts of the country wiere the Central Board of Secondary Education schools are located, as also due to admission schedules of different universities wierein the Central Board of Secondary Education candidates hive to seek admissions. While the examinations at the end of Cass XI will be internal in character and will be held by the schools on the question papers supplied by the Board, the one a: the end of Class XII will be fully external and will be conducted b; the Board. The question papers at the end of class XII will be set on the portions of the syllabus meant for class XII.
C Devising New Courses in the light of Recommendations made by Review Committees Two Working Groups were set up by the Board to examine tlv recommendations made by the Review Committees. The new scnenie of studies recommended by the Working Groups were approved by the Board in its meeting held on 15th May, 1978 wveh inter-aliu decided that the new courses (scheme of studies) bi made effective from the academic session of 1979-80 beginning wth class IX at the Secondary stage and class XI at the Higher Secondary stage.
D Preparations Made ( i) Syllabi and Courses : The syllabi and courses in Academic arras bo'ih at the Secondary and Senior Secondary Stages have been drafted by the Committees of Courses of the Board. The C.-ntral Board of Secondary Education generally follows the ceurses and text-books prepared by the NCERT in the subjects of Sciences. Mathematics and Social Sciences. In Vocational Courses, the syllabi are proposed to be planned ir such a manner that the students may be able to offer combi- mtions of academic and vocational courses. (ii) Textbooks : The Board has done away with the system o: prescribing sole textbooks for different electives with the object o allowing more intensive study and access to more than one book. This has been necessitated by several other practical consi- dtrations. The books for class XI have been invited from pub- li:hcrs in subjects of Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Mathematics, Eistory, Geography, Political Science, Economics^ Home Science, Commerce and Accountancy. NCERT books will however be ircluded in the list of books recommended. Ii F.SW/78— 3 In the languages, the Board wiJl be following its own books, NCERT books and the books published by different universities and State Boards according to the requirements of the languages.
(iii) Sample Question Papers : The Senior School Certificate Examination, 1979 being the first examination under the new scheme of study, the Board also brought out a set of Sample Question Papers in important subjects with a view to giving students and teachers an idea of the level of achievement expected at this stage.
(iv) Orientation of Teachers : With the introduction of new syllabi, it became necessary that teachers should be given refresher course in the subject content and methodology of teaching in new topics. About 5,000 teachers in different subjects were therefore orienied through Summer Institutes, organised in collaboration with NCFRT, Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan and the Directorate of Education, Delhi Administration. This year, the teachers were oriented in the contents of class XII syllabus while in the first phase, organised in summer of 1977, the teachers were oriented in the contents of class XI. Thus the training programme of the teachers as far as new courses are concerned, has been completed.
Seminars, Workshops etc.
The Board has been organising/participating in seminars, workshops and training projects etc. with a view to familiarising the teachers with the latest teaching techniques and tools. Work shops on ‘open’ schools, Socially Useful Productive Work, Project Technology and in Mathematics, training projects in school managements, improved mathematics and science teaching, paper setting etc. are mentionable activities in this field. Some of the training projects are undertaken in collaboration with the British Council. Selected teachers are deputed to specialised institutions in the United Kingdom for training and orientation.
KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
During the year, 23 new Kendriya Vidyalayas were opened, bringing the total of the Kendriya Vidyalayas in the country to 265. These include Vishesh Kendriya Vidyalaya at New Delhi run for the students from the northern border-areas and the Kendriya Vidyalaya at Kathmandu, meant for the children of the Government of India employees in Nepal, and also the Kendriva 21
Vidyalaya opened at Chukhs Project in Bhutan. The students en rolment in Kendriya Vidyalayas rose from 1,82,883 in 1977-78 to 2,02,876 in 1978-79 registering an increase of 10.9 per cent.
Examination Results
The All-India Secondary School Examination was held in March 1978 at the end of Class X under 10 plus 2 scheme ; 9896 students from 191 Kendriya Vidyalayas appeared m the examination. Of the first fifteen positions recorded by the Central Board of Secondary Education, 1st, 7th, 10th, 11th and 13th posi tions were secured by the students of the Kendriya Vidyalayas. The over-all pass percentage was 92 afier taking into account the result of the compartmental examination.
Summer Institutes and In-service Training for Kendriya Vidyalaya Teachers *
Fifty Summer Institutes were organised for P.G.T.’s in Eng lish, Hindi, History, Geography, Economics, Physics, Chemistry and Biology. In all about 1,150 teachers were trained in them. 23 Principal attended the in service training course organised in October, 1978.
Upgradation of Vidyalayas
Thirteen K-cndriya Vidyalayas were upgraded during 1978 to the plus 2 stage and the total number of such Vidyalayas is now 146. '
National Talent Search Scholarship
Of 100 National Science Talent Search Scholarships awarded by the NCERT, 24 were secured by the students of Kendriya Vidyalayas. Besides these, 3 other students won scholarships for higher studies in Mathematics and one of them lopped the list.
CENTRAL TIBETAN SCHOOLS ADMINISTRATION
The Central Tibetan Schools Administration is an autonomous organisation set up with the object of managing and assisting institutions for the education of children of Tibetan refugees in India. 22
The Administration is at present running 1'our residential schools and 17 day schools. Assistance in the form of grant-in-aid is being provided by the Administration to ten institutions.
The total number of students studying in the schools^un or aided by the Administration is 9400, out of which 15/7 are boarders and 7823 day scholars. In residential schools, apart from board and lodging, daily necessities and medical facilities are also provided free to orphans who come to India as lefugecs. Mid-day meals, free textbooks and stationery arc also provided to all students including those studying in day schools. All sehooK have suitable libraries,"teaching aids and equipment. The Admi nistration has 445 employees, which includes 350 teachers. The Central Tibetan Schools impart education through common media, syllabi and textbooks- Schools having class IX and above arc affiliated to the Central Board of Secondary Education. Class XT under the plus two stage has been opened in the schools at Darjeeling, Dulhousie and Mussoorie. The result of Tibetan schools in "the Secondary School Examination held by the Central Board of Secondary Education in 1978 was 62.5 per cent.
BAL BHAVAN, NEW DELHI
The highlights of the Bhawan’s activities during the year are : (i) Celebration of four festivals, Varsha Ritu, Indepen dence Day, Mahatma Gandhi’s Birthday and Child ren’s Day. Celebrations on the occasion of the Children’s Day on 14th November, 1978 were held on four days, with more than ten thousand partici pating in them. The activities also included work shops for teachers and parents in painting, collage, modelling and photography. (ii) Conduct of orientation and refresher courses for teach ers of Delhi Administration and personnel of Jawahar Bal Bhavans. (iii) Conduct of a workshop on Art Education inputs to primary curriculum in collaboration with NCERT. 23
Bal Bhavan activities have been under continuous implementation in 70 Delhi schools.
NATIONAL FOUNDATION FOR TEACHERS’ WELFARE
The 23rd meeting of the General Committee of the Founda tion was held on July 15, 1978 under the Chairmanship of the Union Education Minister. The Committee considered, inter-alia, proposals for the best possible utilisation of the 5 crore Corpus of the Foundation.
An amount of Rs. 4.45 crores has been collected so far for the targeted 5-crore Corpus of the Foundation. It is intended to serve as a reserve fund and teacher welfare schemes are pro posed to be financed out of the income from the Corpus, once the target of Rs. 5 crores is reached- In order to help the Founda tion to achieve the target soon, the Government of India have agreed to make a recurring grant of Rs. 1 lakh with effect from 1978-79 for four years.
In the light of views expressed at the 23rd meeting of the General Committee, a sub-committee has been set up under the Chairmanship of Smt. Renuka Devi Barkataki, Minister of State in the Ministry to consider ways and means for the best use of the Corpus.
1 cachets' Day was observed on September 5, as in previous years. Voluntary contributions were raised and functions were arranged throughout the country to honour teachers.
The Foundation honours 3 teachers of not less than 30 years standing for long and meritorious service. Selections were made for 1977 award, during the year.
National Awards to Teachers
In 1976 the teachers of Arabic/Persian Madrasas run on traditional lines were also brought within the purview of the scheme. Each award carried with it a certificate of merit, a metal badge and a cash amount of one thousand rupees. ’
Fill 1977, 1,797 teachers have received awards. Of these 973 are primary school teachers, 725 secondary school teachers, 94 Sanskrit teachers of Sanskrit Pathshalas" and tols and 5 Teachers of Arabic/Persian Madrasas. 24 From 1977 onwards each State/Union Territory is entitled to at least one award. Earlier smaller States were combined and en titled to two awards and all the Union Territories (except Delhi) to one award. The total number of awards is now 116 of which 102 awards arc for primary and secondary school teachers. 9 for teachers from Sanskrit Pathshalas and 5 for Arabic/Persian teachcrs of Madrasas.
GIRLS’ AND WOMEN'S EDUCATION
Recognising the importance of girls’ and women’s education in socio-economic development, the Government of India have formulated a variety of measures from time to time to promote girls' and women’s education. Provision of universal free and compulsory education for all children up to the age of 14 is a Constitutional responsibility according to Article 45 and the Directive Principles of the Constitution. Education in Classes I— V is free in Government schools and schools run by local bodies in all parts of the country.
Enrolment At the end of 1976-77, 63.5 per cent of the girls in the age- group 6— 11 and 24.5 per cent in the age-group 11— 14 have attended primary and middle schools, as against 24.6 per cent in the age-group 6— 11 and. 4.5 per cent in the age-group 6— 14 during 1950-51. At the secondary stage also, the enrolment of girls has shown marked progress. By the end of 1973-74, 27.5 per cent of girls’ enrolment was recorded, as against 13.5 per cent in 1950-51. In 1976-77, 8.77 million girls were enrolled in high and higher secondary schools, as against 7.55 million in 1968-69. In 1975-76, the total number of girls in higher education was 595,000 as against 40,000 in 1950-51. Under the programme of universa lisation of elementary education, it is proposed to enrol 213 lakhs of girls of the age-group 6— 14 in classes I—VIII. This would mean considerable increase of girls enrolment in these classes from 51.2 per cent in 1977-78 to 81.5 per cent in 1982-83.
Drop-Outs
The drop-out rate is very high in Classes I—V. Roughly, it is estimated that for every 100 children that enter Class I, only about 40 complete Class V and about 25 complete Class VIII. 25
A recent study has shown that drop-out rate in the case oi girls from rural areas and from the less privileged sections of the society is as heavy as 42.85 per cent between Classes I and II. The hard core of non-enrolled children are girls, particularly in the rural areas and children belonging to Scheduled Castes, Sche duled Tribes, landless agricultural labourers and urban slum dwellers.
Wastagt and Stagnation The difference between the rates of wastage and stagnation for boy: (66.3 per cent) and girls (71.36 per cent) is highly significait. It is 42.85 per cent between grades I and II, 12.12 per cen: between grades II and III, 8.5 per cent between grades III and IV and 8 per cent between IV and V. While the eco nomic aid educational reasons of wastage and stagnation applied to a lane extent both to boys and girls, in the case of girls, social factors ike early marriage, betrothal, family chores, social pre judices n rural areas and parental apathy to girls’ education play a more ;ignificant part.
The National Adult Education Programme has given a high priority o the women’s education.
Educational Concessions ior Children of Officers and Men of th« Arned Forces killed or disabled.
F'oll'wing the Indo-Pakistan conflict in December, 1971, the Central 3overnment proposed to the State Governments to give the follwing educational concessions to the children of defence perso>nnl and para-military forces killed or permanently disabled durimg tie hostilities for their studies up to the first degree level :
a) Complete exemption from tuition and other fees levied by educational institutions concerned as well as charg ed levied for school bus maintained by the school and actual fares for railway pass for students or bus fare certified by head of institutions ; (>) Grants to meet hostel charges in full for those study ing in boarding schools and colleges ; c) Full cost of books and stationery ; and
tl) Full cost of uniform where this is compulsory- 26
Most of the State Governments/Union Territories agreed to the proposal and announced educational concessions more or less on the above lines for such children studying in educational insti tutions under their control. These concessions are being con tinued in the Central Government institutions and some private institutions not recognised by any State Government. This faci lity was extended to children of defence personnel and para military forces killed or disabled during the 1962 and 1965 wars.
Hostel Subsidy to Central Government Employees
On the recommendations of Third Pay Commission relating to educational facilities and allowances, orders were issued that hostel subsidy would be payable to all permanent and quasi permanent Central Government employees and such temporary employees as have put in not less than one years’ service belong ing to groups A, B, C and D (without any upper pay-limit), who on account of their transfer are obliged to keep their children in the hostel of a residential school away from the station at which they are posted and/or are residing. The hostel subsidy is admis sible at a uniform rate of Rs. 60 per month per child.
Junior Division N.C.C. Troops in Public, Residential and Cent ral Schools
The expenditure on the maintenance of Junior Division N.C.C. troops in Public, Residential and Central Schools is shared between the Ministry of Education and Ministry of Defence on 40 : 60 basis.
It has been agreed to allow admission in Junior Division N.C C. for classes upto XII and Senior Division for undergraduate and classes above.
Scheme of assistance to Voluntary Organisations Working in the field of School Education
Under the Scheme of assistance to Voluntary Educational Organisations the Ministry had been giving grants to the Insti tutions/Organisations Working in the field of School education. The grants were given on non-recurring basis and no recurring grants were released. The Scheme was in abeyance since 1st April. 1972. It was revived in April, 1978. However, some modifica tions in the scheme arc again under consideration. CHAPTER II
HIGHER EDUCATION AND RESEARCH
Maintenance and determination of standards in higher educa tion has been a spccial responsibility of the Centra! Government. While this responsibility for the whole country is discharged mainly through the University Grants Commission, a number of educa tional and research institutions in the field of higher education have come into being under Central auspices through the years of independence. They are : (1) Central Universities, (ii) Nation al Staff College for Educational Planners and Administrators. New Delhi ; (iii) The Indian Institute of Advanced Study. Simla : (iv) Shastri Indo-Canadian Institute. New Delhi and (v; The Indian Council of Social Sciencc Research, New Delhi. Besides, the Ministry of Education follows a number of schemes i:: this field, particularly relating to academic collaboration between India and other countries. A brief account of the activities of these institutions and programmes is given in this chapter.
A. U niversity G rants C om m ission
The Policy Frame tor Higher Education and Approach to Development.
During the year 1978-79, the University Grants Commission finalised two important documents : The Policy Frame for the Development of Higher Education in India over the next 10— 15 years; and a paper on Approach to Development for the Plan period 1978— 83.
The Policy Frame visualises a framework within which the present value system and the basic structure and processus of the present educational system could be radically changed, making it more flexible and dynamic, and move in the direction of reducing disparities, and augmenting opportunities for life-long learning to all those who would take advantage of them. The Policy Frame also envisages that in addition to the traditional vaiue of teaching and research, universities in the country would be helped
27 28 to make extension, including adult education and community ex tension work, an integrated part of their programmes.
The Approach Paper for the Development of Higher Educa tion in the next plan period outlines the basic philosophy and strategies for development of universities and colleges. It envi sages a differentiated approach towards developed and developing universities and laying more emphasis on quality programmes designed to raise standards of teaching and research. The expan sion of educational facilities through the opening of new univer sities or new centres of postgraduate studies and new departments, or establishment of new arts, science, commerce and law colleges would receive very low priority.
For purposes of development, the universities would be group ed or. appropriate criteria into three categories viz. well-developed universities; developing universities; and universities which have the potential to reach the well developed stage in the next five years with some critical inputs and academic guidance. The main thrust for the well developed departments would be to pro vide assistance for quality improvement programmes and research on the basis of well-designed and time-bound programmes with specific academic accountability; the general plan assistance being marginal in such cases. Developed universities with strong de partments would be helped to establish relationship through which they could help the academic growth of the less developed uni versities and similar departments in the subjects. The strategy to be adopted by the University Grants Commission during the next plan period for the development of colleges and improve ment of standards of higher education in the college sector involves basic grants to colleges, development grants to undergraduate colleges, development of postgraduate colleges, quality improve ment programmes, lead colleges, special assistance to colleges in educationally backward districts and autonomous colleges.
With a view to consulting the Vice-Chancellors on policies and programmes for the development of higher education to be taken in the next plan period, as a follow-up of the Policy Frame, the ‘Approach Paper’ adopted by the Commission and also the recommendations of the Planning Group and Working Groups, the University Grants Commission organised two Regional Confer ences of Vice-Chancellors in May and July, 1978. The confer ences expressed their general agreement with the philosophies, programmes and strategies outlined in the Approach Paper, con taining inter-alia. the Guidelines for development, and also endors 29
ed the proposed pattern of the utilisation of the likely total allo cation of Rs. 210 crores which was initially proposed to be made available to the UGC in the sixth plan period 1978— 83. The Conferences generally accepted that in order to discharge its res ponsibility to the education system and to the society as a whole, the university must assume extension as an important function and give it the same status as teaching and research. The confer ences also recommended that there should be a moratorium on the establishment of new colleges and universities in the next five years, the needs cf expansion being provided by strengthening existing colleges, especially the non-viable colleges and by means of non-formal education. Students from backward areas where no worthwhile colleges exist could go to colleges in neighbouring areas and be given special bursaries and hostel accommodation and tints enabled to receive better quality education.
The Approach Paper containing the guidelines to the univer sities and colleges for preparation of proposals for the sixth plan were formulated keeping in view the expected allocation of Rs. 2 i 0 crores during the plan period. With the increased allo cation to the Stales Sector for the development of higher educa tion, the Planning Commission recently indicated that the outlas for the period 1978—83 for the UGC is likely to be Rs. 126 crores only and suggested that the UGC should use its scheme with selective discretion. The Commission has recently appointed a committee With the terms of references (i) to undertake a com prehensive review of the on-going programmes of the Commission and < ii) to ascertain if there are any peripheral schemes that could be discontinued. With a view to assessing the impact of the grants on the determination and maintenance of standards of teaching, research and examinations, the committee proposes to undertake in depth study of two selected universities and between 2 to 6 selected colleges in cach of the four zones.
The Commission, with the help of a Committee, reviewed the priorities for the development of higher education in the light of the allocation that is likely to be available for the next four years 1979—83 and resolved in January 1979 as under :
(i) The ratio of 3 : 2 as envisaged in the Approach Paper, for providing assistance for general develop ments on the one hand and quality programmes and support for research on the other," may have to be reduced to 2 : 1 as at present in the fifth plan. The 30
ratio of general development assistance between the universities and colleges would also have to be 2 : 1 as against 3 : 2 proposed in the Approach Paper.
(ii) All eligible colleges may be provided asvsiance ior faculty improvement programmes to enable at least 10 per cent of the teachers for improving their qua lifications and to develop about 750 colleges to be identified keeping in mind the special needs of oack- vvard areas, sections and communities, to enable them to maintain adequate standards of teaching, and to assist as many colleges as possible, to participate :n the quality improvement programmes on a selective basis.
(iii) Normally, no fresh building proposals from the uni versities and colleges would be sanctioned and where the construction has not already started, they may he reviewed.
Trends and Orientation of growth of Higher Education
The Fifth Five Year Plan (1974—78) witnessed certain stability in enrolment in higher education system. As a result of the pclicv of the Commission that only institutions breaking new ground, providing innovative courses or providing good qua lity education for backward/weaker sections/areas would be cleared as being fit to receive assistance from Central sources in terms of rules prescribed under Section 12A of the UGC Aet. unplanned growth of universities and colleges declined. There were 105 universities and 10 institutions deemed to be uni\ersities under Section 3 of the UGC Act during 1977-78 ; the corres ponding numbers in January, 1979 were 108 and 10, respectively. Jn the case of colleges, restraints have been shown by the State Governments/Universities in giving permission for .starting new colleges. The growth rate on an average was 200 college* per annum during the period 1969—73. As per information avail able with the Commission, the number of new colleges established in the year dropped to about 150 in 1973-74, 80 in 197--75, 120 in 1975-76, 61 in 1976-77 and 41 in 1977-78. There uvrc 4610 colleges in 1977-78. Regulation of expansion in the number of colleges it is expected, would help the existing institutions to have larger enrolments which would also be conducive to raising the standards of collegiate education. 31
As regards enrolment, the growth rate in universities and colleges, excluding PUC/Intermediate/pre-professional/pre-medi cal was about 14 per cent in 1969-70. This fell down to 5 9 per cent in 1974-75, to 2.5 per cent in 1975-76, to 0.2 per cent in 1976-77 and rose to 5.5 per cent in 1977-78. Efforts arc being made to see that the growth rate is not allowed to become unmanageable once again. There were about 25.65 lakhs students in the universities and colleges in 1977-78. The affiliated colleges account for 84.2 per cent of the total enrolment. The percentage of students in affiliated colleges was as high as 88.8 per cent at undergraduate stage, 53.9 per cent at postgra duate stage and 14.4 per cent at the research level. The overall decline in growth of enrolment could be attributed to socio-eco nomic development as also to the additional facilities made avail able for non-formal education through private study and corres pondence courses. Enrolment at postgraduate level/stage as a proportion of total enrolment at the university and college level increased from 9.0 per cent in 1976-77 to 9.1 per cent in 1977-78.
Equalization of Educational Opportunities
While enrolments, in general, are being regulated in the inte rest ol maintenance of standards and proper utilisation of the scarce resources, specific measures like the provision of remedial courses and reservation of seats have been adopted to ensure that students belonging to the weaker and under-privileged sec tions o( the society iu'e not denied access to higher education. The Fifth Plan proposals of the universities and colleges took into account the need for special facilities to be provided for back ward areas and special efforts to be made towards removal of re gional imbalances. The Commission also liberalised the minimum eligibility conditions in respect of enrolment and faculty strength as also the pattern of assistance for colleges located in tribal/back ward areas. For the construction of academic buildings by col leges located in such areas, the Commission’s contribution is 2/3rd of the approved cost as against 50 per cent allowed to other insti tutions. For student hostels, the Commission’s assistance is 75 per cent of approved cost for colleges in backward areas as against 50 per cent for others. All institutions assisted by the Commission towards the construction of hostels for students are now required to reserve 20 per cent of the seats in such hostels lor students belonging to Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes.
The State Governments have been advised to set up Inter University Coordination Boards so as to make the use of all 32 available resources and expertise tor the coordinated development of the academic programmes of the various universities in each State. The universities have also been asked to set up a planning Board which would engage itself in a continuous review of the implementation of the various academic programmes in the uni versities, prepare long-term plan and suggest measures to involve the universities more closely with the problems and needs of the community. The Commission has agreed to provide assistance for the appointment of teaching and technical staff for a period of full live years—upto the end of 31st March, 1981. The uni versities have been requested to make appointments to academic staff through open advertisements on an all India basis in respect of posts sanctioned by the Commission.
Some i'f the important steps taken by the Commission towards the devei pment of higher education include special assistance to the Centres of Advanced Study, Departments of Special Assis tance, Development of Colleges, Restructuring of Courses, Exami nation Reforms, Faculty Improvement Programmes including organisation of Seminars, Workshops and Refresher Courses for teachers, travel grants to teachers, Special Assistance to Teacher Education and Research, programmes of areas study and research fellowships and improvement of undergraduate education. Steps have also been taken towards giving autonomy to selected colleges so that they can experiment with new educational processes and bring about necessary changes in the courses of study and tech niques of teaching and evaluation.
Development of Colleges The Commission continued to provide assistance to the arts, science and commerce colleges within a ceiling of Rs. 3 to 10 lakhs for the improvement of undergraduate education. Assistance to postgraduate colleges for strengthening postgraduate studies is being made at the rate of Rs. 1 to 2 lakhs per department. Proposals have also been invited from teachers training colleges, institutes of home science, schools of social work etc., at the rate of Rs- 1.5 lakhs per college as Commission’s share.
The Rs. 3 to 10 lakh scheme for general development to be implemented by the colleges includes provision for construction of buildings, purchase of books and equipment, workshops, ani mal house, faculty improvement, including practical training and experience as also orienting courses towards community needs. Both city colleges and colleges in rural areas are being" assisted 33
to restructure their courses, provide remedial courses under this programme so as to make them relevant to the needs of students from rural/backward areas and students belonging to the weaker sections of the society. By 1978-79 proposals of about 1200 col leges under the scheme would be accepted. In the general deve lopment scheme, an arts, science and commerce college with an enrolment of 1000 students and above is entitled to a' grant of Rs. eight to ten lakhs. To improve the facilities in the colleges in the matter of pro viding books and equipment for science laboratories to support the undergraduate programmes, the Commission made available to every eligible college with an enrolment of 150 students and above basic grants between Rs. 10.000 to 40,000 for books and between Rs. 10,000 to 40,000 for scientific equipment. About 2300 colleges have been assisted under the Scheme. It has further been agreed that one or two colleges in each district be identified as ‘lead colleges’ to work as quality institu tions. The colleges which have a viable enrolment, a satisfactory student-teacher ratio and good facilities will be chosen with the help of universities so that such institutions could be developed to take up quality programmes on the principles of diversification, modernisation, etc. Such ‘lead colleges’ will also help in providing good education to society under-privileged sections. Additional assistance upto Rs. three to five lakhs may be provided to such colleges in addition to the assistance available to them under Rs. 5 lakh Scheme. The Commission has selected about 100 college under this Scheme. The Commission has started the process of selecting colleges located in backward/rural areas and serving the needs of the weaker sections of the societv in the States, in further relaxation of the eligibility conditions. These colleges are being selected in consultation with the State Governments and the Universities.
Restructuring of Courses
The Commission has appointed a Standing Committee to ad vise it on the general policy regarding the restructuring of courses at the undergaduate stage by following the introduction of 12 years of secondary schooling. The Commission has also jet up Joint Consultative Committees with Indian Medical Council, Indian Council of Agricultural Research. Bar Council and Natio nal Council of Educational Research and Training for studying the implications of the new pattern of professional courses. The 34
recommendations made by these Committees have been accepted and circulated to the universities and the concerned organisations for necessary action.
1 lie Commission has communicated a set of guidelines to uni versities for restructuring of courses of studies at the first degree level with general principles of relevance and flexibility so that they would be related to local needs and environment. With the help of Review Committees, Subject Panels and Regional Work shops, it has initiated a process that would lead to the updating and modernisation of syllabi and courses and the development of tea ching/learning process related to the individual and social needs of students. About 180 colleges, mostly in rural areas, have been selected for the purpose.
Itacher Fellowships (Faculty Improvement Programme;
The Commission has accorded priority to the faculty improve- men programmes and faculty awards. The Commission has al ready instituted about 4500 teacher fellowships at any given time, for award for a period of one to three years towards M. Phil Ph.D. degrees for college teachers in identified departments. Besides 1000 teacher fellowships have also been awarded by the Commission on an All-India basis. During 1977-78, the grant paid under this programme amounted to Rs. 115.63 lakhs, in addition over 360 summer institutes, seminars, workshops, sym posia, refresher courses etc. were organised during 1978-79 (upto December, 1978).
Research
I he Commission has been attaching great importance t
The Commission has agreed to award 25 scholarships for postgraduate studies and 50 junior research fellowships in approv ed institutions in specified subjects of relevance to the problems 35 of border hill areas to be offered to the students of border hill areas within the territorial jurisdiction of NEHU, Kashmir Uni versity. Garhwal University, Kumaon University and Himachal Pradesh University. The Commission has requested the universities to observe the guidelines issued by the Government of India for the reservation of seats for students belonging to Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and they arc also requested to give a concession of 5 per cent marks in the minimum percentage of marks required for admission to any course. The Commission has advised the uni versities to provide for reservations for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes for recruitment to the posts of Lecturers in the universities and colleges and suggested mechanics for such reser vations. Ten per cent of the research fellowships have been reserv ed for candidates belonging to Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. In addition, the Commission has instituted 20 Senior and 50 Junior Research Fellowships to be awarded annually ex clusively to candidates belonging to Scheduled Castes and Sche duled Tribes. The universities have also been requested to set up within the University a special cell to ensure implementation of the orders regarding the reservation of Scheduled Castes ana Scheduled Tribes issued by the Government of India from time to time. The Commission has, with the help of the Committees, pres cribed the minimum qualifications for recruitment to the posts of Lecturers in the faculties of arts, science, commerce, education and law. These have been circulated to the Universities and colleges for guidance. Qualifications for recruitment to the posts of Lecturers in the faculty of English and foreign languages and phy sical education, music and fine arts are being finalised. The Com mission has also prescribed minimum qualifications for the posts of Readers and Professors in the colleges and circulated the same to the universities for guidance. Adult Education, Continuing Education With a view to bringing universities closer to the community, the Commission has agreed to implement the Scheme of Adult Education through universities. To begin with, the Madras Uni versity has been selected for the purpose and seed money pro vided to it to formulate the projects of its departments and col leges. The guidelines for the implementation of the Scheme have been circulated to the universities and colleges. Guidelines for the introduction of Adult Education in tribal areas were circulated to universities. 16 ESW/78—4 36
The Commission continued to implement the Scheme of Conti nuing Education through universities. 18 universities and two institutions deemed to be universities were participating in the programme in 1977-78. The Commission organised a Conference at Bhubaneswar for universities in the eastern part of the country as follow up of the conferences held earlier at Hyderabad anti Simla. On the recommendation of these conferences, the universi ties have been requested to bring within the purview of the pro grammes, schemes relating to education of people in rural, tribal and backward areas and the weaker sections of the community, as already underlined in the guidelines.
Correspondence Courses Correspondence Courses, as a recognised form of non-formal education, in no way inferior to formal system of education, have been approved in 22 universities and institutions deemed to be universities The position in regard to the implementation of guidelines for the introduction of these courses at the under graduate and postgraduate courses, circulated earlier, is being reviewed.
Gandhian Studies The Commission has suggested to the universities the inclu sion of Gandhian Studies as one of the themes under foundation courses as part of the reorganisation of courses at the plus three stage in the context of the new pattern of education.
College Development Councils
For the proper planning and integrated development of affi liated colleges, and to provide necessary help and guidance to the colleges, the Commission agreed to provide assistance to the universities on 100 per cent basis innitially for a period of three years for setting up College Development Councils. The College Development Council is expectcd to serve as a vital link between the UGC, Hie University. Colleges and the State Gov ernment.
Sabbatical Leave and Study Leave
With the help of Committee, the Commission finalised the guidelines for the grant of sabbatical leave and study leave to university teachers. These were circulated to universities for their guidance. 37
Remedial Courses With a view to providing remedial courscs to students com ing from weaker sections of society, poor peasants and working classes from rural and city areas, the Commission agreed to provide assistance to universities and colleges, for the appoint ment of supplementary staff or for payment of honorarium to the existing staff and also for meeting contingent expenditure, if any.
Visiting Professorships and fellowships for Creative Artists and Creative Writers On the recommendations of a committee, the Commission extended the scheme of visiting professor to include creative artists and creative writers also so that they can be in residence and work at a university centre for a period of three months to one year. For eminent creative artists and creative writers out side the university system, but within the country, the scheme of visiting fellows has been instituted on the same lines as visiting professors. During 1978-79, 8 visiting fellowships have been created in six universities for creative artists and 13 uni versities have been invited for instituting visiting fellowships (one each) for creative writers.
Autonomous Colleges
The Commission agreed to the conferment of autonomous status to 4 colleges each of Madras and Madurai University. Each of these colleges is entitled to an assistance upto Rs. one lakh on 100 per cent basis for purposes of strengthening their faculty and academic programmes and administrative support required to enable them to function as autonomous institutions. This assistance would be available for a period of 5 years in the first instance.
The Commission agreed that no new college should normally be established during the next five years. However, in the case of identified backward areas where there was a felt need for opening of such colleges, this should be done only after a sur vey has been undertaken with regard to educational facilities available in each subject. These views were brought to the notice of the universities. The universities were again requested to take up in collaboration with the State Government, a dis- trictwise survey of the existing institutions of higher education 38
with regard to their location, infrastructural facilities, student enrolment and staff strength and the feeder group of schools in the district.
Science Education Centres The Commission with a view to supporting a few selected universities, approved the establishment of Science Education Centres at the universities of Madurai and Rajasthan. These Centres, it was envisaged, would have a special concern with the conditions of science education in the country and initiate appropriate activities and programmes for innovations in science education at the university level, design and fabricate necessary materials required for science tea'chers, produce literature includ ing textbooks, laboratory manuals, teachers’ guides etc.
Computer Facilities Fhe Commission has been supporting the universities to obtain computer facilities or computer time, with the help of advisory committee and expert visiting committees appointed for the purpose. A few regional computer centres are proposed to be set up in collaboration with Department of Electronics.
Book Production & Republication of Foreign Books in Cheaper Editions With a view to supplementing the efforts of the State Gov ernments and involving outstanding teachers and scholars in the production of standard text/reference books, the Commission in consultation with the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare has been providing support to Indian writers for writing quality books for university level studies since 1971. The scheme has been reviewed and modified and is being implemented with the resources of the U.G.C. The programme of re-publication of foreign books in cheap er editions, originally published in U.S.A., U.K. and U.S.S.R. and used by university and college students in areas in which there is a dearth of quality books by Indian authors is being continued.
Student Amenities The Commission continued to give assistance towards stu dents amenitievS and student welfare including the provision of 39
hostel accommodation, study centres, non-resident student cen tres, student aid fund, health centres, and the establishment of book banks. The scheme of book bank was extended to all colieges including professional colleges having enrolment of 100 students and above. Under the scheme of the book banks, multiple copies of the textbooks are provided in all college libraries and they are made available to deserving students on loan during the period of their study. The universities and colleges were also assisted towards establishing a student aid fund so that the poor and needy students might be helped to pay tuition fees and examination fees and meet other needs Hated to the study.
I he Commission with the help of a Working Group review ed the implementation of the various programmes of students amenities and student welfare and on the recommendation of Working Group has agreed to liberalise assistance for cmiiecns, establishment of student aid fund, study centres, health centres, etc. Assistance will also be provided to the universities and colleges for improvement of living conditions in hostels i.e. sanitary facilities, proper dining halls, etc. on a 75:25 sharing basis. The Commission also agreed to provide assistance to the university/colleges for gymnasium and improvement of plav fields. *■
Regional Instrumentation Centres
I here has been a steady progress in the implementation of Commission’s programme of research fellowships in humanities, social science and science and engineering and technology. Steps have also been taken to establish regional instrumentation cen tres to help the university to repair and to bring to use the idle equipment and to train technicians to maintain the equipment properly.
Cultural Exchange Programme
rhe University Grants Commission implements such of the items of the Cultural Exchange Programmes as arc assigned to it in terms of the agreements signed between the Government of India and foreign countries. These involve exchange of visits by teachers /scholars ranging from 3 to 12 weeks for lecture- cum-study. 40
During 1977-78, the Commission implemented regular cul tural exchange programmes with the Governments of Afghani stan, JBangla Desh, Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, Hungary, R om a nia, Poland, G.D.R., F.R.G., France, (J.S.S.R., Iran, Yugoslavia, Arab Republic of Egypt and Mongolia. Besides, the Commis sion also implemented ad hoc programmes of bialateral academic exchanges with some other countries. These visits have pro vided good opportunity to the Indian teachers to study the latest developments in various fields abroad. Comprehensive reports received from Indian and foreign scholarsi have also helped the Commission to formulate effective collaborative programmes between universities and institutions in India and their counter parts in the foreign countries. On the basis of experience of the Indian participants and with a view to making the best use of cultural exchanges, the Commission has taken steps to encourage studies and research in depth on collaborative basis. This has usually taken form of bilateral academic contacts on a continuing basis and speci fied departmcnts/universities/institutions after proper identifica tion of areas/disciplines in which cooperation could be profit ably permitted to the mutual advantage of both the countries. Such bilateral academic programmes include exchange of teach ers/scholars and publications and provision of joint scientific research. The Commission is laying great emphasis on identifi cation of areas/fields in which collaboration could take place between universities in India and universities/institutions in foreign countries as equal partners. As far as possible, the iden tified areas are being incorporated in the cultural exchange programmes. In addition to the regular and ad hoc Cultural Exchange Programmes, the Commission is also implementing the follow ing programmes involving international collaboration : (1 ) Indo-British Universities Collaboration Programme : Under the programme there is provision for deve lopment of academic links between selected univer sities in India and those in U.K. in pursuance of identified research programmes. The areas of collaboration are identified and thereafter joint re search programmes are drawn for participating uni versities and approved by the implementing agen cies—UGC in India and British Council in U.K. The British Council has agreed to provide for the visit of some Indian scholars to U.K. for the collec 41
tion of source material in connection with their re search work. The British Council have also agreed to provide international air fare for 6 leading Bri tish academics for visiting India for a period not exceeding 3-4 weeks. (2) Indo-.U.S. Fellowship Programme : Under this pro gramme, the University Grants Commission is re quired to offer upto 10 postgraduate fellowships to American scholars for their research work in India. Similarly, the US Government have agreed to pro vide 6 post-doctoral fellowships of the duration of 10 months and 3 visitorships of the duration of 13 weeks each for Indian scholars for their research work in U.S.A.
(3) Apart from the above, the CSIR have made avail able 150 man-days to University Grants Commis sion for the visit of the teachers from Indian Uni versities to USA for a period not exceeding 4 weeks each under the Indo-US Exchange of Scientists programme. (4 ) CSIR-CNRS (France) Exchange Programme : The CSIR have made available 200 man-days to Uni versity Grants Commission for the visit of Indian teachers to France for their research work under the agreement entered into by the CSIR and CNRS (France).
B. C entral U niversities Aligarh Muslim University During the year 1978-79, the University registered many strides following a constructive approach of cooperation on the part of students, teachers and other staff on the one hand and the university administration on the other.
31,000 applications were received for admission during 1978. This amounted to 25 per cent annual growth rate. There are 14,000 students on rolls at present. The University ran a Training and Guidance Centre. As a result, the person who topped the list of successful candidates at the IAS examination— 1978 belonged to the Aligarh Muslim University. The University students faired well in other selec tion tests also. 42
The research performance of the University improv:J ■. f’crj was increase in the number of successful Ph.D. theses (mote m the Faculty of Science). On the research front, there ha-. ' been developments in the University in the anatomy of -iw Chemistry of Oil-Seeds, the Chemistry of Enzymes i the development of a drug for heart-disease. In Games and Sports, the University sportsmen earr.e up very well. The Riding Club reached the final of the A -1 ii.iia Team Tent-Pegging in 1978. Football XT reached Ail-lndia Semi-final and Junior Football XI won the U.P. Championship. The Skating and the Swimming Teams also won the vjveia! honours.
The Annual Budget of the University was of the order j : Rs. 7 crorcs in 1978. Sufficient funds have been provided for purchase and repair of furniture, purchase of sports material and for maintenance of buildings and minor works. The University has received unsolicited gifts and donations for the benefit of its community from Islamic Foundation, Gov ernment of Jammu and Kashmir, etc. The Vice-Chancellor’s Fund has been raised to Rs. 3,25.000/-. Annual disbursement of grants to students from this Fund would exceed Rs. 1 iikh this year. The University’s development projects ;>rc mostly ,.t> ’he ground level. The teaching staff quarters and hostels iv' iOO women students were completed and occupied. The Amenities Block for students and the library of Women’s College arc now ready. The Engineering College Library, the Sanitary Blocks for S. S. Hall students and a hostel for about 150 students are now under construction. The courses in Journalism, Continuing Education and Che mical Engineering were started. The Department of Geography has been raised to the status of Centre of Special Assistance by the U.G.C. and recognised as a premier Centre of Research in Agricultural Geography in the country.
A num ber of Professors from the Faculties of Science: and Social Science chaired various sections of International Congress and presented papers at the International Congress.
The Department of Zoology hosted the 8th Annual Confer ence of Entomological Society of India on January 29 and 30. 1979. 43
Banaras Hindu University The new Vice-Chancellor, Dr- Hari Narain joined on I5th May, 1978. He made a rapid survey of immediate problems and after fixing priorities took necessary steps to complete the previous, session as well as the commencement of the session (1978-79).
Examinations
A major success has been made in the area of the examinations. Steps have been initiated to expedite the declaration of annual results latest by January, 1979.
Admission Policy
It has been decided to maintain the intake at the level of i 974-75 which in itself was the highest, prior to 1977-78 ad missions. Reservation of seats for students belonging to Scheduled Caste/Scheduled Tribe and others who are physically handicapped has been provided for. Weightage is available to Sportsmen of various categories and Debators.
Evening Classes (kamachha)
The Undergraduate courses as well as MA. (Final) and M. Com. (Final) classes are being continued at Kamachha Evening College like last year.
Facilities to Affiliated Colleges
The University has permitted increase in seats in B. Com. in D.A.V. College. A proposal to start B. Com. Courses for girls, in Vasanta College for Women, Rajghat has also been permitted.
Study Centre
Four Study Centres were established in various parts of the city during IVth Plan to offer text book facilities within the easy reach of students residing in the city. The U.G.C. has sanctioned two more study centres during the current plan. A new Centre at Godowalia was inaugurated on 21st of December. 1978. with the cooperation of the Nagar Mahapalika. 44
Coaching Classes for Competitive Examinations
To provide coaching facilities for Central services competitive examinations, a plan is almost ready and is expected to be imple mented shortly.
Participation of Students
To decentralise business and accelerate the decision making process in respect of students participation, various Boards and committees in the University such as Students Welfare Committee, Students Accommodation Committee and the Students Grievances Committee etc. have been constituted. A large number of students are represented on these bodies.
Sports
The University provides facilities for 16 major areas of sports activities. The University won the East Zone Championship in Basket Ball and secured a Gold Medal in the All India Inter University Competition in Wrestling-
Ph. B. Research and Projects
348 students have been enrolled during the period under report About 400 research scholars have been recepients of Ph. D. degrees.
Number of Degrees Awarded
Postgraduate 1747 Graduate 4608 D . Sc. 1 Chakravorty 2 Ph. D . 394
Total 6752
Appointments
The University has recently appointed 6 Visiting Profesors in Sociology, Psychology, Philosophy, Mathematics. Geophysics 45
and Metallurgy and have filled up nearly 200 out of 400 vacant teaching positions in the University.
Integrated Rural Development Programme
As per policy framed by the University Grants Commission and accepted by Inter-University Board at Rajkot session, a coordinated programme for integrated Rural Development has been drawn with the help of Institute of Technology, Institute ol Medical Sciences, Agriculture, Education, Science and Social Sciences faculties of the University. The State Bank of India have initiated a State Bank of India Chair on integrated Rural Develop ment to boost research activities.
BuiMing Programme
• a) Residential
To provide residential facilities to Teaching Staff and Employees of essential services of the University, a scheme involv ing an outlay of Rs. 1.50 crcre is under process during the year. The University is also in correspondence with the Commission for sanction of transit accommodation for Ph- D. Scholars and Teacher Fellows.
(b) Computer Cenfre and Building
The Computer Centre is built around an ICL-1904 S Central processing Unit with 128 KW A (24 bits per word) of man memory, for which University Grants Commission has sanctioned a sum of Rs. 70 lakhs. Work on the building has already com menced and it is expected to shift the computer from Bombay where it is presently stored, to the main campus by March, 1979.
(c) An auditorium (Swatantrata Bhavan) with proposed seating accommodation for nearly 2000 spectators and ancillary facilities of conferences rooms etc. is also under way.
(d) The C.P.W.D. are shortly to launch the construction of Vanijya Bhawan (Commerce Building) for which an assistance has been received through the efforts of Sri Ratanpal Singh. Sri Singh has promised an assistance of Rs. 13 lakhs. The University Grants Commission is likely to make available Rs. 7 lakhs for completion of this building. 46
Change in Faculties
With the consent of Visitor, the Faculty of Medical Sciences has been split up into the Faculty of Medicine and the Faculty af Indian Medicine. i he Faculty of Music and Fine Ars has also been bifurcated into the Faculty of Performing Arts (Music) and Faculty of Visual Arts (Fine Arts).
Deputation
During the period, more than 20 teachers were deputed abroad and nearly 150 teachers have participated in various academic meets in the country.
Conferences and Seminars Two Summer Institutes, 2 seminars, 2 symposia, 4 workshops and 2 annual conferences were organised in the University. A number of extension lectures were also delivered in various .cach ing departments. The Second Nehru Memorial Lcciurc was delivered recently by Prof. R. C. Mehrotra, Vice-Chancellor. University of Delhi. The Department of Hindi is celebrating its Diamond Jubilee this year. On this occasion Inter-Disciplinary Lecture series was inaugurated by Pandit Hazari Prasad Dwivcui. The University has also dccidcd to celebrate in a befitting mansr.-r “Soor Panchashati” in 1979. The University Grants Commission and the Government of Uttar Pradesh have agreed to jtovkIc necessary assistance for the same.
Alumni Association The Alumni at Delhi celebrated 118th birth Anniversary of Pt. Madan Mohan Malviya and have launched a programme to pn>- pogate his ideals and collect funds for a Malviya Bhawan to be constructed in Delhi.
Non-Teaching Sector The problems and welfare of the non-teaching staff including officers have also received full attention. In this respect, the following recommendations are under finalisation :—- (i) Employees working on Daily wages basis since long are to be absorbed in phases in regular scales. (ii) Temporary ministerial posts existing for more than two years are to be made permanent. 47
(iii) Staff working against these ministerial positions are to be screened shortly through prescribed test. (iv) Promotion quota for Class IV through test as pres cribed by the Government of India. (v) Construction of staff quarters for essential services and married Nursing staff. (vi) Medical Health facilities and re-imbursement. (vii) Withdrawal of contribution for the first 400 kms. to and from in respect of L.T.C. other than home travel.
Decentralisation of Powers and Responsibilities
The Academic Council has constituted a number of Advisory Policy-making and Implementation Committees, numbering 21. These Committees have been assigned specific functions and responsibilities. This provides active and formal participation of nearly 200 teachers and 50 students and non-teaching staff in the dccision-maiking process.
Salient Features of the University Budget Estimate for the year 1978-79 ' * The total annual budget of the University for the year is Rs. 902.36 lakhs including, (Block grant of Rs. 768.39 lakhs). In the preliminary estimate for 1978-79 a net increase of an amount of Rs. 23.68 lakhs is anticipated. This is mainly due to increase of Rs. 22.38 lakhs in the maintenance (Block) grant on the basis of 3 per cent increase over the maintenance grant for the year 1977-78 and anticipated increase in Electric and Water charges in various departments, hostels and residences to the extent of Rs. 1.10 lakhs- As against a total grant of Rs. 166.50 lakhs received towards the expenditure on Revision of Pay, D.A., Additional D.A. (5 slabs) and Pension, the University has incurred expenditure to the extent of Rs. 211.47 lakhs to the end of August 1977.
Various schemes introduced include : (a) Liberalised Leave Travel Concessions Rules. (b) Additional D.A. on Pension/Family Pension. (c) Subsidy to University Cafetaria's, Canteens. 48
(d) Additional posts for S. S. Hospital. (e) Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme.
University of Delhi
In spite of certain difficulties, the year 1978 can be con sidered significant in many respects. A number of teachers have received national and international recognition for their schola stic achievements. There was alround improvement in teaching and research, brought about by restructuring the syllabi and taking up new projects. Many innovations initiated during the rcccnt past were carried forward. Particular mention may be made of the M.Phil. Programme which was introduced in more Departments in the University during the year. Examination re forms, notably improvement in the evaluation techniques have been receiving the attention of the university and considerable progress has been made.
Student Enrolment
Enrolment, including those of research students in various courses The number of students on the rolls of the University during the academic year 1978-79 is 1,26,420. The number o? regular students on rolls during the academic year 1978-79 is 76,528 and those enrolled with the External Candidates Cell is 29,520, while those registered with the School of Correspondence Courses and Continuing Education is 10,961 and the Non-Collegiate Women's Education Board is 9,411. The total number of stu dents pursuing Research during the academic vear 1 9 7 8 - 7 9 is 3,133. " ’
New Courses
The University has instituted the following new courses in the Department of Modern Indian Languages with the approval of the University Grants Commission :—
1. M.A. in Tamil, 2. Diploma in Tamil, 3. Diploma in Gujarati. 49
4. Diploma in Kannada, 5. Diploma in Malayalam, 6. Diploma in Marathi, 7. Diploma in Oriya, 8. Diplom a in Sindhi, 9. Diploma in Telugu, 10. Diploma in Assamese, 11. Certificate in Assamese and 12. Certificate in Sindhi. The University has also instituted a One-Year intensive Course of High Proficiency in Japanese Languages (Post Advanced Diploma Level) in the Department of Chinese and Japanese Studies. The University has also instituted a Diploma Course in Forensic Medicine and it is proposed to start the Course from the next academic session.
It has also been decided to institute M.Sc. Course in Applied Physics in the Faculty of Technology and the proposal of the University is under consideration by the University Grants Commission. Tlie nomenclature of the Diploma Course in Tibetan Lan guage and Culture has been changed to Diploma Course in Tibetan Language and Literature according to a suggestion made by the University Grants Commission.
Progress and achievements in extra-curricular fields—game* and sports, cultural activities, etc.
On the basis of its performance in sports at the Inter-Univer sity, State, National and International level, Delhi University has retained the Maulana Abul Kalam Azad Trophy for the Fifth time in succession for the year 1975-76. This trophy was awarded by the President of India along with Arjuna Award Ceremony.
Delhi University has retained the All-India Inter-University Swimming and Diving Championships for the second tmic in Men section held at Mysore in October, 1978. Shri Ram Rattan 50
(Moti Lai Nehru College) was adjudged the best swimmer of the competition. Delhi University got second place in the All India North Zone Inter-University Badminton (Men and Women) and both the team qualified for the All India Finals. It has won the intcr-Univcrsity North Zone Table-tennis Tournament held at Bhagalpur University. The team has qualified in the All India Finals. Our Women team got second place in the North Zone Inter-University Table-tennis Championship. This team has also qualified for All India Finals. Delhi University Foot-ball team has done well in the All India North Zone Inter-University Tournament held at Jammu. The Team got third position in the North Zone Inter-University Tournament held at Jammu University.
Development of the University under the Fifth Five Year Plan during the year 1977-78 The University has incurred an expenditure of Rs. 85 lakhs on its development activities during 1977-78, including the Fifth Plan allocations to the University and the South Delhi Campus, allocations outside Fifth Plan and the allocations for the Centres of Advanced Studies and Research. Non-recurring grants were provided for academic purposes, to enable purchase of scientific equipment, books and journals. The tempo of construction activity in the University Campus was substantially enhanced and several buildings were constructed. Some of the new works sanctioned during the Fifth Plan, where the work was in progress during 1977-78 are mentioned below : (i) Central Science Library' (ii) Extension to Ratan Tata Library (iii) Central Science Facility (iv) Annexure Delhi University Womens’ Association Building (v) Wardens House for the International Students House (vi) Extension to the Geology Etepartment Building (vii) Construction of the Music Faculty Building 51
(viii) Animal House for the Zoology Department (ix) Stadium for organising games and Sports. (x) Campus Development Programmes including under ground and overhead water storage facilities, tube- wells, electric sub-stations, construction of Kiosks, etc. (xi) Staff Quarters.
Several academic and non-academic posts sanctioned during the Fifth Five Year Plan were filled during the year 1977-78.
Significant steps were taken for the development of South Delhi Campus and a grant of Rs. 100 lakhs has been earmarked for this purpose, out of the VI Five Year Plan. Non-recurring grants for purchase of equipment, furniture, books and journals were given to South Campus. Several academic and non academic posts were created to strengthen the working of South Campus. Land of 66 acres has been allocated for the South Delhi Campus of the University of Delhi and the plans for con struction were formulated. Important features of Budget
SI. H ead o f Account A ctuals R evised Budget N o . Estim ates Estim ates 1977-78 1978-79 1979-80
1 2 3 4 5
(Figures in lakhs of Rupees) 1. Maintenance Grant (Non-Plan)'.
Opening Balance 37 .2 5 8 7 .1 0 6 7 .6 2 R e ceipts:
(i) Grants 380.35 4 0 3 .1 7 4 3 9 .8 0
(ii) Departmental Receipts 100.00 9 6 .7 9 9 6 .81
(iii) Others 120.45 — —
638.05 587.06 6 0 4 .2 3
Paym ents: 5 50.95 5 1 9 .4 4 6 0 4 .2 3
Closing Balance: 8 7 .1 0 6 7 .6 2
16 ESW/78— 5 52
1 2 3
Plan Account :
Opening Balance 38.? 5 19.23 —
R eceipts: (i) Grants 70.53 273.34 155.76
108.88 292.67 155.76
Payments 89.55 292.67 155.76
Closing Balance 19.33 Nil N il
University Press A ccount :
Opening Balance 1 .89 1 .89 3.12 Receipts 14.56 19.25 20.25
16.45 21.14 23.37
Payments 14.56 18.02 20.05
Closing Balance 1 .89 3.12 3.32
Miscellaneous ]A cco:mts: ]
Opening Balance 41 .05 78.58 98.18 Receipts 327.38 307.43 312.41
368.43 386.01 410.59
Paym ents 289.85 287,83 311.91
Closing Balance 78.58 98. 18 98.68
University of Hyderabad The year 1978 was a period of continued progress in the various activities of the University. Apart from stabilising the Post-graduate courses introduced in 1977. new Post-graduate courses were started in 1978. The School of Mathematics and 53
Computer/information Sciences joined the mainstream of Science Schools functioning at the Campus. The Department of Philosophy under the School of Humanities started function ing at the “Golden Threshold”. Courses in M.Sc., M.Phil., and Ph.D. in Mathematics; M.Sc., and M.Phil, in Philosophy; and M.Phil., in Rural Development, were newly introduced during this session. While M.Phil. course in Rural Develop ment was conducted at the National Institute of Rural Develop ment. Hyderabad, with assistance in the form of staff find other facilities made available by the Institute, classes of M.Phil. Computer Methods and Economics continued to be held at E.C.I.L. and Administrative Staff College, respectively ay in the previous years. By the re-opcning of the University on 10th July, 1978 after the summer vacation from 10th May, 1978, the academic activities of the session gathered momentum. The final year classes of M.A., and M.Sc., commenced from 19th July. 1978. About 2.500 applications received for admission to various courses were processed and the admissions on nn all-India basis, after taking into consideration the candidates’ previous acade mic record and their performance at the admission ;est. were finalised in July. 1978. All (he new admission were comple ted by 22nd July, and classes started from 23rd Julv. 1978. The total number of students admitted, increased from 161 last year to 214 this >ear. The details of the courses and the num ber of students admitted school-wise during the session 1978 79 arc as under :— 1
School M.A./ M . Phi!. Ph. R . Total M . Sc.
Mathematics and ComDuier/ Information Sciences . . 8 20 1 29 Physics ..... 24 10 5 39 Chemistry .... 20 4 8 32 Life Sciences .... 21 7 8 36 Humanities: (a) English . . . 47 4 1 52 (b) Philosophy . . 7 3 10 Social Sciences: (a) Economics . . . 4 4 (b) Rural Development . 12 12
127 64 23 214 54
In addition to 20 per cent of seats in each course reserved for Scheduled Caste/Scheduled Tribe candidates, upto 3 percent of seats in each course were reserved for Physically handicapped candidates, as advised by the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, Government of India. In all, 11 candidates belonging to Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes and 4 Physically handi capped candidates were admitted to various courses. The final examination for most of the M.Phil. courses start ed in August, 1977 and M.A. English, started in July, 1976 were held in April-May, 1978 as scheduled. All the 40 students who took these examinations (23 for M.A. English and 17 for M.Phil. courses in Physics, Chemistry and Life Sciences) were declar ed eligible for the award of respective degrees. 22 of them se cured first division and the rest second division. Admission of the 2nd batch of Ph.D. candidates of the current session are under finalisation. When these admissions are completed by the end of January, 1979, the number of Ph.D students on the rolls is expected to increase from 23 to 45. On the same basis as followed last year, 10 Merit scholar ships and 24 Merit-cum-Mcans Scholarships each of the value of Rs. 100/- p.m., were awarded to the students of M.A. and M.Sc. courses. 44 Fellowships of the value of Rs. 400/'- p.m. each were awarded lo the students of M.Phil. UGC Junior Re search Fellowships were sanctioned for 9 Ph.D. students. In addi tion, deserving students were considered for grant of freeships and 7 of them were granted freeships for the year. Some stu dents of the university were also getting scholarships and fellow ships from CSIR. NCERT and other similar agencies. Efforts were made to improve the amenities available for the staff and students. A Health Centre to provide medical faci lities for minor ailments and immediate relief was opened at the Campus. A branch of the State Bank of Tndia was also commissioned at the Campus. An experimental Branch Post Office will be opened shortly. Adequate sports and games faci lities were provided to the students at the Campus, Golden Threshold and the Hostels. For the first time, a University cri cket team participated in the Inter-Universitv Cricket Tourna ment held in December. 1978 at Madras.
The developmental activities at the Campus gathered con siderable momentum during the year under report. T;i nddi- 55 tion to the buildings completed and occupied in the “Service area” the following buildings were completed. 1. Tnstrumentation Centre building The construction work has started with provision for Air-condition departm entallv in July, 1977. ing Air-conditioning of the building Area 11,300 Sq. ft. entrusted to M/s. Voltas is in Pro C ost Rs. lO.SO.OOO/. gress. The building is ready for occupation. Almost all the sophis ticated instrurnents/eqiiinment have been installed.
2. Canteen building in the “Service The work has been taken up A rea” . departmentallv. The building is Area 2500 Sq. ft. completed and being furnished. Cost Rs. 1,50,000.
3. Animal House attached to the The work has been taken up de- School of Life Sciences. pa rtmentally and com pleted. \rea 1500 Sq. ft Cost Rs. 76.500/.
4. Additional Class Rooms for Sci The work has been taken up and ence Schools. completed departmentallv. The Area 3000. Sq. ft. building is ready for occupation. Cost Rs. 1,44,500/.
Construction of the following buildings is now in progress :
!. 2S Lecturers’ Quarters The work has been entrusted to Area 1,300 Sq ft. per quarter a contractor. The construction Total cost Rs. 15,00.000/. started in June 1978 is progressing well.
2. Hostel for 106 students (Menl The work has been taken up deoart- Area 25,250 Sq. ft. mentally and labour portion entrust Total Cost Rs. 15.30,000/. ed to a contractor.
3. 30 quarters for Professor-'Re.t- As the contractor to whom the work ders was entrusted backed out ,(ti:is) Area 1,800 Sq. ft. per quarter. project has been entrusted to Total cost Rs. 36.90,000/. another agency and work is in progress.
4. Teachers' Hostel (3 Units to pro The work has been taken rn depart vide accommodation for S tea mentally and is in progress. chers/each unit). Total area 16.800 Sq. ft. Total cost Rs. 8.63.700;.
The formation of the main approach road to the academic complex, internal roads in the Service area, water supply schemes and electrification works are also in progress.
The Revised Budget Estimates for the year 1977-78 and the Budget Estimates for 1978-79 as recommended by the Finance 56
Committee were approved by the Executive Council at its meet ing held on 22-2-1978. For the year 1978-79 provision was made for an expenditure of Rs. 75 lakhs under Revenue account and Rs. 162 lakhs under Capital account.
Jawaharlal Nehru University The University continued to make progress in academic and research programmes despite numerous constraints including paucity of funds, which affected the balanced development of the newly established schools, particularly the science schooJs to a considerable extent. The attention of the Commission was repeatedly drawn to these, and it is hoped that the UGC would initiate sui’able measures to correct the^e imbalances.
Enrolment including research students The number of students on the rolls of the university includ ing Centre of Post Graduate Studies. Impha! has rone up from 2964 to 3217 since the last report.
Progro: a1?'! achievement-, in academic fields /seminars /confi'- rences bdJ and research vjsrk received at national und ijittr- national level
Nearly 150 research projects sponsored by various national and international agencies are in progress while work on nearly 30 researc’i projects was completed during 'he veor under report. Nearly 40 books and over 200 research papers and articles were published sy members of the faculty in journals in India and abroad. Nearly fifty eminent scholars from India and abroad were invited to deliver lectures, give seminars at the University.
In addition, fourteen eminent scholars both from India and abroad were offered visiting assignments for varying periods ranging fnm one month to six months on the faculty of the various sciools- Over sixty faculty members were sanctioned various ki’ds of leave to enable them to accept invitations, fellowship5, visiting assignments in institutions in India and abroad. Over 150 facultv members attended seminars, r e ferences wthin Tndia and abroad.
898 students of the University were declared eligible for award r. \ B ■ M.A 'M.Sc.. M C << \f P S v pv,ji nn(j 57
Ph.D. degrees during the period under report- Of these 38 re ceived Ph.D. degrees, 79 M.Phil./M.C.H./M.P.S. degrees. 213, M.A., M.Sc. degrees and 15 B.A., Hons, degrees in various languages.
Besides, 487 cadets belonging to the National Defence Aca demy, Khadakwasla and 66 cadets registered at the Army Cadet College, Dchradun received B.A./B.Sc. degrees of the University, Diplomas/Certificates in various languages were awarded to the 267 students. Doctoral theses of as many as 10 students and M. Phil, dissertation of 40 students are under evaluation
M ore than 60% of the full time students/scholars on rolls received financial assistance from the University/outside sources in the form of fellowshipse/scholarships/freeships besides a sizable number of students received grants/leans from the sludcnts Aid Fund and the Vice-Chancellors’ discretionary fund.
Extra Curricular Activties
Efforts continued for developing a rich and varied programme of co-curricular activities for students. In all there are about 30 Sports and Cultural Clubs functioning in the University ena bling students to participate in the extra curricular activities according to their talents and aptitude. The Badminton Club, the Debating Club, the Film Club, the UNESCO Club and Cv.kv.vA1, Club, Music and Dance Club anu L'nerarv Club were particularly active during the year under report.
Campus Development The following building projects were completed and have been acquired for use during the year under report : 1. Two floors of the School of Social Sciences Building on the New Campus. 2. Building to house centralised language laboratories in the CRS compound. 3. Laboratories installation for the School of Environ mental Sciences on the third and fourth floors of the School of Life Sciences building. 4. Two floors of the Poorvanchal Hostel Building inclu ding Dining Hall in Sector XIII. 58
The building projects in progress
1. Poorvanchal Hostel 3rd and 4th floors. 2. A Married Research Scholars’ Hotel in Sector XIII. 3. 36 Faculty houses and 60 essential staff quarters-
4. Library Building. 5. Building to house the School of Social Sciences, and 6. Development work in Sector XIII.
Salient Features of the Budget
The actual expenditure incurred by the University during the financial year 1977-78 is as under :
(Rs. in lakhs)
(i) Maintenance (non-Plan) expenditure ..... 193.48
(ii) Development (plan expenditure)
(a) Recurring—
Expenditure on Revenue Account .... 4 4 .05 (b) Non-recurring—
(i) Development of University Campus . . . . 65.97
(ii) Other capital expenditure . . . . . 34.1R
Financial year 1978-79
Maintenance grant for the year 1978-79 as provisionally fixed by the U G C ...... 1 82.00 lakhs
Financial estimates/development Plan, tentative pro vision made for 1978-79 ..... 191.56 lakhs
North-Eastern University
The academic session for the year 1978-79 commenced in July-August, 1978. In July, 1978, the first Vice-Chancellor Dr. C. D. S. Dcvanesen relinquished the office after completing 59
the five year term, and the new Vice-Chancellor Dr. A. K. Dhan assumed office on 26th July, 1978. The first Registrar appoint ed by the Visitor for a three year term also joined the Univer sity on 20th October, 1978.
The University has at present 13 Postgraduate Depart ments—5 of Science and the rest of Arts and two Centres, namely, the Centre for Continuing Education and the Centre for Creative Arts. In keeping with the Government of India’s policy one Adult Education Centre for Continuing Education is actively engaged in the programme of Adult Literacy.
The College of Agriculture which offers five year integrated course in B.Sc. Agriculture and Animal Husbandry was esta blished at Mebziciphema, Nagaland in October, 1978.
The academic programmes in the Postgraduate Departments as well as in 29 affiliated colleges continued as usual. The cocurriculum activities such as debates, seminars, sports, NSS programmes etc. were also encouraged. In January, 1979. a cultural Troupe comprising students of the University and i's affiliated colleges participated in the “Youth of the Univeis iy Festival, 1979” organised by the Bombay University, and also visited Agra and Panjabi Universities.
With the completion of the approach road to the new Cam pus site, the work on the main Campus will begin shortly. Dur ing the academic year all examinations were conducted as per schedule.
Visva-Bharati Officers of the University
Sri Morarji Desai, Prime Minister, was elected to be the Acharya (Chancellor) of the University with effect from Anril, 16, 1978. '
New Courses of Studies
The following new courses of studies were introduced during the year : 1. M . M usic (M aster of Music) 2. M. Fine (Master of Fine Arts) 60
3. M.S.W- (Master of Social Work) 4. M.A. in Geography 5. M. Phil in Rural Development 6. Two-Year Post-Diploma in Fine Arts
Major Building Construction
The following constructions were completed during the year :
1. One block of ‘C’ type twin staff quarters at Dakshin- palli. 2. Agronomy building at the Palli-Siksha Sandana. Sri- niketan.
Construction Programmes in hand
The University Grants Commission has sanctioned grants amounting to Rs. 10 47 lakhs and Rs. 44.25 lakhs for construc tion of Staff quarters for the essential staff (non-teaching) and institutional buildings and staff quarters respectively during the Fifth Five Year Plan. While the C.P.W.D. has been requested to take u p construction of some institutional buildings c^stme approximately Rs. 18.00 lakhs, the other construction works are bei«c executed bv the University through renu’eJ contractors.
Number of students
Boys 1568 Girls 1504
Total 3072
Number of teachers 389
Major Academic Programmes
The University propose to develop some academic depart ment in terms of schools. Three such schools have been estab lished without affecting the identity of the constituent depart ments. These are : (1) The School of Language comprising the 61
language departments, (2) The School of Life Science comprising the departments of Botany and Zoology, and (3) the School of Historical Studies comprising the departments of History and Ancient Indian History, Culture and Archaeology.
A new department of Rural Studies (Palli Charcha Kendra; has been set up at Sriniketan with a view to providing research and academic base to the pioneering experiments in rural deve lopment intiated by Rabindranath Tagore.
The Visiting Fellowship programme which was initiated in 1977 has continued. The main idea behind the Fellowship Programme is io give ihe community the benefit of Hie presence of eminent men and women on the campus reviving the tradi tion of Visva-Bharati to extend hospitality to outstandings scholars and creative artists from all over the nation and from abroad. An important series of publication entitled “Visiting Fellowships Lectures” are being brought out by the University.
Other M ajor Activifies
The Department of Social Work has again been entrusted with the responsibility of evaluating the National Social Service programmes of the Universities in the eastern region.
The activities of the Silpa-Sadana (Cottage Industry Training Centre'i h;we beev, effectively suplemented bv '.be work r,( V'^vc- Bharati Khadi-O-Gramin IJnnayan Samiti. Eighty six village artisans, mostly belonging to the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, have been working under the different Production Schemes sponsored by the Samiti.
In April, 1978 the Elmhirst Crafts Museum was formally inaugurated at Sriniketan. It is expected that with growing col lection this museum will become a major centre for the display of traditional handicrafts from all parts of rural India and also from Asia and Africa.
C. I nstitutions D e e m e d t o b e U niversities
On the recommendations of the University Grants Commission certain institutions have been declared bv the Central Govern ment as institutions deemed to be universities under Section 3 of the University Grants Commission Act, 1956. Tn the case of some of these institutions, the Government had also decided to 62 meet the deficit in their maintenance expenditure and also sanc tion grants to raise the matching contributions provided by the UGC for implementation of development programmes. The development programmes of these institutions are approved by the University Grants Commission on the basis of an assessment made by the Visiting Committee constituted by the Commission for each plan period.
During 1978-79, grants were paid to the following four insti tutions deemed to be universities :
(a) Gujarat Vidyapith, Ahmedabad ;
(b) Gurukul Kangri Vishwavi (c) Gandhigram Rural Institute, Gandhigram : and (d) Jamia Millia lslamia, Delhi (for activities other than higher education). Dr. Zakir Husain College, Delhi The Government of India decided in 1973 to set up a Trust for the administration and development of the former Delhi Col lege, Delhi as a memorial to Dr. Zakir Husain, the late President of India. The Trust will meet 5 per cent of the deficit in the mainte nance expenditure of the College and also the matching share for the development assistance sanctioned by the UGC The Government provide necessary financial assistance to the Trust for this purpose. The development programmes of the College include shifting of the College to a new site and construction of buildings and pro vision of other facilities. Adequate land for the purpose has been acquired by the College and at present detailed plans and estimates for the construction of buildings are under preparation. Association of Indian Universities The Association of Indian Universities is a voluntary organi sation of which all the universities in the country are members. The main objectives of the Association is to provide a forum for the universities in the country to exchange views and consider 63 problems of common interest to all of them. The Government has been providing a token contribution towards the maintenance expenditure of the Association which is met substantially from out of the subscriptions raised by the Association from the mem bers. During the Fifth Plan period at the request of the Associa tion, the Government agreed to finance certain research activities in areas of common concern to the universities. These projects were examination reforms, economics of education etc. Under the programme of examination reforms, the Association has developed question banks in most of the major subjects covered by the university level courses. The Association proposes to produce question banks in all subjects at first degree level. Loan to Panjab University, Chandigarh for development With the re-organisation of the State of Punjab in 1966, the Panjab University, Chandigarh was declared an ‘inter-state body corporate’ under the Punjab Re-organisation Act, 1966. Under the provisions of this Act, the successor States share the main tenance expenditure of the University. These States, however, do not contribute towards the developmental expenditure of the University. It was, therefore, decided that the Central Govern ment might sanction loan to the University tor its development programme, which include matching share for development grants sanctioned by the University Grants Commission and also certain other programmes not qualifying for assistance from the University Grants Commission. The Loan is sanctioned on ;he basis of requirements worked out on year to year basis. D . S p e c ia l is e d R e s e a r c h O rganisations Indian Institute of Advanced Study, Simla The Institute was set up in 1965 as an autonomous and resi dential institution to provide facilities for talented scholars to pursue advanced research in the Humanities and Social Sciences. The Institute has so far appointed 152 Fellows for terms ranging between one year and three years. In addition, four Fellows have been appointed for a period of five years, each renewable 64 after every five years. Besides, the Institute has been awarding Guest Fellowship for short duration upto four months, inviting senior academics to deliver lectures and organising a large num ber oi seminars. In Sep ember 1977. 'he Government appointed a Committee to review the functioning of the Institute and to make recommen dations in regard to the future policy, programmes and activities of the Institute. The Committee submitted its report in May 1978. The Report is under consideration of the Government. Pending finalisation of decision on the Report of the Review Committee, the Institute had not made any fresh commitments by way of appointment of personnel or award of Fellowship during the year 1978-79. Scheme of Assistance to Institutions of Higher Education Certain voluntary organisations arc offering programmes of higher education outside ihe university system. In order to en courage such institutions and to provide them with necessary financial support the Ministry had formulated a scheme during the Third Plan period. Assistance under this scheme is avail able only to these institutions which are offering programmes different from the normal and established pattern of education and are innovative in character. Presently, four iwstuu'.’ons are being assisted under this Scheme. These are : — (1) Sri Aurobindo International Centre for Education, Pondicherry. (ii) Lok Bharati, Sanosara, Gujarat. (in) Tilak Maharashtra Vidvapith, Pune. (iv) Kanya Gurukul Mahavidyalaya, Dehra Dun. Indian Council of Social Science Research The Indian Council of Social Science Research which was established during 1969-70 with the primary objective of promoting and co-ordinating social science research in the country', vigor ously pursued its objectives during the year under report. 65 1. Research Projects During the year under report 77 projects have been sanction ed. 2. Training Programmes The Council's programme envisaged the holding of 11 train ing courees in Research Methodology. Out of this 3 training pro grammes have already been organised and 8 more are to be orga nised during the year 1978-79. 3. Fellowships Du ring the year under report 110 fellowships including Natio nal fellowships, Senior fellowships, Post-doctoral fellowships, Fellowships for young Social Scientists and contingency Grants have been awarded1. 4. Internatiorial Collaboration Grants-in-aid were sanctioned to 22 Indian Social Scientists for visiting foreign countries and 7 foreign Social Scientists lor visiting India. The Council also continued to cooperate with East European Countries in Cultural Exchanges. 5. Data A reft/vex During the year under review data sects on ‘The Problem of Drug Addiction among the college, university students, in Jabal pur Town,’ ‘Distribution and Differential Location of Public Utilities in Urban Delhi’, ‘Outmigrating Towns : A Study into the nature, causes and consequences of outmigrating’, and, ‘Slum and Social Change : A case Study of Metropolitan Slum’ have been acquired. 6. National Register of Social Scientists The first phase of the project on the compilation of National Register of Social Scientists in India, started in 1976, has been completed. The manuscript containing information on the aca demic background, research interests, important publications and institutional affiliation of approximately 7000 social scientists located in Research Institutions, University Departments and affiliated Colleges is ready and is awaiting publication. 66 7. Documentation (a) Study Grants : Under this Scheme about 208 Ph.D. Students from different Indian Universities were provided with study grants to use the research materials available in various Librarics/Research institutes. (b) Mahatma Gandhi ‘Bibliography’ : During the period, the Urdu Fascicule of this bibliography was brought out. The fascicules in other Indian Languages are at different stages of compilation/printing. (c) Inter-Library Resources Centre : The Inter-Library Re sources Centre, set up in 1975 is a cooperative venture of 25 local Social Science Libraries in Delhi. During the year 6845 Scholars used the collections of this Centre. (d) Library : About 800 books on Social Science Research methods, research administration, and various research reports were acquired. The manuscripts of about 225 Ph.D. theses, sub mitted to Indian Universities, were also added to the collection of the Library. (c) Retrospective Indexing Project : An index of about 60 Indian Journals in Sociology, Social anthropology and Psychology upto the year 1970 has been completed and edited. An index of 16 Indian Educational Journals of the period 1947-1977 has also been completed. (f) Union Catalogue of Newspapers : A Union Catalogue of Newspapers available in 50 local libraries was prepared in this period. 8. Publications During the period, ICSSR brought out 10 publications. 9. Area Studies The Council continued to strengthen its programme in Area Studies. The Asian region remained the priority area. During the period four research proposals were sanctioned under the 67 Area Studies Programme. Under the same programme, a pro posal for field-trip to Sri Lanka was also supported. AASSREC The Association of Asian Social Science Research Councils (AASSREC) organised its 2nd Conference in Seoul from A— 8 October, 1977. The ICSSR, as its founder member, participated in the Conference, which also elected new office bearers. Indian Council of Historical Research The Council, established as an autonomous organisation in 1972, aims at promoting, accelerating and coordinating research in history by taking all such measures as may be found neces sary from time to time. During the months from April to October in the financial year 1978-79 the Council sanctioned 8 research projects, 16 fellowships, 58 study/travel/contingent grants, 9 subsidies for publication and 8 grants for professional organizations of histo rians. The work on 5 volumes of sources was over while work on other volumes is in progress. One old book was reprinted while a number of other old books were being processed for re printing. Under the programme ‘Production of Core Books’ sixteen translations of core books on Indian history and culture into seven languages were received, steps were being taken to process them for publication. Four translations prepared earlier were published. The collection of material for the work on the projects ‘Towards Freedom’, and ‘Praja Mandal Movement’ is in progress. Two seminars, all relating to problems in the study of the socio-economic history were held. The seventh issue of the Council’s Journal Indian Historical Review was brought out. All the above activities are continued now. The approxi mate number of schemes sanctioned at the end of 1978-79 is ex pected to reach as follows : research projects— 15, fellowship— 30, study grant— 125, subsidies for publications— 16, grants for professional organizations of historians— 12. Including the number of manuscripts that are expected to be received the total number of manuscripts received at the end of 1978-79 would be as follows : Source volumes : 10, Translation of core books : 24. Including two seminars to be held, the total number of seminars held during 1978-79 would be 4 16ESW/78—6 ' 68 NATIONAL STAFF COLLEGE FOR EDUCATIONAL PLANNERS AND ADMINISTRATORS, NEW DELHI A brief review of the activities of the Staff College during the year 1978 and the proposed programmes for January— March, 1979 are given below : A. Training Programmes (i) Study-cum observation Programme for Afghan and Bur mese Education Officers. The Staff College at the request of Unesco Regional O il ice for Education in Asia, organised a study-cum-observation Pro gramme for 13 Senior Afghan (5) and Burmese (8) Education Officers from January 2— 14, 1978. The main focus of the pro gramme was to acquaint the participants with the system of edu cational planning and administration in India at various stages (from pre-primary to Post-graduate) at various levels national, state, district and block. (ii) Orientation Programme in Management of Educational Resources for Principals of Higher Secondary Schools. The Staff College organised an Orientation Programme in Management of Educational Resources for Principals of Higher Secondary Schools from February 20—25, 1978. The main focus of the Programme, which was designed in consultation with the Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan and the British Council, was to familiarise the participants with the application of modern management techniques in education and to help them in practis ing certain management skills. (iii) Orientation Programme for a Select Group of College Principals going to the U.S.A. At the request of the United States Educational Foundation in India the Staff College organised the second orientation Pro gramme (March 20—22, 1978) for a select group of 6 College Principals going to the U.S.A. under the USEFI’s University Ad ministrator’s Project 1978. The main focus of the programme was to acquaint the participants with the development of higher education in India with particular reference to their respective States, to enable them to exchange their experiences in different problems of educational administration and to familiarise them with the pattern of higher education in the U.S.A. 69 (iv) Training Programme for State Education Planning Offi cers. During the year under report, three visiting programmes for State Education Planning Officers were organised. The main objective ot all these programmes was to improve the technical competence of State Education Planning Officers for handling the task of formulating the next Five Year Plan of Education. (v) Workshop on Na:ional Service Scheme. At the request of Youth Bureau of Union Ministry of Edu cation the Staff College organised a 4-day workshop (April 17— 20 1978) on National Serv.ce Scheme for Officers Incharge of N. 5. S. Orientation Centres, University N. S. S. coordinators and officers of N. S. S. and Field Officers of Ministry of Education. The workshop was attended by 44 N. S. S. officers and the main focus of the workshop was to acquaint the participants with the highlights of the National Adult Education Programme (NAEP) and provided an opportunity to the participants to exchange notes on successful implementation of adult education programme under N. S. S. in their respective areas. (vi) Training Course for Statistical Assistants of State Edu cation Departments. In collaboration with the Union Ministry of Education (Plan ing, Monitoring and Statistics Unit) the Staff College organised a one-week Training Course for Statistical Assistants of State Education Departments from May 23—29, 1978. The main ob jectives were to acquaint the participants with different features of the forms of collection of annual educational data from States and to impart them suffic;ent training so that they may fill up the various forms (ES-I, F.S-II, ES-III and ES-IV) correctly and without difficulty. (vii) Workshop on Institutional Planning for Principals of Kendriya Vidyalayas. The Staff College in collaboration with the Kendriya Vidya laya Sangathan organised a workshop on Institutional Planning for 25 principals of Kendriva Vidyalayas of the Delhi Region, from May 30—June 3, 1978. The main focus of the workshop was to familiarise the participants with the concept and pre 70 paration of institutional Planning and modern trends in education having relationship with it and to enable them in preparing an institutional plan for a three-year period covering all aspects of improvement of their Vidyalayas. (viii) Workshop in Indian History and Culture for Super visors artd Curriculum Directors of Social Sciences from the Unit ed States of America. At the request of United States Educational Foundation in India and with the approval of the Union Ministry of Education, the National Staff College organised a workshop in Indian History and Culture for 18 Social Studies Supervisors and Cur riculum Directors from the United States of America from June 19—July 12, 1978. The main objectives of the workshop were to familiarise the participants with the main trends in edu cation and changing patterns of development in India and to improve understanding of the historical currents and cross-cur rents of modern India which would be helpful for the improve ment of teaching of Indian History and Culture in the U.S. Schools and to further mutual understanding with the help of Indian scholars. (ix) Orientation Programmes for Education Officers of Delhi Administration. At the request of and in collaboration with the Directorate of Education, Delhi Administration, the Staff College organised two orientation Programmes in Educational Planning and Ad ministration for Education Officers of Delhi Administration. The main focus of these programmes was to acquaint the participants with some of the important concepts and problems of educational planning, administration and supervision and to familiarise them with new educational trends and programmes of qualitative improvement. (x) Orientation Programmes for District Education Officers of Jammu and Kashmir. At the request of the Department of Education, Government of Jammu and Kashmir, the Staff College also organised an Orientation Programme in Educational Planning and Administra tion for 12 District Education Officers of the State. 71 (xi) Semitiar on Some Aspects of Administration of Highei Education. At the request of United States Educational Foundation in India, the Staff College organised a three-day seminar on some Aspects of Administration of Higher Education (August 3— 5, 1978) for a select group of six principals who had earlier visited the United States of America under the USEFI’s University Ad ministrators’ Project 1978. The main objectives of the seminar were to enable the participants to exchange their experiences with regard to the current trends in the development of higher educa tion in India and to help them to identify areas of higher edu cation in India particularly with reference to affiliated colleges for introducing meaningful changes. (xii) Orientation Programme for School Principals proceea- //)£? to the U.K. The National Staff College in consultation with the Central Board of Secondary Education, organised an Orientation pro gramme for eight school principals proceeding to the U.K. from September 11— 13, 1978. The main focus of the programme was to upgrade the knowledge of participants in regard to inno vations in Indian Education and to help them in identifying management problems including those which may arise out of the implementation of the Ishwarbhai Committee and Malcolm S. Adises.hiah Committee reports. (xiii) Management Oriented Training Programme for Ad ministrators and Senior Faculty Members of Polytechnics (Southern Region). At the request of the Technical Teachers’ Training Institute Adyar, Madras and in association with the faculty of Management Studies, University of Delhi, the National Staff College organised a Management Oriented Training Programme for Administrators ancT Senior Faculty Members of Polytechnics of the Southern Region at Madras from October 2—7, 1978. At- terded by 20 participants, the main focus of the programme was to initiate a phased management oriented training for preparing a x>re faculty from the Technical Teachers’ Training Institute, Madras and_ elsewhere in the Southern Region which would even tually organise management oriented programmes for administra- tois, Principals and senior faculty members of the polytechnics in the Southern Region. 72 ( xiv) Orientation Programmes in Educational Planning and Administration for College Principals. During the period under review the Staff College orgamsea eiciit orientation programmes i'or college principals in educational planning and administration for different States. The main objectives of the.se programmes were to acquaint the participants with current trends and problems in the field of Higher Education, to help them to appreciate their role as a Change agent in the programme of institutional planning, faculty development, student welfare and to provide an awareness of Modern Management Techniques in general and their application in the tie Id of educational administration. (xv) Unesco-sponsorcd Seminar on Methods for Projecting School Enrolment. The National Staff College in collaboration with Division of Statistics, Unesco, Paris organised a National Training Seminar on Methods for Projecting School Enrolment from November 20— December 1, 1978. Attended by 20 participants, the main focus of ;ae seminar was to acquaint the participants with methods of prutc.'iiui! adapted to the educat'on/popalaticn problems cn- Ci ,;!: .red and the statistical data available in India. B. Collaboiadi. with inlcnuticnal A.gvT.cus !i) U N E S C O - \ por,sored Project on "Education for Intet- natioihi! Understanding, Cooperalien onj Pcace m:d Education lish u h ig to Human Rights and FunJaiuental Freedoms”. The 19th General Conference of Unesco held' at Nairobi in October—November 1976 recommended that a small number of Unesco National Commissions of Member States with different educational systems may be invited to undertake studies on practi cal means of appiying the comprehensive recommendation con cerning education for international understanding, cooperation and peace and' education relating to human rights and funda mental freedoms adopted af its Eighteenth Session held at Paris in November 1974. One of the Commissions invited for carrying out ~'!ch a study was the Indian National Commission, which in turn, assigned the study to the Naiional Staff College. The Study aimed' at ascertaining the present position regard ing promotion of international understanding, cooperation and 73 pcace and respect of human rights and fundamental freedoms through educational programmes ; examining in depth the practi cal possibilities of incorporating the components of international education in different educational settings ; identifying the prob lems involved and suggested the form of action. The project covered the major levels and forms of education starting from pre-primary education to higher education, including teacher pre paration and non-formal education. The design of the study in cluded analysis of syllabi and text books in different school sub jects developed by NCERT, collection and analysis of informa tion from the selected institutions located in different parts of country ; conducting case studies of some of the institutions con nected with the UNESCO-Associated Schools Projfcct ; and ana lysis of University level text books on international understanding. The report of the study has since been submitted to Unesco which has conveyed its appreciation of the study. (ii) Study on Management of Local Support to Educationin India— A Case Study. The study was requested by UNESCO, which is getting such suidies made in a number of countries, both from the point of view of linkage education with the community— the pedagogic and social importance of which is being increasingly realised—and for meeting the increasing costs of education, mobilisation of community resources is a matter of great importance. The Study was divided into two parts. The first part gave the various strate gics in the country as a whole while the second part dealt with the detailed study of the work done in Tamil Nadu. The Study was based on replies to the questionnaire/opinionnairc is'iied to vr.rious officials and non-officials. Personal discussions were also held with distinguished administrators, educationists and community leaders. The Study indicated that considerable work had been done in mobilisation of local support but its po tentialities were verv much greater which needed right educational policies, correct approach to the community and local leadership and organisation. Full administrative and political support was also necessary. (iii) Correspondence Course in Editca1ional Planning and Management. A Correspondence Course in Educational Planning and Management for the District and other senior offic ers of Edu cation Department was started by the National Staff College on July I. 1978 in collaboration with the Unesco's Regional Office 74 for Education in Asia, Bangkok. The Course consisted of 36 Units divided into six books with a duration of 6 months. The last instalment of learning material was sent to the participants in December 1978. C. Future Programmes to be Organised during January— March 1979 (i) Seminar on contribution of Education to New Inter national Order. This seminar will be organised at New Delhi from January 22— 27, 1979 in collabo ration with International Institute of Educational Planning, Paris and Unesco Regional Office for Edu cation, Bangkok. (ii) National Training Seminar on Statistics of Literacy Programmes from February 6— 10, 1979. (iii) Seminar on Educational Supervision for Eudcation Officers (first batch) of Haryana from February 19— 16, 1979. (iv) Correspondence Course in Educational Planning and Administration/Contact Programme from February 27—March 3, 1979. ' (v) Orientation Programme for Education Officers of Directorate of School Education, Tamil Nadu, in the first fortnight of March. 1979 at Madras, (vi) USEFI-sponsored Programme for College Principals proceeding to USA in two parts in March 1979. D. Research and Studies (i) All India Survey of Educational Administration. As a part of the Third Educational Survey, it was decided to conduct an All India Survey of Educational Administration in various States and Union Territories, which commenced in 1974. The main objective of the survey is to describe existing set up and functioning of the Government machinery for edu cational Administration at all levels, National, State, district and covers in its scope all stages of education (both formal & non-formal) from pre-primary to post-graduate and research. Up to the end of December 1978 reports of Andhra Pradesh, Andaman & Nicobar Islands, Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Chandigarh, Dadra & Nagar Haveli, Delhi, Goa, Daman & Diu, 75 Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Karnataka, Kerala, Lakshadweep, Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh, Mizoram, Nagaland, Orissa, Pondicherry, Tamil Nadu, Tripura, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal and Government of India have been published. (ii) Study of Administration of Elementary Education m relation to the Programme of Universalization. In pursuance of the decision taken in the meeting of Edu cation Secretaries & Directors of Public Instructions of 9 edu cationally backward States namely Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Jammu & Kashmir, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal held in Vigyan Bhawan on July 15, 1978, the National Staff College has launched an empirical study on administration of elementary education with a view to reforming and strengthening the existing administrative arrange ments for elementary education in relation to the programme of Universalization in the nine above mentioned States. This study covers all the three aspects of administration viz. its structure, availability of personnel and procedures for decision making at village, block, district, regional/divisional and state levels. It involves a detailed study of education cod'es and Manuals and administration of questionnaires to the administrative functiona ries supplemented with interviews and observation of their func tioning. E. Visits (i) Visit of Soviet Delegation. A Five member Soviet delegation headed' by Prof. N. S. Egorov, Deputy Minister of Higher and' Specialised Secondary Education USSR visited the Staff College on January 13, 1978. They met the Director and the faculty members of the Staff College and discussed problems of mutual interest relating mainly to educa tional planning and administration. (ii) Visit of Prof. Michael Debeauvais. Prof. Michael Debeauvais, Director International Institute for Educational Planning, Paris visited the Staff College on July 20, 1978 and addressed a seminar on “Changing Relationships between Education & Employment in a Long term Perspective”. (iii) Visit of Dr. J. Hallak. Dr. J. Hallak, Senior Faculty Member of International Insti tute for Educational Planning, Paris visited the Staff College on 76 August 28, 1978 and addressed a seminar on “Education, ihe World of Work and Employment”. (iv) A group of Educational Supervisors from the Central Hindi Institute, Agra, visited National Staff College on 1st December, 1978 when faculty members of National Staff College addressed the group. Administration Durins ihe year 1978 two special and two ordinary meetings of the Council of the National Staff College were held on 15th Julv 1978 and 19th October 1978, to consider and' approve amendments to the memorandum of association and certain other important matters such as future programmes of the Staff College ami to approve the draft Annual Report of the National Staff College for 1977-78. Four Finance Committee meetings were held to consider im portant Financial matters of the Staff College which were re quired to be placed before the Council meetings of' the Staff College. This apart, two meetings of the Sub-Committee appoint ed' by the Finance Committee to consider the Sixth Plan pro posals of the Staff College were a!.:o held. Finance and Funds The total budget provision for the Staff College during 1978-79 is Rs. 18.00 lakhs (Plan) and Rs. 3.30 lakhs (Non Plan) . Library The Staff College maintains a well equipped library in edu cational planning & administration and related areas. The li brary has about 19000 books, documents and other publications. It also subscribes to nearly 150 periodicals in educational plan ing. administration, management development and other allied fields. During the period 2000 titles were added to the library. Publications (i) HP A Bulletin 15PA (Educational Planning & Administration) quarterly bulletin was started in April, 1978 by the National Staff College 77 in fulfilment of one of its objectives for providing information am! idea' on training, research and extension in the field of edu cational planning and administration to the planners and adminis trators in the field of education. During ihe year three issues of the EPA bulletin have already been printed and the December issue is with the press. (ii) Annual Reports of the S ail Coilege for ,he years 1976-77 and 1977-78 am! their Hindi versions. (iiil Reports of the Survey of Educational Administration in : A ■•-am: Bihar: Kerala; Maharash.ra; Nagaland and West I' ilCil. E. BilaJi-ral/Foreign Collaboration Programme Shastri Indo-Canadian Institute, New Delhi Thirteen fellows/language trainees came to India during 1978-79 to conduct research in humanities or to study Indian languages under the Fellowship Programme of the Institute. Under the Summer Programme of the Institute for 197S. a group of 17 Canadian University students and High School tea chers came !o India during July-August 1978 for six weeks. Indo-USSK Cultural Exchange Programme Forty-one Ru-sian teachers were assigned to various Indian IJnivc-rsit ies/Institutions during 1978-79 for teaching the Russian Language and literature. United States Educational Foundation in India Forty-seven American scholars/students came to India dur ing 1978-79 for teaching assignments and post-doctoral and doc toral research under the Foundation's auspices. A number of Indian scholars proceeded to the USA during 1978-79 for teaching and research work in Universities and Colleges in the USA. 78 Short-term Group Educational Programmes of US Universities/ Colleges Under this programme, a number of groups of academics including professors, teachers, educational administrators from the USA came to India to acquaint themselves with the latest deve lopments in the field of education and understand in depth the life and culture of India, the ultimate object being to dovetail the knowledge obtained in the Indian system of education, life and culture in the courses of study on India being taught in the US Schools and Colleges. These group programmes are organised in close collaboration and supervision of Indian universities/insti tutions of higher learning. During 1978-79 ten groups consisting of 20-30 members each, came to India for periods ranging 2-3 months. Berkeley Professional Studies Programmes in India Under this programme, the University of California at Berkeley deputes its students for study/internship in professional fields in Indian institutions. During 1978-79, 13 students from Berkeley came for study/internship in the fields of medicine, law, engineer ing, textiles, architecture, agriculture forestry and business man agement. American Institute of Indian Studies The American Institute of Indian Studies was established in India in 1962 to encourage research in India in humanities and Social Sciences by doctoral and pre-doctoral scholars in American Universities. The Institute awarded Fellowships (Faculty/Junior/Adhoc/ Short-term and language) to 153 scholars during the academic year 1978-79 for doing research on various Indian topics. Pro jects of six scholars of its member Institutes were approved for research work in India. American Studies Research Centre, Hyderabad The American Studies Research Centre, Hyderabad is desig nated to make available its facilities to scholars and students of American studies. The Centre has been permitted to allow scho lars from neighbouring Asian countries also to avail themselves of these facilities at the Centre provided the US field rupee funds in 79 India are not utilised for the purposes. Government of India gave a grant of Rs. 1,60,680 for the construction of its build ing during 1978-79. Foreign Scholars visiting India for doing Research Foreign scholars from the following countries came to India during 1978-79 for doing Doctoral and Post-doctoral research work on their own or on grants from their Universities etc. (I) Japan, (2) USA, (3) West Germany, (4) Canada, (5) U.K., (6) France, (7) Denmark, (8) Fiji, (9) Holland, (10) Australia, (II) Austria, (12) Belgium and (13) New Zealand. F. Other Activities Revision of Sealed of Pay of University and College Teachers On, the recommendation of the University Grants Commission, the Government of India had approved a scheme of revision of scales of pay of university and college teachers with effect from January 1, 1973. The scheme was communicated to the State Governments in November, 1974 for consideration and accep tance. The Central Government also decided to offer financial assistance to the State Governments to the extent of 80 per cent of the additional expenditure involved in giving effect to the re vised scales. It was also suggested that the State Governments could, after taking local conditions into consideration, introduce scales of pay lower than those recommended by the Central Government and implement them from a date later than Jan uary, 1973. In any case, Central assistance for the scheme would be admissible only upto 31-3-1979. The Governments of Assam, Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Gujarat, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Maharashtra, Manipur, Meghalaya, Nagaland, Orissa, Punjab, Rajasthan, Tamil Nadu, Tripura, Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal have already implemented the re vised scales recommended by the Central Government. The Go vernments of Jammu and Kashmir and Karnataka have san ctioned these scales for university teachers only. The Govern ment of Madhya Pradesh had introduced certain modified scales from 1-1-1973 but are presently considering the possibility of introducing the UGC scales from 1-1-1978. The proposals of the Governments of Jammu and Kashmir, Karnataka, Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan and Tamil Nadu for sanctioning Central 80 assistance are under consideration. The proposals of the Govern ment of Kerala did not conform to the Central scheme and were not accepted. During 1977-78, a sum of Rs. 900 lakhs was released io the State Governments for implementation of the scheme. Rural Higher Education Central grant totalling Rs. 0.47 lakh was released to the Rural Institute for meeting the Central share of expenditure during the period ending December, 1978. 144 students from Rural Institutes took their examination in various courses under the aegis of the National Council for Rural Higher Education held in April, 1978. Of these 133 were declared successful. Special Cell for Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes In pursuance of the recommendations of the Committee on the Welfare of the Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes, contained in its 42nd Report, a Special Cell was set up in January, 1977, in the University Division of the Department of Education to en sure proper implementation of Government orders on reserva tion for Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes by the University Grants Commission/Universities in the matter of appointments and admissions. During 1978-79, the Cell attended to a large number of re presentations received from individuals and others regarding dis crimination against persons belonging to Scheduled Castes/Tribes in the matters of admission and recruitment in the Universities as also the UGC. With a view to implementing the various orders issued in this behalf, the Cell devised, in consultation with the Commissioner for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, two proformae for collection of information by the UGC relating to reservations etc., so that the causes and factors coming in the way of making ade quate provisions for reservations/relaxations for Scheduled Caste/ Scheduled Tribe students in universities etc. could be investigated and immediate effective remedial action taken. These forms have been sent by the UGC to the different universities for col lection of the necessary information. CHAPTER III TECHNICAL EDUCATION In the development of technical education each Five Year Plan was characterised by major stress on, certain aspects. Up to the end of the Third Plan, the main emphasis was on expansion, infrastructure development, promotion of post-graduate education and research. During the Fourth Plan there was selective expan sion in post-graduate education and an attempt to consolidate Other programmes. In the Fifth Plan, the effort was mainly directed towards consolidation, diversification, faculty develop ment, industry-institution, collaboration and curriculum develop ment. Like 1977-78 the emphasis was laid on the following pro grammes specially, in the first half of the current year : (1) Development of Postgraduate Studies and Research ; (2) Establishment of Linkage between technical institu tions and industry ; (3) Linkage of technical education with manpower re quirements ; (4) The programme of Apprenticeship Training to train the graduate and diploma holders in the engineering and technology for gainful employment; (5) Consolidation of existing engineering colleges and polytechnics ; (6) Faculty Development through training programmes , (7) Curriculum Development; (8) Diversification of Courses ; and (9) The Development of Management Education As a logical step in the direction of growth, it was now necessary to re-organise some of the activities and to identify programmes that need to be supported and promoted in the con text of future needs of the country. 81 82 Setting up of a Working Group In November, 1977, the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, Government of India, set up a Working Group for Technical Education to review the present status of the nation’s needs during the coming decade and to suggest re-orientation and improvements to the existing programmes. At the first meeting of the Working Group in November, 1977 the following five subjects were identified which required in-depth study and which could from the basis for further deliberations: “Technical Manpower”, “Research and Development”, “Diversification and Redesigning of the existing Programme”, “Quality Improvement Programme” and “Industry Institutional Collaboration”. The Group finally met in, January, 1978 to finalise the recommendations. Working Group recommendations as finally endorsed by the All India Council for Technical Education, at its meetings held in February, 1978 are given below :— Manpower Need (1) Within the approved annual intake capacity each institution should increase the supply of technical manpower by improving the efficiency and effective ness of educational processes. Shifts in the intake capacities between disciplines may be effected to cater to the emerging manpower needs. (2) AIL new courses should be based on well-established and well-defined manpower needs. (3) A reliable information system is a pre-requisite to planing, especially, in the field of technical education, and training. A National Manpower Information System should be established with a lead centre in the Institute of Applied Manpower Research for the storage, updating, retrieval and analysis of manpower information to assist technical education planning. The Institute of Applied Manpower Research should be suitably strengthened for this purpose with pro vision of requisite facilities. Measures for Improvements (4) Credit System with provision for multi-point entry in part-time and full-time programmes should be introduced. 83 (5) Industrial and rural development problems be identi fied and a greater emphasis on research programmes, to tackle such problems, be given in keeping with the national needs. Technical education institutions hav ing the potential and capability to undertake problem- oriented and application-oriented programmes be selected and properly supported io facilitate subs tantial contribution to rural and community develop ment. (6) Institutions be encouraged to set up Consultancy Centres to promote Consultancy Activities. (7) Relevant Management Education be integrated with professional courses at degree and diploma levels. (8) Courses in Management Education be restructured to provide for managerial manpower for small and me dium sized industry as also for sectoral needs such as transport, power, health, education and agricul ture, cooperation and cooperative banks. (9) Selected Polytechnics act as focal points to promote transfer of technology to the rural community. Such Polytechnics should be designated as ‘Community Polytechnics’ and adequate support provided. (10) Selected Polytechnics should be given central assis tance to conduct advanced technical programmes. (11) Support be provided to strengthen the work of Cur riculum Development and Research related to pro- lems of technical education. (12) In addition to minimum academic qualifications laid down by All India Council for Technical Education, one year’s industrial experience for lecturers and two years for senior staff is considered desirable. All recruitment should be strictly on merit, by open com petition and on all-India basis, subject to reservation because of constitutional requirements. (13) To ensure high quality performance, appropriate measures be taken for providing the necessary faci lities. In this context the feasibility of making appoint ments to senior teaching posts (i.e. Professors and Heads of Institutions) on contract basis for five years, renewable after assessment be considered. 16 ESV/78—7 84 (14) Personal Promotion Schemcs should be established to enable promotion of deserving young faculty stag nating at a particular level. Such promotion be res tricted to 20 per cent of the sanctioned strength. (15) An appropriate staff appraisal scheme based on a methodology acceptable to the faculty should be introduced. This would also enable identification of the needs of staff development. (16) Facilities for Masters’ degree training under the Quality Improvement Programme be progressively reduced. Considering the number of teachers involv ed, provision for Doctoral Programme under Q!P be increased to enable 250 teachers every \ear to enrol for Doctoral Programmes. (17) Provision be made to organise short-term courses for Polytechnic and collegiate teachers in educational technology. (18) Selected Engineering Colleges should organise under Quality Improvement Programmes three-year courses to enable Polytechnic teachers with diploma qualifica tion to get Bachelor’s degree. (19) Polytechnic teachers should be sponsored under the Quality Improvement Programme for industry orient ed post-graduate diploma/degree courses orgairsed for the purpose. (20) In order to ensure purposeful and meaningful inter action and collaboration between industry and insti tutions, “Fellowship” in the institution for willing and capable personnel from the industry be instituted. Similarly, ‘Residency’ for institutional faculty be pro vided in the industry on the lines of Quality Improve ment Programmes. Additional budgetary provision on staff to the tune of 20 per cent should be made to finance these schemes. (21) Admission to both degree and diploma courscs be on the basis of carefully designed entrance tests. Tnese tests should be conducted State-wise common to a1! institutions. (22) In order to reduce drop outs and otber forms of wastage, it is necessary that special efforts in the form vl remedial courscs be carried out in the initial stages to help weaker students. (23) Flexible programmes of continuing education through part-time/full-time courscs be introduced at all levels for serving personnel. (24) Representation be given to students in bodies con cerned with framing the curricula. (25) Schemes for training of technical supporting staff be started under “Quality Improvement Programme.'’ (26) To ensure better and more effective library services, qualified and trained library staff be provided. (27) Adequate support be given to institutions to organise Audio-Visual and Reprographic Services. (28) On an experimental basis, Learning Resource Centres be established in a few selected institutions. (29) The replacement of laboratory equipment which have become obsolete due to technological and curricular changes be examined. Laboratories be modernised with relevant, and versatile equipment with more instructional potential. Management of the System (30) The tasks of planning and organising 'Technical Education from the level of craftsmen to that of technologists be brought under a single National Agency both at the Centre and States to ensure balanced development through an integrated approach. (31) It is essential to optimise ;he utilisation of available resources and provide impetus to all the Centres engaged in Post-Graduate Programmes and Research. The Planning, organisation and prescription of norms for postgraduate and research programmes conducted at universities, Indian Institutes of Technology, Indian Institute^- of Management, and affiliated colleges should be coordinated by the Board of Post-graduate Engi neering Studies and Research of the AICTE. (32) The organisation of short-term courses under QIP be coordinated. (33) The Regional Boards of Apprenticeship Training be adequately staffed and strengthened with a view to ensuring purposeful planning and supervision of Apprenticeship Training Programmes. (34) The Directorates should have organs dealing with Manpower Assessment, planning, coordination, con trolling, monitoring and evaluation of technical edu cational programmes. Reorganisation of Directorates to enable them to perform these professional functions effcctivclv be undertaken as a matter of urgency. (35) Administrative autonomy and powers of financial con trol be given to all technical institutions including Government institutions by bringing them under suitably constituted governing councils. Academic autonomy be given to institutions on a seleciive basis. (36) The concept of ‘Adoption of Polytechnics’ by industry already recommended by the All India Council for Technical Education be pursued. (37) Short-term courses under Quality Improvement Pro gramme in educational management be organised for training heads of insiitutions and Heads of Depart ments. (38) Setting up a Staff College for Technical Educators be examined by an Expert Committee. (39) Maintenance of uniform standards in technical insti tutions in the country is the constitutional responsi bility of the Central Government. It is, therefore, necessary to coordinate and strengthen existing evalu ation agencies. (40) To ensure effective implementation of policies and programmes of the Council, measures other than making it statutory, may be considered for the pre sent. Financing of Technical Education (41) The Plan allocations for Technical Education should be commensurate with the developmental outlay of the other user departments, since technical education is developmental investment. 87 (42) To provide the neccssary incentive to industry ex penditure by industry on technical education includ ing Management Education be deductable for pur poses of Income Tax Assessment. (43) The System of making available the Central Govern ment’s share for approved schemes directly to the institutions should be restored. Action on a majority of the recommendations is required to be taken by the State Governments and Engineering/Technolo gical Institutions. They have been requested to implement the All India Council for Technical Education recommendations as early as possible. Action on some of the important recommenda tions is being pursued in this Ministry also. Progress of impor tant schemes is given below : — lo Direct Central Assistance to Engineering and Technological Institutions Two Committees to identify Engineering Colleges and Poly technics for Direct Central Assistance has been constituted. These Committees have sclcctccT 35 colleges and 28 Polytechnics for giving assistance for filing the gaps in existing laboratories and workshops in engineering colleges and to provide assistance for new schemes such as Production Centre, Audio Visual Aid Simulation Workshops etc. in Engineering Colleges and Polytech nics selected for this purpose. The total expenditure involved in these recommendations is of the order of Rs. 250 lakhs. Twenty five per cent of this expenditure is to be shared by the respective State Governments. A provision of Rs. 220 lakhs is being made under the Annual Plan 1979-80. 2. Community Polytechnics As recommended by the All India Council for Technical Education, some Polytechnics which have shown initiative to inter-act with environment by organising programmes and acti vities to meet the needs of the Community are to be selected as focal points to promote transfer of technology to the rural sector. These Polytechnics are to be called ‘Community Polytechnics’. The Expert Committee constituted to identify such institutions has already met and selected 28 Polytechnics to be developed as ‘Community Polytechnics’. Proposals from some institutions are still under consideration. The total amount involved in the Polytechnics selected so far is about Rs. 13 lakhs. 88 3. Advanced Technician Courses As recommended by All India Council for Technical Educa tion on the basis of the Report of Working Group on Technical Education selected polytechnics will be given central assistance to conduct advanced' level Technician Programmes. In order to work out the necessary details and to prepare a complete project report for organising these advanced level technician courses at the selected polytechnics a committee has been constituted by the Chairman, All India Council lor Technical Education. Further action will be taken on receipt of the Report of this Committee, which is awaited'. 4. Quality Improvement Scheme As recommended by the All India Council for Technical Education, a Committee has been constituted to formulate supplementary Quality Improvement Programmes to enable polytechnic teachers to join industry oriented postgraduate/degree courses and to improve their academic qualifications. The Committee constituted' to identify institutions which can offer facilities for continuing education programme for polytechnics teachers is working on the following schemes :— (i) three year degree courses for polytechnics teaeiiers having diploma qualifications ; (ii) one year industry-oriented postgraduate diploma course for polytechnics teachers ; (iii) three months postgraduate diploma course in educa tion technology.''management for polytechnic tea chers. The Committee's final recommendations would be made avail able shortly. Action will be taken on the recommendations as soon as these are available. As regards the existing Quality Improvement Programme, the progress of various schemes is as given below : — The programme of Quality Improvement was initiated in 1970-7! with a view to improving the quality and standard of Technical Education system in India. The following prog rammes are being conducted including Faculty Development, Curriculum Development, Preparation of Instructional Material, Textbooks and Laboratory Development : (1) 2 Year M. Tech. Programme. (2) 3 Year Doctoral Programme. (3) Short Courts at Quality Improvement Pro gramme Centres- (4) Short-Term Training in Industry. (5) Summer Institute Programme through 1STE. (6) Curriculum Development. The Programme is implemented/carried out by the Technical Education Bureau at 5 Indian Institutes of Technologies, Uni versity of Roorkee, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and some other Colleges and' Polytechnics, Technical Teachers Trai ning Institutes etc. The Directors of Technical Education in the States and Indian Socicty for Technical Education and Minis try's Regional Offices are also involved in implementation of these programmes. In 1978-79 the target was to retain 80 fresh teachers for M. Tech. and 120 Ph. D. in addition to these continuing from previous years. Under the Summer School Programme 1200— 1400 teachers were proposed to be trained. Final figures are awaited. Similarly under Curriculum Development Programme 14 Groups were to be organised. Short-term courses were to be organised within the prescribed financial limit. 5. Board of Assessment for Educational Qualifications—-Recogni tion of Educational Qualification The Board of Assessment for Educational Qualifications under the Chairmanship of the Chairman, Union Public Service Commission, advises Government of India, in all matters rela ting to the recognition of degrees/diplomas, etc. awarded under the Central Government. During the year 1978, two meetings of the Board have been held. 6. Programme of Apprenticeship Training The Programme of Apprenticeship Training, covered by the Apprentices (Amendment) Act 1973. for providing practical training facilities to fresh Engineering Graduates and diploma holders to condition them for gainful employment is being con tinued through the four Boards of Apprenticeship Training loca ted at Kanpur, Bombay, Calcutta and Madras. As on 30th November, 1978 the total number of seats avail able for training to graduate apprentices is 12,622 and for diplo ma holders 15,431 (total 27.963). Against these seats 5,907 graduate apprentices and 9,649 diploma holders (total 15.556) trainees have been posted. 90 7. Indian Institutes of Technology The 5 Indian Institutes of Technology at Kharagpur, Bombay, Madras, Kanpur and Delhi were established with the prime objective of imparting education and training of a very high standard' in engineering and applied sciences, and to provide adequate facilities for post-graduate studies and research. Cher the years, these objectives have been expanded to provide for quality improvement programmes, curriculum planning, faculty development, inter disciplinary research, inter-institutional colla boration, consultancy services etc. The Institutes offer five-year under-graduate programmes leading to Bachelor’s degree in Technology in various fields of engineering and technology. In Science, they conduct integrated Master's degree courses of 5-year duration in Physics. Chemis try, and Mathematics. The post-graduate programme consist of two-year courses leading to M. Tech. Degree in specialised fields and one year diploma courses in selected areas. They also offer Ph. D. in different branches of engineering, science, and humanities and social sciences. Several advanced centres of training and research have been set up in the 5 Indian Insti tutes of Technology. The student strength and out-turn of the five Institutes during 1978-79 were :— U nder - i’OM- R e Tot a i Out G radu G radu search turn ate ate Kharagpur . . 1420 779 208 2407 583 B om bay . . 1301 625 345 2273 470 M adras . . . 1149 520 537 2206 547 Kanpur . . 1186 506 353 2045 306 D elhi . . . 1097 573 537 2207 448 6155 3003 1980 11138 2 354 During 1978-79, the Institutes expanded their infrastructural facilities considerably and made substantial progress in acquiring new sophisticated research equipment, starting new inter-disci 91 plinary academic programmes and pursuing research and consul tancy services. The Institute also intensified their activities m the area of continuing education by organising a large number of short-term courses, long-term courses, symposia and work shops for the benefit of students, working engineers, technolo gists and scientists from all over the country. Some of the salient points of performance and projections in respect of each of the Indian Institutes of Technolog}’ are given below. Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur During the year, the Institute either completed or initiated more than 100 sponsored research schemes and about SO con sultancy projects. In addition, the Institute financed about 350 research schemes and brought out 276 research publications. Apart from this, about 190 papers were either presented or acccpted for presentation in conferences and seminars. The Rural Development Centre of the Institute intensified its activities in the area of transfer of technology. The Cryoge nic Centre started production of liquid nitrogen. Fabrication of a prototype 100 litre liquid nitrogen storage vessel is in pro gress. An Ocean Engineering sub-Centre is being developed under the Naval Arcnitecture Department. The new facilities provided include ceramics laboratory, aircrafts fuel testing labo ratory, solar energy laboratory and a radion isotope laboratory. New Post-graduate diploma courses in Computational Mathema tics and Computer Programming and in Mineral Beneficiafion were introduced. Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay The Institute made considerable progress in its research and development programmes. The earnines through sponsored research projects went up to Rs. 23,70,426/- as against Rs. 14,12,598/- last year. There was further progress in the estab lishment of the Regional Sophisticated Instruments Centre (RSIC). The Centre for Studies in Resources Engineering (CSRE) undertook many useful research project. ” The Institute started two more inter-disciplinary courses at the M. Tech. level environmental science and engineering and system and control engineering. A new two-year course in mathematics with specialisation in computer science and a new 92 DIIT course in foundry technology were also started during this year. Indian Institute of Technology, Madras During 1977-78, the Industrial Consultancy Centre under took over 1,000 assignments at a total cost of about Rs. 18.00 lakhs which was an increase of about 50% over that of last year. The Institute had as many as 119 projects sponsored by various organisations. In addition 16 Indo-German projects and 12 projects under Ocean Engineering Centre were also on. The number of patent.-; take applied for by the Institute was 57. The Centre ior Policy Studies has planned to undertake research activities to identify appropriate technologies capable or up-lifting the masses in rural areas. An Energy Complex combining bio-gas. solar energy and wind power is being set up in a ncarbv village. A cyclone disaster simulator is being developed as a major time-bound project. A new M. Tech. programme in building technology and a new B. Tech. programme in Naval Architecture were intro duced. A number of existing courses were up-graded and revised. Equipment worth about Rs. 47 lakhs were added on to the various laboratories. Construction of buildings for Ocean En- '.cciing Centre, Water Works System etc. made good progress. Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur The research development and’ consultancy activities of the Institute registered significant growth during 1977-78. Nearly 100 sponsored projects and about 80 consultancy projects were in operation. The total receipts from sponsored projects amoun ted to Rs. 27 lakhs, while the total value of consultancy projects came to nearly Rs. 20 lakhs. More than 1000 original research papers were published and/or presented in international and national scientific and engineering journals and conferences. About half a dozen textbooks were published by the Institute faculty bringing the total number of text books published so far to about 30. It was this Institute which ushered the computer era in the Indian educational scene when it procured IBM 1620 computer way back in 1964. The leadership position of the Institute in this field has been recogniscd by the Government in allowing the Institute to have a fourth generation computer in 1979. 93 Indian institute of Technology, Delhi A total of 733 projects were cither completed or in progress in areas such as solar energy, water resources, utilisation or bio gas etc. The number of papers published by the faculty/research scholars during the year comes to 420. In, addition, they pre sented 88 papers at various seminars/symposia. The faculty of the institute also published 24 books. About 92 consultancy jobs were undertaken by the Institute during the year. Several new courses were introduced during the year. They include under-graduate and post-graduate courses in measure ments, non-numeric computation, mini-computers and micro processors. naval construction, atmospheric services (environ mental chemistry) material management, noise engineering etc. In conclusion, it can be said that in shaping their academic and research programmes and in breaking new grounds in deve lopment piogiciinniLS and technology transfer, the Indian Insti tutes of Technology have ably responded to the new perspectives of national growth and planning. 8. Indian Instituie of Science, Bangalore The Institute continued to be the venue of a number of national and international seminars, rjeetings etc. Over 200 vcscavch arui development schemes and projects were current during the year, which resulted in the publication of 550 paoers. The industrial consultancy activities achieved reason able stability and continued to provide fruitful interactions with industry and outside organisations. During the year under review, the student population, including research scholars in various programmes, varied from 990 to 1040. About 350 stu dents obtained their degrees/diplomas. Of these 75 were Ph.Ds. 9. Indian School of Mines. Dhanbacl The School made further progress in becoming an active centre of dialogue and inter-action between the various agen cies and industries involved and engaged in the extraction and processing of mineral resources. During the year, the school fulfilled many of its ambitious programmes. As many as four new programmes—all specially tailored to the needs of indus try were started. In addition, the ground was prepared for starting several more new courses. The continuing education activity got stabilised and the consultancy activity continued its 94 upward trend. The total student population was 490, of which 9i were under postgraduate programmes. In addition, .'4 lull time research fellows registered for grant of M. Tech. and Ph.D. degrees. As many as 115 people registered as external candi dates for grant of M. Tech. and Ph. D. degrees by research. 10. Asian Institute of Technology, Bangkok The Asian Institute of Technology, Bangkok set up in 1967, is an autonomous international post-graduate engineering insti tute governed by an International board of Trustees v»i ose members come from different Asian countries including India. On a proposal received from the Institute for India’s association with its academic development, it has been decided to extend assistance from India by donating equipment of indigenous origin worth Rs. one lakh every year and deputing Indian Ex perts to the faculty of the Institute. During 1978-79. a budget provision of Rs. 6.00 lakhs was made. 1J. Regional Engineering Colleges The fourteen Regional Engineering Colleges set up in various Slates are making satisfactory progress with regard to consoli dation and development. The fifteenth college at Silchar (Assam) has admitted students in November, 1977. While all offer first degree courses in Civil, Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, some offer Architecture, Metallurgy Electronics and Chemical Engineering. Ten of these colleges have since intro duced post-graduate courses. Of these, nine are conducting industry-oriented post-graduate courses in specialised fields like design and production of high pressure boilers and accessories, heavy machines for steel plants, transportation engineering, industrial and marine structure, electronic instrumentation, in tegrated power systems, etc. The programme of development of the Regional Engineering Colleges for the Sixth Plan period has been prepared in consul tation with the Principals of these Colleges. The emphasis in the development plan is on consolidation of existing facilities, modernisation of laboratories including replacement of obsolete equipment, extension of library facilities and development of student activity centre at each college. The plan of development will be placed before the Advisory Committee for these Colleges at its next meeting for its consideration and' approval; the current year plan provision for the development of these colleges is Rs. 3 crores and the non-Plan provision is Rs. 4.36 crores. 95 12. Grants to Non-Government Scientific and Technical Institu tions for Development and Improvement Under this scheme, grants-in-aid are sanctioned to non government engineering and technical institutions for their estab lishment and development of first degree/diploma level educa tion and for various other Schemes of Technical Education such as technical institutions for Girls, Junior Technical Schools etc. Over 100 Institutions have been established/developed since the commencement ot' the scheme during the first plan period in accordance with the pattern of Central assistance laid' down for the purpose. Grants paid to the institutions since the inception of the scheme total over Rs. 10.00 crores. The current year plan provision for the scheme is Rs. 32.00 lakhs. It has been decided to transfer the scheme under the State Sector from the year 1979-80. 13. Loans for Construction of Student's Hostels in Technical Institutions For provision of hostel facilities for students in technical institutions loans arc sanctioned both for Government and non Government technical institutions to the extent of the cost on 50 per cent of the students population. Loans amounting to Rs. 19.395 crores have so far been sanctioned under the scheme. The non-government institutions represented that the income from hostel fee was too inadequate to repay the loan instalment and the loanees had no other resources to pay off the loan instalments. To ease the difficulties experienced by them, it was decided in 1973 that 50 per cent of the loan already given should be written off and the balance 50 per cent recovered in the remaining number of instalments. Till 1977-78, 63,224 hostel seats had been provided through these loans. The provision of Rs. 30 lakhs for the year 1978-79 includes Rs. 4.00 lakhs as loan for Government institutions and Rs. 21.00 lakhs as loan and Rs. 5.00 lakhs as grant for non Government institutions. It has been dccidcd to transfer the scheme under the State Sector from the year 1979-80. 14. Technical Teachers’ Training Institutes The Institutes at Madras, Calcutta, Bhopal and Chandigarh were set up in 1966-67 to (i) provide professional training for teaching Engineering and Technology subjects; (ii) to provide for 96 instruction and research in branches of Engineering and techno logy and for the advancement of learning and dissemination of knowledge in such branches, (iii) arrange for practical training industry on a co-operative Education Plan. These institutions run a 12 months course for degree holders and 18 months course f>)r diploma holders besides organising short-term-m-service training courses and Curriculum programme under the Quality Improve ment Programme. During 1978-79, till December, 1978, 161 teachers were admitted to the various regular courses. A number of seminars and workshops were also organised. The working of these insti tutes were reviewed by a committee whose recommendations are in the process of implementation. The Central Government has appointed a Co-ordination Committee under the Chairmanship of the Minister of State to co-ordinate the development of the four Institutes. 15. School cf Planning and ArchiSeciure, New Delia The School was established in 1959 to provide facilities for training and research in rural, urban, regional planning, archi tecture and allied subjects- It conducts a 5 year full time degiee course in Architecture 7-1/2 years part-time diploma course in Architecture and 2 year full time Post-Graduate courses in (i) Architecture (Urban Design), (ii) Town and Country Planning with specialisation in (a) Urban and Regional Planning, (b) Hous ing and Community Planning and (c) Traffic and Transportation Planning and (iii) Landscape Architecture. During 1978-79, the School admitted 276 students for the graduate courses and 89 students for the Post-Graduate courses. 16. National Institute for Training in Industrial Engineering, Bombay This Institute was set up in 1963 with the assistance of UNDP to provide facilities for training in industrial Engineering and allied fields. The Institute conducts a number of short-term courses for industrial executives and a two vear Post-Graduate diploma course in Industrial Engineering. It also undertakes con sultancy proiccts relevants to i's field of specialisation. The Short term include Executive Development Programmes and Unit- Based Programmes. 97 During 1978-79, the Institute admittcc 55 candidates to the Post-Graouatc Programmes in Industrial Eiginecrin.g. A number of short-term courscs are also scheduled for the year. 17. Indian Institute of Management, Ahmetabad This Institute was set up in 1962 in collaboration with indus try, Ford Foundation and the Governmen; of Gujarat. The ob jective of the Institute is to provide facilities’ for training young men and women for management careers, -'cnduct research in management techniques, and to provide fcr the development of teachers engaged in the field of managemen: practice. The Institute admitted during 1978-79. 162 students to the two years Post-Graduate programme anc. 39 students to the Fellowship programme. It plans to conduct 30 Management Deve lopment Programmes and 15 Conferences, seminars etc. 18. Indian Lisiilute of Management, BungalJrc This institute was set up in 1972 in a>-operatien with the Government of Karnataka with the objecthe of Training a cadre of high level managerial personnel for the public and private sec tors and to conduct research in matters concerning the use of management and aliied techniques. Duviv.g 197S-79, the Institute admitted 95 students to the Post-Graduate Programme and 12 students to the Fellowship Programme. 19. Indian Institute of Management, Calcutta The Institute set up in 1962 with the object of training a cadre of’ High level managerial personnel and to conduct research in the field, continued to run its post-graduate programme with an intake of about 124 students. In the fellowship programme at doctoral level, the Institute continued to admit about 15 students during the current year. 20. National Institute of Foundry and Forge Technology, Ranchi The Institute was set up in 1966 with the assistance of UNDP/UNESCO to provide facilities for (i) Forge Education and Research in the form of full time courses, vacation courses and the like; (ii) the training of senior executive personnel for Foundry 98 Institute ; (ii) the training of suitable qualified personnel for in dustry in the latest production techniques and methods design and development; (iv) conducting Applied Research in the field of Foundry and Forge Technology. During the year the institute continued to conduct refresher courses benefiting participants from industry. CHAPTER IV SCHOLARSHIPS By way of equalising educational opportunities and providing facilities for higher and specialised education and training to Indian nationals in this country and abroad a number of scholar ships programmes are handled by the Ministry of Education, including those offered by other countries. The Ministry also handles quite a few programmes offering scholarships to nationals of other countries on a bilateral basis or otherwise. The program mes can be grouped in three broad categories, namely : (a) Scholarships for Indian Students for Study in India. (b) Scholarships lor Indian Students for Study Abroad. (c) Scholarships for Foreign Students for Study in India. A brief account of these programmes is given below. A. S cholarships f o r I n d ia n S t u d e n t s f o r S t u d y in I n d ia National Scholarships Scheme This scheme was started in 1961 and has been continuing Irom year to year since then with the objective that no brilliant student should be prevented on grounds of poverty from pursuing an academic career. The rates of scholarships under this scheme vary from Rs. 50 to Rs. 125 p.m. depending upon the stage of education and course of study followed by the scholar. The Sixth Finance Commission in its recommendations took into account the financial requirements of the States for scholarships under educational scheme (including this scheme) and provided requisite funds to them at the same level as reached at the end of 1973-74 as part of the committed expenditure of the State Governments. In 1978-79, 21,000 fresh scholarships were awarded under this scheme. 99 16 ESW/78—8 100 National Loan Scholarships Scheme Started in 1963-64 with the object of providing financial assistance to needy and deserving students to complete their edu cation, the scheme continued to make steady progress. In 1977-78, 20,000 fresh scholarships were awarded on an all-India basis. Under the rules of the scheme scholars who join the teaching profession or as combatants in the armed forccs after completion of their studies are not required to repay the loan while they conti nue in these professions. In their case, the loan is reduced by one tenth of the original loan for every year of service put in as a teacher or as a combatant until the entire loan is written off. This rule also applies to scholars who die or become incapacitated between or after completion of their studies. On the recommenda tions of the Sixth Finance Commission the recovery of loan given to scholars up to 31-3-74 is being shared equally between the Central Government and the State Governments. National Scholarships for (he Children of Primary and Secondary School Teachers This scheme was started in 1961 as a token of the recogni tion of the services rendered by the school leachers to enable their meritorious children to pursue higher education. In pur suance of the recommendations of the Sixth Finance Commission, the State Governments were provided with funds for its imple mentation at the level reached at the end of 1973-74. In the first two years following 1973-74, only 500 scholarships (the level reached in 1973-74) were awarded by the State Governments from the funds made available to them- In 1978-79, 250 fresh scholarships were awarded over and above the 500 fresh scholar ships awarded from the resources made available to the Slate Governments. National Scholarships at the Secondary Stage for Talented Children from Rural Areas Started in 1971-72 the scheme aims to achieve greater equali sation of educational opportunities and provide a fillip to the development of rural talent. The scheme has continued to make satisfactory progress from year to year. As in the schcmes indi cated earlier, the Sixth Finance Commission took this scheme aN> into account while working out the financial requirements of the States for Scholarships and provided them with funds for imple mentation at the same level as reached at the end of 1973-74 as 101 part of the committed expenditure of the State Governments. Under it about 15,000 fresh scholarships (@ 3 scholarships per Community Development Block) were awarded in 1977-78. In 1978-79, 20,400 fresh scholarships (@ 4 scholarships per Com munity Development Block & 2 additional scholarships per Tri bal Community Development Block) were awaTded under this scheme. Scheme of Scholarships tor Students from Non-Hindi Speaking States for Post-Matric Studies in Hindi The main object of the scheme is to encourage the study of Hindi in Non-Hindi Speaking States and to make available to the Governments of these States suitable personnel to man teach ing and oilier posts where knowledge of Hindi is essential. Under this scheme scholarships were awarded to students from Non- Hindi-Speaking States for pursuing Post-Matric studies provided Hindi is studied as one of the subjects in that course. Started in 1955-56 the coverage of the scheme continued to increase from year to year. During 1978-79, 2500 fresh scholarships were awarded under this Scheme. Scholarships in Approved Residential Secondary Schools The scheme is intended to provide educational facilities to meritorious children of lower income groups who are otherwise unable to avail themselves of the opportunities of studying in good residential schools. 500 candidates of 11-12 years age- group whose parent's/guardian's income docs not exceed Rs. 500 p.m. or Rs. 6.000 p.a. are selected for the award of scholarships every year Under the scheme. During the current year, approximately 1800 scholars would be studying in 69 ap proved schools under the scheme- During 1978-79, 500 students are to be selected for the award of scholarships. The selections under the scheme arc made on the basis of two Tests—Preli minary Test held by the State Governments/Union Territory Ad ministrations and All-India Final Test conducted by the Ministry of Education. The scholarship of the selected students are tenable up to secondary education including +2 stage of education under the new pattern of education. The scholarships include the school fees (including board and lodging expenses), books and sta tionery allowance, uniform and clothing allowance, pocket money, T.A. ancf other compulsory charges which are paid to/through the school authorities. 102 B. Scholarships f o r I n d ia n S t u d e n t s f o r S t u d ie s A b r o a d National Scholarships for Study Abroad The scheme is intended to provide financial assistance to such students of merit as do not have the means to go abroad for fur ther studies. 50 scholarships are earmarked every year under the schemc, which are normally available for postgraduate studies leading to Ph.D. degree and post doctoral research/specialised training. Only those candidates whose parental income from all sources is less than Rs. 1000 per month are eligible for these scholarships. 50 students were selected for award of scholarships, during 1978 79. At present about 180 scholars under the scheme are study ing abroad. Each scholar is entitled to maintenance allowance at $ 4,000 per annum in the USA and Canada and US $ 3,000, per annum in the UK and other countries. Besides, the Govern ment of India also defray tuition fees and other compulsory charges and cost of books and equipment. Partial Financial Assistance Scheme The schcme provides for the grant of loan towards inter national passage costs to such academically distinguished scholars as have obtained admission in foreign universities, institutions, etc. for study in subject-field which arc of national importance to India or for which adequate facilities do not exist in India. Emer^ gency loans to bona fide Indian students are also given sparingly by our Missions in the USA, the U.K. and West Germany. During 1978-79, such loatts were granted to three students. Scholarships Under Commonwealth Scholarships/Fellowships Plan Under the 1978 scheme. Canada has accepted 14 candidates and the UK have acceptcd 30 candidates. Under the 1979 scheme. 2 candidates have been accepted by New Zealand and 4 candidates have been nominated for study in Australia. For the UK, Canada. Jamaica, Malaysia and Trinidad & Tobago, the selections arc in progress. 103 Scholarships/Fellowships offered by Foreign Governments/Organi- sations/Instiuifions For the year 1978-79, Austria has acccptcd six candidates, Belgium 7, Czechoslovakia 6, Com eron 1, D enm ark 8, FRG 7, France 13, Italy 3, Japan 8, Netherlands 15, Norway 3, Sweden 3 and the USA 5. Three candidates have been nominated for Bulgaria, 21 for GDR, 6 for Greece. 16 for Poland, 7 for Turkey and 7 for Yugoslavia. Their final acceptance is still awaited. For 1979. 14 candidates have been nominated for study in the FRG. For the UK the position is as follows : Under the British Technical Cooperation Technical Training Programme. 8 short term awards have been utilised. 21 candidates have also been nominated for awards under "Educational Links’. Under the British Council Scholarships, 6 awards have been uti lised. Under the Confederation of British Industry Scholarships, 5 awards have been utilised. Under the Miss Agatha Harrison Memorial Fellowships. 3 scholars have been nominated. Under the Nehru Memorial Trust Scholarships. 2 nominations have been made. Under the Science Research Scholarships of the Royal Commission for the Exhibition of 1851 and Rutherford Scholar ships of the Royal Society, one scholar was nominated, but was not finally accepted by the Royal Commission. For the USSR, the position for 1978-79 is as follows : Under the scheme for Post-graduate studie$/research/higher specialisation, 68 scholarships were offered by the Soviet Govern ment. 10 scholarships were allocated for the children of Indian residents in the USSR. Out of 31 candidates recommended, 15 candidates have been accepted. Against an offer of 15 scholar ships by the Patrice Lumumba Friendship University, Moscow, 12 candidates have been acccpted. C. S cholarships f o r F o r e ig n S t u d e n t s f o r S t u d y in I n d ia General Cultural Scholarships Scheme Under the scheme, 180 scholarships are awarded every year to nationals of Africa, Asia and other foreign countries. The scheme is designed to promote friendly relations between India and other countries and to provide for the nationals of selected 104 countries all such facilities for higher education as are available in India. During 1978-79, 180 scholars were selected out of whom 135 scholars joined educational institutions in India. Scholarships were awarded in the fields of Agriculture, Engineer ing and Technology, Medicine, Pharmacy. Arts and Humanities. At present, 755 scholars from various countries are studying in India under the scheme. Scholarships and Fellowships for Nationals oi Bangladesh Under the scheme of assistance to Bangladesh in operation since 1972-73, the Government of India provide facilities to Bangladesh nationals for study in certain specialised subjects in India. Against the offer of 100 scholarships for 1978-79, 54 scholars have joined educational institutions in India. Presently there are 156 scholars from Bangladesh studying in various educational institutions in India in the fields of Medicine, Engi neering and Technology, Agriculture, Fine Arts and Sports. Special English Course for Foreign Students The Ministry of Education and Social Welfare organises a: special English course annually for such foreign students as are not sufficiently proficient in English. The last such course wa(s conducted at the Regional Institute of English, Chandigarh, from March to June. 1978. 29 scholars selected Under the General Cultural Scholarships Scheme, 1978-79 took advantage of this course besides a large number oi foreign self-supporting students who also attended this course. Scholarships for Foreign Students for Study/training in India (a) Indo-A .R.E. Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Six scholars came to India. One of them has returned. (b) Indo-Traqi Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Three scholars came to India. Two have returned. (c) Indo-Soviet Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Ten Scholars are pursuing studies in India. (d) Commonwealth Education Cooperation Plan ( Training of Craft Instructors, 1978-79) : Nine scholars are undergoing training under this scheme. (e) Commonwealth Scholarship/Fellowships Plan, 1978-79 : 19 Scholars from different Commonwealth countries have joined their institutions. 105 (f) Indo-FRG Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Three scholars are studying in India. (g) Indo-French Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : 8 scholars are studying in India. (h) Indo-Senegalese Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Three scholars are studying in India. (i) Reciprocal Scholarships Scheme, 1978-79 : One scholar is pursuing studies in India. (j) Indo-Afghan Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Tec scholars came to India. Two of them have gone back. (k) Indo-Polish Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Three scholars are studying in India. (1) Indo-Yugoslav Cultural Exchange Programme, 1978-79 : Two scholars are studying in India. (m ) T.C.S. Colombo Plan, 1978-79 : 45 trainees have joined institutions to pursue their studies in India. (n) Special Commonwealth African Assistance Plan : 2 Scholars are studying in India. (o) Commonwealth Fund for Technical Cooperatbn : Under this scheme, this Ministry helped in arranging admissions of Zimbabwean and Namibian candidates on behalf of tlhe Ministry of Finance. Out of six candidates who desired to have pre-qualification courses, two were admitted. CHAPTER V BOOK PROMOTION AND COPYRIGHT With the expansion of educational facilities in the country, the demand for books has intensified both in terms of quality and quantity. Books in greater number as also books on various topics, have to be produced and made available to the public at moderate prices. With this in view, this Ministry h « ' taken several measures towards the production and piomouo:; of books. Some of the more important programmes undertaker in this regard are briefly described below : NATIONAL BOOK TRUST In furtherance of its objectives, the Trust has been bring ing out books in Indian languages as well as in English, covering a wide variety of topics in the fields of education, science, literature, art, philosophy, history and culture. The Trust has also been organising annual Book Fairs on a national basis and regional book exhibitions. Further, the Trust has been organising seminars, symposia, workshops and training courscs on problems connected with the writing, translation, publica tion, distribution and promotion of books, with the objective, inter alia, of encouraging publishing of language books in the country. Besides, the Trust has served the needs of the student population by subsidising the publication of a large number of books useful as text books or supplementary reading at the University level. The bulk of the Trust’s publishing programme is in the following series : India—the Land and the People, National Biography, Popular Science, World of Today, Folklore of India and Young India Library, besides a number of books of general nature outside such series. The Trust has made a beginning by publishing, in collaboration with the Adult Edu cation Directorate, some books meant for neo-literates in a few Indian languages. During 1978-79 the Trust has so far, i.e. till December, 1978 brought out 42 titles bringing the total number of publications so far brought out to 862. a large 106 107 majority of them in Hindi and Indian languages. The Trust is now more determined than ever before to make a serious effort to locate new authors who could write in their res pective languages, original books on several specific areas of human knowledge and endeavour with special reference to the Indian context. During the remaining period of the year, the Trust proposes to bring out 50 more titles. The Trust has so far organised 9 National Book Fairs in important metropolitan centres of India. The Ninth National! Book Fair held at Bangalore from 29th December, 1978 to 7th January. 1979. was the largest ever National Book Fair Over 200 publishers and booksellers from the public and private sectors participated in the Fair. The Fair, for the first time, exhibited books of interest to neo-literates. Another special feature of the Fair was a colourful exhibition of select books for children, which was organised in the context of the Interna tional Year of the Child. The Trust has also organised 80 regional book exhibitions so far and proposes to organise 5 regional exhibitions and regional book fairs during the year. As part of its programme of holding seminars on the theme of ‘Publishing in the Next Decade’ the Trust during the year organised four seminars on publishing in Telugu, Marathi- Assamese and Oriya languages. The Trust proposes to organise one more seminar during the remaining period. In addition the Trust has been implementing the special projects, namely, the Aadan-Pradan Programme and the Nehru Bal Pustakalaya, related to national integration and providing communication channels on an inter-regional and inter-linguistic basis by the translation of outstanding books in one language into other Indian languages. (a) Aadan Pradan Under this project, ten outstanding books from 12 major Indian languages, are translated and published in all th; other 11 languages, so that the readers of one linguistic region under stand and appreciate the way of life and creative works of other regions and thus promote inter-regional understanding. During 1978-79, till the end of December 1978, 20 titles have been brought out, bringing the total number of titles brought out under the Scheme to 406. During the remaining period of the year, 25 more titles are expected to be brought out. 108 ( b ) Nehru Bal Pustakalaya Under this Scheme, the Trust brings out attractively designed and illustrated supplementary reading material for children, with national integration as the underlying idea. During the year so far, till December, 1978, 13 titles have been published bringing the total number to 520 titles, 13 more titles arc expectcd to be completed by March 1979. The Trust has taken several steps to improve its sales per formance. Some of the corrective measures taken by the Trust in the recent past are diversification of their sales outlets all over the country and appointment of field representatives to work in specific areals. The Trust also opened a Book Shop in New Delhi and a Book Centre each at Hyderabad and Calcutta. The open ing of more Book Centres is under active consideration Besides the Trust is intensifying its publicity campaign. As a result of various measures taken it is expected that the sales performance during the current year will be better than that of 1977-78. Even during 1977-78 the value of the sales of Trust’s publications was nearly Rs. 26 lakhs which was almost double that of the sales figures of 1973-74. Scheme of Subsidised Publication of University Level Books in English During IQ78-7*5. till the end of December- 1978, the publica tion of 24 books has been subsidised, bringing the total number of books subsidised under the Scheme, to 259. Abou; 40 more books are expected' to be brought out under the Scheme during the remaining period of the current year. The Scheme is being implemented in such a manner as to ensure that only such books which primarily meet the educational needs of the students are subsidised. The Scheme is also being so modified in, that priority is given to books in subject areas where there arc gaps, ft is also proposed to frame panels of experts to identify the subject areas where either there is an acute shortage of standard books or where books available are highlv priced and are therefore beyond the reach of the average student. Publication of Low-Priced Editions of University Level Books of Foreign Origin With the objective of making available to our university students, low priced editions of standard university books and 109 reference material of foreign origin, three programmes are being operated in collaboration with Governments of the UK (English Language Book Society Series, since 1960), the USA (Joint Indo-American Standard Works Programme, since 1961) and the USSR (Indo-Soviet Text-book Programme, since 1965). The books brought out under all the three programmes are approved by the Government of India in consultation with expert agencies such as UGC, the ICAR, the DGHS etc. Apart from their suitability, the books selected have to meet the test that comparable books by Indian authors are not available. Only the latest editions of the selected titles are taken up for publication under these programmes. While under the UK and the USSR Programmes, the selected books are published in the respective countries and imported into and marketed in India through the normal trade channels, under the Indo-American Standard Works Program me, the selected books are published in India in low-priced editions by Indian publishers with a suitable subsidy from the USIS and marketed through the normal trade channels. The prices of the books reprinted under these programmes are l/3rd to 1 [5th of the original standard editions. So far about 680 British, 1600 American and 320 Soviet titles have been brought out under these programmes. Moves are also afoot to have consultations with the Govern ments of the GDR, FRG, Poland and Hungary for developing similar translation and publication programmes. As part of the Indo-Soviet Text-book Programme, a scheme of award of scholarships is being implemented since 1970-71, in order to augment the facilities for translation of Russian univesity level books in various subject fields into English/ Indian languages for use of Indian students. Under this scheme, scholarships are annually awarded to about 5 Indian scholars in different disciplines to enable them to rcceive training in the USSR in translation techniques. So far, 27 Indian scholars have received the training. With the help of two of these scholars, 2 Soviet Technical books have been got translated into English which the Soviet authorities have agreed to sui tably edit and publish in the USSR under the Indo-Soviet Prog ramme. They are expected to be published shortly- Preliminary selection of Indian scholars have been made for the award of scholarships for 1978-79. 110 The Indo-Soviet Text-book Board was set up in 1965, with ihe Union Education Secretary as Chairman and five members each from the Soviet and Indian sides, to lay down the broad policy for the implementation of Indo-Soviet Programme and to monitor its progress. The Board held its tenth meeting at New Delhi in January, 1978. Procurement of Translation Rights As part of their programmes to produce Universi'y-levci books in Indian languages, the State Governments have beer bringing out translations into Indian languages of suitable foreign books. To facilitate the work of obtaining translation rights from foreign copyright owners in regard to books select ed by the State Governments and to provide co-ordination, the Copyright licences are negotiated centrally on behalf of the State Governments. During 1978-79, 17 contracts for translation rights were executed, bringing the total 1*!46 con tracts with the American, British and other foreign publishers. National Book Development Board The National Book Development Board was set up in 1967. and reconstituted in 1970, as an advisory body to lav clown the guidelines for the development of the Indian book industry and trade in the context of the overall requirements of the country. The Board has not yet been reconstituted. However, the implementation of the various recommenda tions made by the Board earlier, is being pursued. IMPORT AND EXPORT OF BOOKS Import policy for Books The Import Policy for all items is announced by the Department of Commerce every year. As far as the Import Policy for books, journals, magazines, children’s l:terature and other teaching materials is concerned, the Policy' is for mulated in consultation with this Ministry. During the year 1978-79, the Import Policy for books etc. was substantially rationalised and liberalised, and consi- I l l dcrable simplification of the procedures was also effected. In keeping with the spirit of free flow of information and knowle dge, import of Educational, Scientific and Technical bocks and journals, News-magazines and Newspapers was placed on the Open General Licence and all persons were allowed to import these items without the necessity of an import licence. This facility was subject to the condition that for importing more than 2000 copies of a single title, permission of this Ministry was required. Import of foreign editions of books for which the latest editions of Indian reprints are available were not allowed. These restrictions were imposed in the interest of the development of the indigenous book industry. Books, magazines and journals containing pornographic material or depicting sex, violence etc. were also not allowed for import. Recognised educational, scientific, technical and research institutions etc., were allowed to import specified categories of teaching-aids under the Open General Licence. In the previous year import licences were divided into several categories like basic quota, supplementary licence and additional supplementary licence and so were the importers e.g. established importers, newcomers and actual users. These distinctions were done away with and dealers in books whose purchase turn-over during 1977-78 was Rs. 3 lakhs or more were made eligible to apply for the grant of import licences on the basis of 10 per cent of their purchase turn-over. Import of books other than those covered by the Open General Licence, fiction, non-technical magazines, Children books and teaching adds were allowed for import under the import licences. The importers were free to import any of these categories of books without any percentage restriction as applicable previously. Recognised schools, colleges and libra ries were also allowed to apply for the grant of import licence for the import of books not covered under the Open General Licence up to a value of Rs. 10.000 per year per institution- Such licences were valid for the import of the same type of books and other items as that set down for dealers under the licences. The concession for the release of post parcels contain ing books, magazines and periodicals without the importers having to produce the import licence continued to be available during 1978-79. The State Trading Corporation continued to assise the universities and other institutions of higher learning for 112 arranging the import of scientific and technical journals required for their use. Book Export Promotional Activities India as one of the leading publishing countries in the world- has a growing potential for exporting books net only to the established markets like the UK and the USA but :o new markets in South East, West Asia and Africa. During 1978-79, India participated' in the Festival of Book and Book Fair, Singapore from 26th August—4th September, 1978, International Book Fair, Frankfurt from 18—23 October, 1978, and the International Book Fair held in Cairo in January/ February 1979. Books were sent for display in the Second Book Fair, Amman in April, 1978; Best Designed Books, Leipzig from 3—24 September, 1978; Commonwealth Book Fair, London from September to December, 1978; International Book- Fair, Belgrade from 3—8 November, 1978; International Children’s Book Exhibition, Ankara from 3— 10 November, 1978; National Book Exhibition. Accra from 13— 19 Novem ber, 1978. Special Exhibitions of Indian books were organised with the assistance of Indian Missions abroad in Sri Lanka from 2—9 May, 1978; Thailand from 28—30 July, 1978; Kuala Lumpur from September 11— 16, 1978; London from 2n—30 October, 1978; Ankara 20—29 December, 1978. Tt is also proposed to organise special exhibitions in Kenya, Tanzania, Mauritius, Iraq and special exhibitions in Bangladesh during January—March, 1979. With a view to promoting export of books and publications, the Ministry continued to obtain market survey reports through Indian Missions abroad which were circulated among the various publishers and book-sellers through their Federations. With a view to apprising foreign importers about the latest books pub lished in India, the Federation of Publishers and Book-sellers’ Association were assisted for bringing out a journal “Recent Indian Books”. 113 RAJA RAMMOHUN ROY NATIONAL EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES CENTRE The Centre continued to organise, exhibitions of university level books at different university centres, in order to bring to the notice of the university community the availability of univer sity level books published in the country- During 1978-79, till December, 1978, the Centre organised one such exhibition, at the Madurai University. Jt proposes to organise another exhibition at Sambalpur University- The Centre 'also brings out periodically, annotated catalogue of Low-priced publications and Core Books. During 1978-79, the Centre brought out one combined issue (con sisting of 4 numbers) of the Annotated Catalogue and proposes to bring out another issue during the remaining period. The Cenirc arranges pane! meetings of subject experts for evaluation on Indian authored university level books. The books considered suitable by the experts are brought to the notice of the universities, etc. so that they eould increasingly use the indi genous books instead of imported books. The assessments of the books by subject experts are also brought to the notice of the publishers concerned so that they may improve the quality of their books on the basis of the reports of the subject experts. During 1978-79, tiil December 1978, the Centre has convened 5 panel meetings of subject experts which considered 58 books in English, Hindi and Tamil in different disciplines like Econo mics, History, Agriculture and Chemistry. Particulars of about 44 of these books, which were found to be standard, have been circulated to the universities, etc. The Federation of Publishers and Book-sellers Associations in India compiled a National Catalogue of University-level Books covering the books published indigenously during 1965-70, with financial assistance from the Ministry of Education. The Centre is entrusted with the responsibility of keeping this Catalogue up- to-date by bringing out quarterly supplements. From 1971, so far, till December 1978, the Centre has brought out 31 supple ments, and is engaged in bringing out a cumulative volume of all the supplements. One more supplement is expected to be com piled before the end of the year. The Centre undertakes on or in anticipation of demand, com pilation of bibliographies on topics of interest to authors and publishers of university level books. During the year 1978-79, the Centre brought out one issue, the fifth, of Annotated Guide to Periodical Literature on Book Industries- 114 With the object of finding out the subject fields and titles of books which are being imported into the country in large quanti ties, so that measures could be taken to encourage Indian author ship and indigenous publishing for local production in those fields or alternatively explore possibilities of getting those books reprinted in India, the Centre has, in the first instance, undertaken analysis of titles of which 200 or more copies were imported by S leading book importers. An interim report on the survey of such imports during 1975-76 was brought out in June 1977, which was taken up with UGC, NCERT, the publishers federations, etc. to explore possibilities of indigenous preparation of books on those subjects or alternatively negotiate for reprinting such books in India. The Centre has now completed the analysis of titles of which 200 or more copies were imported during 1976-77 by those same 8 large scale book importers and the report on the analysis is ready for similar follow up action. The Centre has also undertaken analysis of the indents/in voices of book imports during 1975-76 by all the leading impor ters (about 35) who imported books worth Rs. 10 lakhs or more. After the analysis of the documents from about 16 importers, the Centre has prepared about 45,000 master cards giving coded bibliographical details for each of the titles imported, and sent the cards for computerization. About 20,000 more master cards covering a few more importers are expected to be prepared and sent for computerization during the remaining period of the current financial year. Further, the Centre has been designated as the National agency to operate the International Standard Book Numbering System in India. The Centre is taking preliminary action to address the publishers in India to collect relevant data for operat ing the ISBN System. COPYRIGHT Copyright Office The Copyright Board, reconstituted with effect from 24th September, 1976, in pursuance of Section 11 of the Copyright Act, 1957 (14 of 1957), with Justice Hardayal Hardy, retired Chief Justice, Delhi High Court, as its Chairman, held four meetings during the year 1978, heard 38 cases and decided 15 cases. During the year 1978, 3,622 works were registered in the Copyright Office for Copyright, out of which 3,147 wen artistic 115 and 475 literary works. In addition, changes in the Register of Copyrights were registered for 49 works. India participated in the meetings of the (a) WIPO Budget Committee, (b) Committee of Governmental Experts on the Double Taxation of Copyright Royalties remitted from one country to another, (c) WIPO Sub-Committee to consider the problems relating to Cable Transmission of T. V. Programmes, and (d) Governing Bodies of WIPO and the Unions administered by WIPO. India also proposes to participate in the meetings of the (a) Executive Committee of the Berne Union, and (b) WIPO Per manent Committee for Development Co-operation related to Copyright and Neighbouring Rights, to be held during the re maining period of the year. Regional Seminar on Copyright and Neighbouring Rights for Asian and Pacific States and Territories At the invitation of Government of India, UNESCO and WIPO jointly organised a Regional Seminar on Copyright and Neighbouring Rights for Asian "and Pacific States and Territories at New Delhi from December, 18-22, 1978. The Seminar was attended by 15 countries from the region. In addition a number of international non-governmental organisations like the Interna tional Federation of Producers of Phonograms and Videograms (IFPI). International Publishers Association (IPA), Confedera tion of Societies of Authors and Composers (CISAC). etc. also attended the Seminar through observers. Kenya. Libya and Nigeria also deputed observers to attend the Seminar. India was elected unanimously as the Chairman of the Seminar. The Seminar was inaugurated by the Minister for Education, Social Welfare and Culture. Smt. Renuka Devi Barkataki. Minister of State in the Ministry of Education. Social Welfare and Culture, gave the concluding address at the Seminar. One of the main recommendations made at the Seminar was that the Copyright holders in the developed countries should oflfer translation and reproduction rights of their works to developing countries on easy terms. The Seminar also recommended ap propriate amendments in national legislations for the protection of Copyright and Neighbouring Rights through suitable penal ;and civil provisions. The Seminar further recommended the set ting up of ‘Good offices Committee’ of authors and publishers to promote mutual understanding between them. 116 FSW/78— 9 116 National Convention of Authors With a view to encouraging Indian authorship, this Ministry sanctioned a suitable grant to the Authors Guild of India to enable them to organise the Fifth National Convention of India Authors. at Trivandrum in December 1978. Workshop for Afro-Asian Writers This Ministry sanctioned a suitable grant to the India Inter national Centre in order to enable them to organise a workshop for Arfo Asian Writers at the Centre in February 1979. CHAPTER VI YOUTH SERVICES The Youth Services Bureau of the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare have been implementing systematically pro grammes catering to the need and development of the student and non-student youth. The National Youth Board was recon stituted during the year. The Board which has undertaken a critical review of the programmes for the welfare of student and non-student youth will advise the government on the formula tion of a National Youth Policy. National Service Schcmc During the year 1978-79, the National Service Scheme was continued in colleges and universities with the same objective with emphasis on bringing the students closer to the community and to enable them to contribute towards national development. The response to NSS programme continues to be encouraging and it is now in operation in all the States and universities. The cover age is likely to reach the figure of 4 lakh students at the end of current year. A Review Group was set up to review the Scheme The Review Group was of the view that the performance under the Scheme was good and it was desirable to strengthen the pro gramme and expand it further. The Review Group while reite rating the objectives of the NSS viz inculcating a sense of social consciousness and dignity of labour amongst the students and developing their personality, also emphasised that this Scheme should provide them an opportunity to discharge their social obligation towards the community. Th; NSS students did commendable work in the wake of floods in different parts of the country. Their contribution to flood relief in Delhi, Bihar, Orissa, West Bengal and Uttar Pra desh was acclaimed by the press and public alike. During the year under report, NSS personnel-teachers, students as well as the supervisory staff-gave high priority to the involvement of students in National Adult Education Programme. In this effort :he NSS personnel are working closely with those 1 1 7 118 responsible for organisation of various activities under National Adult Education Programme. National Service Volunteer Scheme The National Service Volunteer Scheme which was started ir 1977-78 continued in its second year with about 450 volun teers who have been deployed with 130 Nehru Y'uvak Kendras aid over 30 volunteer agencies. The volunteers are working mainly in the field of adult education with these agencies. While tie voluntary agencies have the discretion in deploying them in aiy activity of adult education, a uniform pattern of work has teen evolved for the volunteers deployed with the Nehru Yuvak Kendras. Each volunteer is expected to set up 15 to 20 Chetna Janghs. A Chetna' Sangh is a method of organising youth bet- vecn the age-group of 15 to 35 for activities like adult cduca- ton, sports and recreation, Cultural activities, adventure program mes etc. It is intended to be an instrument for organised action fir development. Each Chetna Sangh has an organiser who is pven an honorarium of Rs. 50 per month. The work of the crganiscrs is supervised by the National Service Volunteer who i- paid a stipend of Rs. 175 per month. The volunteers, be- jire taking the work in the field, are given one month's intensive raining. Manning Forums Initiated by the Planning Commission in 1955 and transfer red to the Ministry of Education in 1968, the Scheme of Planti ng Forums aims at developing the consciousness regarding plan ted development of the country among the educated youth and hrough them among the general public. The Planning Forums lumbering about 1000, orga-nise various programmes like senii- lars, debates, discussions, plan information centres abotot plann- ng process and development. It has been decided that from 979-80. the implementation of the Scheme be taken over by he University Grants Commission. Vational Integration Samitis The object of the Scheme is to familiarise the students and eachers with the diverse perspectives of our composite culture md civilisation and to undertake activities which would eradicate jommunalism in all its forms and to take such other steps as vould directly promote the cause of National Integration. About 130 Samitis had been functioning in universities and affiliated .colleges. The implementation of this Schemc has been taen over by the University Grants Commission from 1978-79. Nehru Yuvak Kendras The schcme of Nehru Yuvak Kendra was continued in 19'S- 79 with the same objective of organising Non-student Youtlin constructive activities. Out of 255 sanctioned Kendras, iver 185 Kendras have become operational and are functioning in all the states. The scheme continues to be fully financed by the Central Government. In the current year, a one-week seminar in the context of National Adult Education Programme for the Youth Coord i a- tors for the Southern St-ates at Hyderabad; and a one-week k- fresher Training Course at Udaipur were organised. A cie- month Orientation Training Programme is proposed to be orga nised in March 1979 at Udaipur. The Scheme of Nehru Yuvak Kendras was reviewed b' a Review Group which had representatives from State Govcrnmets, Voluntary Organisations. Planning Commission and Youth Cor- dinators. The Group was of the view, that on the basis o 5 years’ experience of the implementation of the scheme, there as been ample evidence to show that Nehru Yuvak Kendras re characterised by vitality and in ventiveness and the autonomy of the Kendras should be continued to be maintained. The Grup however felt that there is need for grcaler conccptual clarity or evolving a system. It also telt that move emphasis for the n- volvement of women and youth belonging to the weaker sectins of the societv in the activities of the Nehru Yuvak Kendras shold be given. All the activities of the Nehru Yuvak Kencfras— Ault education, vocational training, social service, sports and phys;al activities, cultural programmes etc. should be taken lip in an integrated manner to create awareness amongst the youth ancto develop leadership amongst this section of the youth, 'he Government has accepted the recommendations of the Rcvw Group. It has been decided that during the current plan per>d the schemc would continue to be a Central Schcme. Howc:r, after the expiry of this plan period, the scheme may be trns- ferred to the State Governments. Financial Assistance to Voluntary Organisations working in he field of Youth This scheme has been evolved to provide a frame-work or Voluntary Organisations to involve youth for dcvelopmetal 1 2 0 activities specially in the rural areas. It is designed to promote involvement of youth 011 a full time basis for undertaking pro grammes of rural development, educational developmental activi ties in urban slums, promotion of plastic, graphic and folk arts, and mass media'. This scheme aims at larger involvement of voluntaiy agencies in the implementation of youth programmes viz. to impart training in skills to non-student youth with a view to improving their functional capacities for full time employment, sell-employment or subsidiary employment. It is also designed for training of young persons who ca'n act as catalysts to bring out social change. Registered Societies, public trusts and non profit companies are eligible for assistance 'under the scheme. This scheme was revised in 1978 incorporating essential features of the scheme of establishment of work centres which has been discontinued from 1978-79. The scheme of Youth Leadership Training Programmes has also been merged with this scheme. About 30 organisations have been extended assistance totalling about Rs. 11 lakhs up to the end of December 1978, under the scheme. Commonwealth Youth Programme India continued to participate in this programme and made the annual contribution to the Commonwealth Youth Programme of Rs. 5.00 lakhs—50?<" in foreign exchange and 50 per cent in Indian currency. The Youth Development Centre, with an Indian Director, continued to organise basic training for the youth of Asia— South Pa'citic region. Scouting and Guiding Central Government is encouraging Scouting and Guiding in the shape of organisational and administrative grants and gra'nt- in-aid for training camps, rallies, jumborees etc. conducted by the Bharat Scouts and Guides and All India Boy Scouts Associa tion. Scouting and Guiding, which is an international movement, is aimed at developing the character of bovs and gills to make them 2ood citizens by inculcating in them a spirit of lovalty, patriotism and thoughtfulness for others. Scouting and Guid ing aho promotes balanced physical and mental development of boys and girls. Social service and community welfare work is an important aspect of this movement. 121 Programmes for Promotion of National Integration A Review Group was appointed to study the various as pects for promotion of National Integration. On the basis of the deliberations of this Group the Scheme for Programmes for Promotion of National Integration has been formulated. The Scheme of Programmes for Promotion of National In tegration has two basic aims : (ij to facilitate visit of youth living and working in the border states to states with marked cultural difference and an exchange visit by youth of those states to the border states in order to promote greater understanding of historical and cultural heritage of the country, of the problems being faced by the people of different regions and of the environ ment. social customs etc. in different parts of the country, (ii) the scheme also provides for financial assistance to voluntary agencies which are engaged in creation of public opinion against forces promoting disintegration, and organisation of social groups for action to serve the objective of national integration through camps, seminars, research and publication, cultural activities, exchange programmes etc. Under this scheme, teachers, students and non-student youth who are members of voluntary agencies, members of peasants and workers organisations, recognised edu cational institutions, registered voluntary organisations. Nehru Yuvak Kendras and State Governments/Union Territory Adminis trations are eligible for provision of financial assistance. Up to the end of December 1978. assistance totalling about Rs. 1 lakh was sanctioned to 10 organisations unjer this programme. Schcme for Promotion of Adventure The scheme of Promotion of Adventure aims at encouraging the spirit of adventure, risk-taking, cooperative team work, capa city of ready and vital response to challenging situations and endurance amongst the youth of the country. In this process it is expected that youth would become familiar with the rich heritage of flora and fauna of the country and develop well- balanced personality and character. This Scheme was reviewed by a Review Group appointed by the Ministry and has been revised in the current year. Under this Scheme financial assis tance is given for undertaking programmes such as mountaineer ing, trekking hiking, exploration for collection of data, study of flora and fauna in the mountain, forest, desert and sea’ with emphasis on conservation, canoeing, coastal sailing, raft expedi tions. swimming, skiing, cycling, motorcycling, ice skating etc. Assistance is provided for training in the above activities as well 122 as for establishment and development of institutions, camp sites and base camps to facilitate adventure activities. Under this scheme individuals, mountaineering institutes, educational institutions, registered voluntary organisations, Nehru Yuvak Kendras and State Governments/Union Territory Administrations are eligible to get assistance. In addition, financial assistance is given re gularly to the Himalayan Mountaineering Institute, Darjeeling. Up to the end of December 1978, assistance totalling Rs. 9 00 lakhs was sanctioned to about 75 institutions/groups under this scheme. CHAPTER VII PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND SPORTS Sports Policy and Programme The National Policy on Education as adopted by Parlia ment in 1968 lays down the following in respect of games and sports : “Games and Sports Games and Sports should be developed on a large scale with the object of improving the physical fitness and sportsmanship of the average student as well as those who excel in this depart ment. Where playing fields and other facilities for developing a nation-wide programme of Physical Education do not exist they should be provided on a priority basis". Within the broad frame-work of the existing National Policy on Education enunciated above, the Government of India have been taking various steps to promote and develop physical education and sports in the country, both among the educational institutions and amongst the non-student youth. The Govern ment’s policy in this behalf keeps in view the complementary nature of broad-based mass physical and sports activity on the one hand and the competitive sports aimed at cxcellencc and high achievement on the other. In the existing programme undertaken by the Central Govern ment the thrust has been on broad-basing of sports and physical fitness activities particularly in rural and tribal areas. Similarly, special attention is paid to the promotion of these activities among girls and women. Simultaneously, sports talent is spotted among boys and girls at a very young age and adequate encouragement and facilities provided to them to nurture their talent; achieve excellence in different sports and bring glory to the country in the international sports competitions. The other salient features of the sports policy are making physical education, sports and games compulsory at school stage, providing physical facilities like play- 123 124 lkl.Js, stadia, swimming pools ctc., where such facilities do not exis>t, establishing rural sports centres, preserving open spaces, particularly in urban areas, giving incentives to promising sports men and sportswomen, giving prefercncc to such games and sports as arc popular in a particular area and are inexpensive. The National Policy on Sports is being given a fresh look hi consulta tion with the All India Council of Sports who have set up a Sub-Committee specially for this purpose. During the year the Central programme of Physical Education and Sports, in the context of the above enunciated policy, conti nued to be pursued. Further, the Central Schemes were reviewed by a Working Group which was constituted by the Government for formulation of Central Schemes of Physical Education and Sports for inclusion in the Sixth Five Year Plan. All the existing schemes have been recommended by the Working Group for continuation during the Sixth Plan period with some suitable modifications to make their scope more broad-based and their implementation more effective. In view of limitation of funds available for the Sixth Plan programmes in the field of Physical Education and Sports it has not been possible to take up any of the new important schemes recommended by the Working Group. All India Council of Sports The All India Council of Sports, which has been set up by the Government of India to advise it on matters relating to promotion of sports and games, was reconstituted to make it more func tional and effective. The 21 member reconstituted Council, with a three year term, now headed by Field Marshal S.H.F.J. Manek- show. consists of 6 sports promoters, 2 sports writers/commenta tors, 2 educationists, 3 Members of Parliament and 5 representa tives of States Sports Councils from different regions. After its reconstitution in July, 1978 the Council has been meeting quite frequently and has so far held 3 meetings and its Executive Committee six meetings. Society for the National Institutes of Physical Education and Sports (SNIPES) The Socictv for the National Institutes of Physical Education and Sports (SNIPES) was set up by the Government of India in 1965. as an autonomous body, to carry on the management and administration of 'he two national institutes of physical education and sports, namely, the Lakshmibai National College of Physical 125 Education, Gwalior and the Netaji Subhas National Institute ot Sports, Patiala and to take steps for raising standard of games and sports in the country by improving facilities and standards of training and coaching in sports and games. The SNIPES has also been entrusted with advisory functions at national level in matters relating to promotion of physical education and Yoga. The Society was last reconstituted in 1976 for a period of 3 years. Dr. Amrik Singh, Vice Chancellor Punjabi University, took over as Chairman of the Society in June, 1978 vice Shri Sikander Bakht, Union Minister of Works and Housing, Supply and Rehabilitation. During the year the Society held 3 meetings. A. PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND YOGA Lakshmibai National College of Physical Education, Gwalior The primary function of the College, which is one of the two national institutes established by the Government of India in the field of Physical Education and Sports, is to produce high calibre leadership in the field of physical education. For the academic session 1978-79, with the admission of 105 students (including 24 women) to the Bachelor of Physical Education Course and 34 ('including 4 women) to the 2-year Master Degree Course, the to tal studcnt-strength in the Regular and Residential Courses at the College was 418 (including 91 women). Besides this, the College admitted 30 students to the first year of its 3-year Master Degree Summer Course in Physical Education for the inservice personnel. The College continues to attract students from all parts of the country including a few from abroad. From the 1979-80 acade mic year, the College is also planning to introduce M. Phil. Course in physical education. Besides its teacher-training prog ramme. the College also offers extension services and refresher courses for the inservice personnel. Beside these, it continued to implement on agency basis the Central Scheme of National Phy sical Efficiency Drive and National Prize Competition for publish ed Literature on Physical Education and Sports on behalf of the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare. Since its establishment in 1957 till the Academic Year 1977-78, the College has produced 1393 graduates and 319 post graduates in physical education. National Physical Efficiency Drive The scheme, which was introduced by the Central Govern ment in 1959 to popularise among the people the concept of 126 physical fitness and also to arouse their enthusiasm for higher standards of physical efficiency and achievement, continued to be implemented during the year in collaboration with the State Gcv- ernments/Union Territory Administrations and certain selected Central agencies. The Luksiimibai National College of Physical Education continued to function as the central agency for the implementation of the scheme. The 1977-78 National Physical Efficiency Drive for which results have since become available, had a total participation of about 20 lakhs out of which about 6.80 lakhs participants were declared winners. The XVIII All India Competition for National Awards in Physical Efficiency vvus held at Kolhapur (Maharash tra) from the 28th February to 2nd March, 1978. On the basis of the data collected by the Lakshmibai National College of Physical Education the revised national norms of physical efficiency for the scheme have since been finalised and the same are proposed to be adopted from the 1979-80 Drive. Promotion of Yoga The Scheme of promotion of Yoga, as a part of the overall programme of the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare for development of physical education and sports, continued to be implemented during the year. The Kaivalyadham Shreeman Madhav Yoga Mandir Samiti, Lonavala (Poona) continued to get financial assistance for its maintenance and development expenditure as per the approved pattern of the Scheme for its teacher training and research programmes. B. SPORTS AND GAMES Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala The Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala established by the Government of Tndia in 1961, along with its South Centre located at Bangalore (established in 1975), has been entrusted with the responsibility of providing high calibre coaches in various sports disciplines and also to implement the National Coaching Scheme through the country-wide net work of Regional Sports Coaching Centres. 127 The Institute offers following training courscs: (i) 10 month Regular Diploma Course ; (ii) 6 month Condensed Diploma Course ; (iii) 6 week Certificate in Sports Course ; and (iv) Refresher Course for inscrvicc coaches. For the Academic Session 1978-79, 464 trainees, including 15 foreign trainees, were admitted to the Regular and Con densed courses at Patiala and Bangalore in 17 sports disciplines. Since Its inception in 1961 the Institute has so far produced 4021 qualified coaches, including 82 belonging to foreign countries, in various sports disciplines. Besides its regular coaching programme the Institute also organised a Certificate Course in Sports simultaneously at Patiala, Bangalore, Gwalior and Delhi for about 670 teachers and others. Under the National Coaching Scheme the Institute has now an authorised cadre-strength of 500 coaches out of which 460 are already in positions spread all over the country. The remaining 40 vacant posts are also expected to be filled-up shortly and 50 more coachcs are expected to be added to the cadre during 1979-80. The Institute organised 44 National Coaching Camps during the year mainly to prepare the national teams for participation in the Commonwealth Games as well as the VIII Asian Games held during 1978. The International Olympic Solidiarity Courscs in Swimming, Weightlifting, Handball and Archery are expected to be organised by the end of the year 1978-79. In collaboration with the State Sports Councils and Nehru Yuvak Kendras, the Regional Sports Coaching Centres of the Institute continued to function at Gauhati, Patna, Madras, Hyderabad, Trivandrum, Jullunder, Delhi, Bangalore, Jaipur, Meerut, Bhopal, Gandhi Nagar, Nagpur, Jammu and Srinagar, Imphal, Panaji, Port-Blair, Agartala, Chandigarh, Gangtok, Mandi, Nahan, Calcutta and Lakshswadeep. During the year 5 coachcs of the Institute were sent on foreign assignments to Nigeria, Mauritius and Afghanistan under the Bilateral Cultural Exchange Programmes. Besides these, 4 coaches have been sent abroad for training. 128 Grants to Siate Sports Councils for Promotion of Sports and Physical Education Grants amounting to about Rs. 30 lakhs were released to the State Sports Councils in States and Union Territories during the year 1978-79 in consultation with and on the recommendation of the All India Council of Sports'. These grants were given for following purposes :— (i) 8 Coaching Camps at State level ; (ii) establishment/maintenance of 388 Rural Sports Centres ; (iii) purchase of sports equipment of non-expendable nature worth Rs. 91,000/— ; (iv) development of 13 Play fields ; (v) (a) Construction/improvement of 28 Stadia ; (b) construction of 2 Swimming Pools. It has since been decided to enhance the Central assistance in the case of States located in hilly areas to 75 per cent of the approved expenditure on construction of Stadia/Swimming Pools but not exceeding Rs. 2.5 lakhs in each case. In case of other States Central assistance continues to be 50 per cent of the -approved expenditure limited to Rs. 1.00 lakh in each case. Grants to National Sports Federations During 1978-79 grants amounting to Rs. 20.50 lakhs were sanctioned to National Sports Federation for the following pur poses :— (i) Grant of passage cost to 14 National Sports Federa tions for sending teams abroad for participation in International events. (ii) Holding of coaching-camps at NSNIS, Patiala/Banga lore for preparing teams for participation in interna tional sports events abroad like World Cup (Hockey), Commonwealth Games and the Asian Games. (iii) Holding of 58 Annual Championships. 129 (iv) Receiving of sports teams from abroad and sending oi Indian Sports teams abroad. (v) Assistance to 16 National Sports Federations for pay ment of Salary of Paid Assistant Secretaries. In order to provide better and more nourishing diet to sportsmen/women who undergo coaching at NSNIS, Patiala or under its aegis elsewhere, Government have decided, on the recommendations of All India Council of Sports, to increase the rate of diet money per head per day from Rs. 12/- ?o Rs. 16/-. ' All India Rural Sports Tournament The countrywide programme of Rural Sports tournament lias been launched by the Central Government since 1970-71 with the twin object of involving a major segment of our youth in rural areas into the main stream of country’s sports activities and also to spot and nurture sports talent. The programme now involves a total annual participation of about 12 lakh rural youth right from the Block level up to the national level. The 9th All India Rural Sports Tournament was organised during 1978-79 in the following groups : i. Swimming New Delhi, May, 1978. ii. Athletics, Hockey Gumla (District Ranchi. Bihar) and Football October, 1978. iii. Kabaddi, Kho-Kho Vijawada (Andhra Pradesh), Wrestling and January, 1979. Archery iv. Football, Volleyball, Cuttack (Orissa), February, and Gymnastics 1979. W o m e n S p o r t s F e s t i v a l IV National Sports Festival for Women, 1979 The National Sports Festival for Women, first organised in 1975 as a part of the celebrations connected with the Inter 130 national Women Year, is now a significant annual feature of the country's sports calendar. It involves at present a partici pation of about 2,000 young women from all over the country. The Festival is organised by the Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports on behalf of the Government of India. The IV National Sports Festival for Women was held at Calcutta from 23rd to 27th January, 1979, in collaboration with the West Bengal State Sports Council. About 1600 Sports women hailing from 27 States & Union Territories took part in the Festival in the following sports disciplines :— Athletics, Basketball. Badminton, Gymnastics, Hockey Kabaddi, Kho-Kho, Lawn Tennis. Volley ball and Swimming. Sports Talent Search Scholarships The Scheme provides for award of scholarships through the Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala, to young bovs and girls at school stage talented in sports and showing promise and aptitude for sports selected on the basis of sports competitions at State/National Levels. During the year about 400 national-level and 800 state-level fresh scholarships each of the value of Rs. 900/- and Rs. 600/- per annum respectively were awarded to young boys and girls. In addition, about 150 national-level and 300 state-level scholarships awarded in the previous year were also renewed. National Sports Organisation The Scheme aims at improving the sports standards in colle ges and universities and helping the talented sportsmen/sports women to achieve excellence. Under the scheme assistance is given through the University Grants Commission, for construction of gymnasia, development of play-grounds etc. in universities' and colleges and through the Association of Indian Universities, for award of scholarships annually of the value of Rs. 1,000/ per annum per student to outstanding sportsmen/women in college and universities and also for holding coaching camps and sports competitions among universities. During 1978-79, a grant of Rs. 2.95 lakhs has been given to the Association of Indian Universities for sports scholarships, conducting Camps and 131 Spv(rts Competitions and of Rs. 15 lakhs to the University Grants Commission for construction and development of playfields and gymna.sia etc. in Universities and Colleges under the Scheme. With a view to reviewing the functioning of this scheme and also to suggest improvements therein, the All India Council of Sports had set up a committee which has since submitted its report to the Council. The Council has generally approved the recommendations made by the committee and has recommended that the Scheme of National Sports Organisation should be imple mented through the Association of Indian Universities except he part of the Scheme relating to award of sports scholarships which should be handled by the Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala who are already implementing the Scheme of Sports Talent Search Scholarships at the school level. The Council has directed the Committee to work out the estimates of expenditure that would be required in providing each of the 3,000 colleges and each of the 110 or so universities in the country, certain minimum facilities for physical education and sports. After these estimates have been received the same will be examined by Government along with the other recommenda tions of the Council on the suggestions contained in the Com m ittee’s Report. Arjuna Awards The Arjuna Award winners till recently were given a scroll as well as a bronze statuette. However, on the basis of the recommendations of the All India Council of Sports, the rules for the Arjuna Awards have been revised. According to the revised rules the Awards will be admissible for all the recognised sports disciplines and each awardee, in addition to a scroll and a statuette, will also be entitled to a scholarship at the rate of Rs. 200/- per month for a period of 2 years and free entry to witness any National/International match played in India. In the conditions for eligibility of these Awards emphasis has also been placed on high sense of discipline in addition to excellence in sports. The Awards will, starting from 1977-78, be given financial year wise. On the recommendation of the All India Council of Sports Government have selected 7 outstanding sportsmen and 3 sports women for grant of Arjuna Award in various sports disciplines for the year 1977-78. 16 ESW/78— 10 132 India’s Participation in International Sports Events Exchange of Sports teams between India and foreign count- tries during 1978-79 : (a) The Indian teams that participated in Sports events are following :— (i) Mohan Bagan Football Team to Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, Thailand for playing exhibition matches (May, 1978). (ii) Indian Chess Team to Indonesia, Malaysia and Iran to participate in the Asian Grand Masters Circuit Tournament, (June-September, 1978). (iii) Indian Golf Team (Ladies) to Nairobi to participate in Kenya Ladies’ Amateur Golf Championship (1978) (June 1978). (iv) Amateur Athletics Federation of India’s Team to Czechoslovakia to participate in the XVIII Golden Spiko of Europe and in the 19th Pravada Televize Slovanft in Barlislava (Czechoslovakia) (June, 1978). (v) Aero Club of India team to participate in FAI World Air Relay Championships in U.K. (August, 1978). (vi) All India Chess Federation Team to participate in the Men’s Zonal Tournament of Zone IX at Tehran (Iran) (August, 1978). (vii) Wrestling Federation of India’s Team to participate in the Wodd School Boys Festival at Albquerrque New Mexico, USA (August, 1978). (viii) Amateur Athletics Federation of India’s Team to participate in the 40th Singapore Amateur Athletics Association Track and Field Invitational Awards, 1978 at Karachi (September, 1978). (ix) The All India Football Federation Team to Bangla desh to participate in the XX Youth Football Tournament, 1978 (October, 1978). (x) The Yatching Association of India’s Team to partici pate in the Southern Asian Yatching Regatta VTI at Karachi (September, 1978). 133 (xi) Shri Ravi Kumar, Junior player of India Chess Federation of India to participate in the XVII World Junior Chess Championship at Graz, Austria (September, 1978) - (xii) The School Games Federation of India’s team to participate in the Asian Schools Football Championship at Sri Lanka, (August-September, 1978): (xiii) Indian Women Hockey team to Holland and France on way to Spain for participation in the III World Womens’ Hockey Cup tournament at Madrid. (September, 1978). (xiv) Motor Sports Club of India’s 13-member team to participate in the Sri Lanka Grand Prix (September, 1978). (xv) Shri R. K. Manchanda of Squash Racket Federation of India to Singapore, Kuala Lumpur and Manila to participate in the South East Asian Circuit (August-September, 1978). (xvi) The Board of Control for Cricket in India team to Pakistan for playing test-matches (September— November, 1978). (xvii) The Badminton Assiciation of India’s team to participate in the 1st National Inter-club Champion ship at Dacca, (Bangladesh) (October, 1978). (xviii) Shri Prakash Padukone of the Badminton Associa tion of India to London to participate in the Even of Champions Badminton Event (October 11, 1978). (xix) The Yatching Association of India’s team to Colombo to participate in the Inter-Trophy Regatta Annual Sailing Event between the ports of Madras and Colombo (September-October, 1978) • (xx) The Indian Airlines Sports Control Board’s Team to Washington to participate in the John F. Kennedy Memorial Internanional Field Hockey Champion ship, Washington (October, 1978). (xxi) The Indian Golf Union’s 5-member team fo Taiwan fo participate in the 1978 International 13 4 Amateur Golf Team Invitational Championships (October, 1978). b. Foreign Teams that participated in Sports events held in India during the year included the following :— (i) Sri Lanka Services Hockey Team to participate in the C. K. Naidu Memorial All India Hockey Tourna ment at Kovilpatti (May-June, 1978); (ii) Amateur Athletic Teams from Nepal, Bangladesh, Malaysia, Iran, Iraq, Pakistan and Kuwait to participate in the All India Open Athletics Tourna ment at Jullundur (Punjab) (May, 1978); (iii) Federal Republic of Germany, Basketball Team (Juniors) for friendly matches under the Indo-FRG Cultural Exchange Programme (May,1978); (iv) Volleyball team of the Racing Club-de-France for playing matches at Calicut, Hyderabad aud Delhi on the invitation of the Volleyball Federation (July- August, 1978) ; (v) The Austrailian and New Zealand Railways Golf teams to participate in the Golden Jubilee Year of Railway Sports Control Board Celebrations (November, 1978); (vi) Football teams from the USSR, Iran, North Korea, Brazil, Republic of China and Kuwait to participate in the Indian Football Association Shield tournament (August, 1978); (vii) Football teams from USSR, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Federal Republic of Germany and Burma1 to partici pate in the DCM Football Tournament (October- November, 1978); (viii) Billiards and Snookers teams from U.K., Canada and Sri Lanka to participate in the International Open Invitational Billiards and Snookers (1979) Tournament at Bombay (February, 1979); (ix) Pakistan Badminton team of 6 players to participate in the Thomas Cup contest 1978-79 (November, 1978). 1 35 X I Commonwealth Games (Edmonton) The Government cleared an Indian Contingent of 42 players and 13 officials and one doctor at Government expenditure to participate in the XI Commonwealth Games held at Edmonton (Canada) from the 3rd to 12th August, 1978. The Indian Contingent comprised sportsmen and women in the following disciplines : Athletics, Gymnastics, Swimming, Wrestling, Weightlif ting, Shooting, Cycling, Badminton and Boxing. The Indian contingent won 15 medals at these Games as detailed below : Gold 5 (3 in Wrestling and 1 in each in Badminton and Weightlifting). Silver 4 (3 in Wrestling and 1 in Weightlifting). Bronze 6 (3 in Wrestling and 1 each in Athletics, Badminton and Boxing). VIII Asian Games (Bangkok) The Government in consultation with the All India Council of Sports cleared the proposal of the Indian Olympic Associa tion to send an Indian Contingent of 167 members consisting of 140 competitors, 24 coaches and managers, 1 Chef-de-Mission, I Secretary-cum-Treasurer and 1 doctor for participation in the VIII Asian Games held at Bangkok from 8th to 20th Decem ber, 1978. The sports disciplines for which competitors were cleared were Athletics. Hockey, Boxing, Volleyball, Wrestling, Yachting, Football, Cycling, Shooting, Lawn Tennis, Badminton, Weightlifting and Archery. The Indian contingent has done creditably well by bagging II Gold, 11 Silver and 6 Bronze Medals which is an improve ment on India’s performance at the VII Asian Games held at Tehran in 1974 where India got 4 Golds, 12 Silver and 12 Bronze Medals. The Medal-tally of the Indian contingent at the VIII Asian Games was as under : Gold 11 (Athletics 8, Wrestling 2 and Shooting 1). Silver 11 (Athletics 7, Wrestling 1, Hockey 1, Boxing 1, Yatching 1). Bronze 6 (Athletics 3, Boxing 2, Tennis 1). 136 A 4-member Indian delegation led by Shri D. S. Gulshan, Minister of State in the Ministry of Education and Social Wel fare was deputed to attend the VIII Asian Games and to submit to Government report on the performance of the Indian contin- jent. The other Members of the delegation were :— (i) Shri M. R. Krishana, M.P., Member, All India Council of Sports. (ii) Shri A. S. Talwar, Deputy Secretary (Sports) Minis try of Education & S. W. The leader of the delegation, Shri Gulshan was also accom panied by has Private Secretary, Shri Bharpur Singh. IX Asian Games, 1982 The Government have approved the proposal of the Indian Olympic Association of hosting the IX Asian Games at New Delhi in 1982. The Asian Games Federation at its meeting held on the 18th December, 1978 at Bangkok unanimously reconfir med its decision to award the 1982 Asian Games to New Delhi. As per the estimates, organisation of the Asian Games is likely to involve a total expenditure of Rs. 21 crores excluding Rs. 6.80 crores to be spent by the Delhi Administration, New Delhi Municipal Committee, Delhi Municipal Corporation, Delhi Development Authority and other bodies put together, on the development of sports facilities to be made available for use in Asian Games 1982. These estimates are based on the expec tation that 17 sports disciplines, including Kabaddi as a demons tration game, will be included in the 1982 Asian Games. Establishment of Equestrian Federation At the initiative of the Equestrian Federation of India, Asian Games Federation at its meeting held at Bangkok in December, 1978 has approved formation of the Asian Equestrian Federa tion with its Headquarters at New Delhi and with General O. P. Malhotra, Chief of the Army Staff, Indian Army, as its President. Insurance for Sports Competitors The Government, on the recommendation of the All India Council of Sports, have decided that all sportsmen and women who undergo coaching/training at the Netaji Subhas National 1 3 7 Institute of Sports, Patiala or under its supervision for participa tion in important International sports events abroad like the Asian Games, Commonwealth Games and the Olympics, shall be insured at Government expenses for a sum of Rs. 1 lakh each for a period up to six months against temporary, partial or total disablement or death. The period of insurance will cover the period of coaching camps at Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala and the period of international sports events. CHAPTER VIII LANGUAGES The work on the promotion and development of Hindi and other Indian Languages and Sanskrit as well as English and other foreign languages, was continued during 1978-79, on the lines followed in the previous year. The activities and programmes undertaken in the field of languages can be broadly grouped as : (i) Spread and development of Hindi; (ii) Promotion of Indian Languages ; (iii) Promotion of English and other foreign languages, and (iv) Promotion of Sanskrit and other classical languages such as Arabic and Persian. Apart from the schemes directly executed by the Ministry, the following offices/organisations set up by the Ministry pursued the implementation of the programmes in the field of langua ges :— (i) Central Hindi Directorate. (ii) Commission for Scientific and Technical Termino logy. (iii) Kendriya Hindi Sansthan, Agra. (iv) Central Institute of Indian Languages, Mysore. (v) Central Institute of English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad. (vi) Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan, New Delhi. (vii) Bureau for Promotion of Urdu. A. S p r e a d a n d D e v e l o p m e n t o f H i n d i The Ministry continued to provide facilities for the teaching of Hindi in non-Hindi speaking States by : (i) providing financial 138 139 assistance to the non-Hindi speaking States for appointing Hindi teachers in their schools ; (ii) providing assistance for the train ing of their Hindi teachers ; (iii) awarding scholarships to stu dents belonging to non-Hindi speaking States for the study of Hindi beyond the stage of matriculation; (iv) assisting voluntary Hindi organisations financially to enable them to hold Hindi teaching classes and maintain libraries and reading rooms ; (v) continuing and expanding the programme of Hindi correspon dence courses conducted by the Central Hindi Directorate ; (vi) providing books in Hindi to various organisations ; and (vii) organising research on the methodology of teaching Hindi to different mother-tongue groups and allied matters through the Kendriya Hindi Sansthan, Agra. Appointment of Hindi Teachers in Non-Hindi Speaking States During the year, grants were given to Non-Hindi Speaking States/Union Territories towards expenditure on 1250 Hindi Teachers appointed in 1978-79 and on 6350 teachers appointed during 1974-75 to 1977-78. Establishment of Hindi Teacher Training Colleges in Non-Hindi Speaking States A total of 19 Hindi Teacher Training Colleges have been opened in Non-Hindi speaking States during the IV & V Five Year Plans. The Scheme will continue in the VI Five Year Plan also. Prizes to encourage Hindi Writers of Non-Hindi Speaking Areas Writers of Non-Hindi Speaking areas whose mother-tongue is not Hindi are awarded a Cash Prize of Rs. 1500/-. A total of 16 such awards have been instituted for writers of different Non-Hindi languages. Award of Scholarships for the Study of Hindi 2500 scholarships were awarded during the year for the study of Hindi at the Post-Matric stage for students belonging to the Non-Hindi Speaking States. Financial assistance to voluntary Hindi Organisations During the year 1978-79 about 140 voluntary Hindi Organi sations are expected to avail themselves of financial assistance to 1 4 0 the extent of Rs. 29 lakhs for the spread and development of Hindi. These organisations have been running free Hindi classes, Hindi typing classes and holding conferences and semi nars apart from bringing out publications and running Hindi libraries. Opening of Hindi Medium Sections in the Colleges of Non-Hindi Speaking States Grants to meet deficit of expenditure on account of the open ing of Hindi Medium Sections in existing colleges in Non-Hindi Speaking States was given to two colleges in Andhra Pradesh and one in Karnataka during 1977-78 on the recommendations of the respective State Governments. Other Schemes To help in the change over of the medium of instruction to Hindi for higher scientific and Technical Education and the pro motion and development of Hindi as a link language, the Central Hindi Directorate, which was set up as a subordinate office of the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare in 1960, has been implementing a number of schemes. The Progress on these schemes during 1978-79 is as under : — Hindi Through Correspondence Courses The scheme of teaching Hindi to non-Hindi knowing people including foreigners was introduced in 1968. The courses are conducted through the medium of English, Tamil and Malayalam. More than 17000 Indian students were enrolled during the year under report. Help material such as bilingual conversational guides and 16 discs covering 32 lessons have been prepared. Special courses for Central Government Employees to prepare them for Probodh, Praveen and Pragya Examinations are also being conducted. As part of correspondence course, the Central Hindi Directorate conducts Personal Contact Programmes to help learners to improve their spoken Hindi. This year, these programmes were organised at Trivan drum, Madurai, Madras, Trichurapally, Durgapur, Calcutta, Bangalore, Delhi, Bombay, Coimbatore and Salem. 141 Encouragement and guidance to Non-Hindi Speaking Students and writers of Hindi To encourage Hindi writers of Non-Hindi Speaking areas, 3 Neo Writers’ Workshops were held at Vidya Nagar, Aurangabad and Annamalai. Travel grant to 20 Research students of Non-Hindi speak ing areas @ Rs. 360/- per student was given. 5 Prizes of Rs. 1500/ each were also announced for Hindi Writers of the Non-Hindi speaking areas. Publications of Popular Books in Hindi This scheme, which aims at the dissemination of scientific knowledge, is implemented with the cooperation of private publishers. So far 296 books have been pub lished under this scheme. Publications The Central Hindi Directorate is bringing out, regularly, the following publications : (1) UNESCO Doot (Hindi Edition of UNESCO Courier) Monthly (2) Bhasha—Quarterly (3) Varshiki— Annually (in four parts) Book Exhibitions The exhibitions of Hindi books are held at the time of National Book Fairs, Conferences/Seminars with a view to apprising the general public abotat the deve lopment of Hindi and to popularise scientific and Technical literature in Hindi. The Central Hindi Directorate organised 14 Book Exhibitions during the year under report. Free Gifts of Books in Hindi To encourage reading of Hindi Books in Non-Hindi speak ing areas and foreign countries, books are purchased 142 and distributed free of cost by the Central Hindi Directorate. During the year, 1080 titles worth Rs. 6.00 lakhs were distributed. Books in foreign countries are distributed through Indian Missions abroad. Evolution of Scientific and Technical Terminology Comprehensive glossaries of Technical terms relating to Agriculture and Engineering are under punt. During the year under report, Hindi equivalents of about 19,000 terms for use in different departments/offices were finalised. Definitional Dictionaries/Digests and Monographs 10 Definitional Dictionaries in various subjects have been prepared. 5 more such Dictionaries relating to Che mistry, Physics, Home Science, Economics and Anthropology are under print. An Encylopaedia of Social Sciences of Hindi on the basis of international Encyclopaedia, in four parts, is be ing prepared. Social Sciences Digest has been published and Physics Digest is under print. These digests are produced to acquaint the Industrial Workers with latest researches in different subjects of their interest. Propagation of Hindi Abroad The Scheme to promote Hindi abroad mainly in Caribbean countries of South-East and West Asia and in the advanced coun tries like the UK, the USA, the USSR, France, West Germany and Japan was formulated and approved in the Fourth Plan. During the year under report, 33 foreign nationals from 13 countries which include France, USA, UK, West Germany, Poland, China and Japan etc. etc. have been admitted and granted scholarship for study of Hindi. The foreign nationals are also paid air-passage both ways from their countrv and back. Three Hindi lecturers working in the three Caribbean countries i.e. Trinidad, Surinam and Guyana are being maintained and the entire expenditure on their salaries etc. including air-fare is borne by this Ministry under the Scheme. Two part-time teachers are also being paid honorarium for teaching Hindi in Sri Lanka. 143 A Hindi scholar from Saugar University, was sent to Russia to deliver lectures on different aspects of Hindi language and literature at the Asian and African Language Institute, Moscow. Kendriya Hindi Shikshan Mandal (Kendriya Hindi Sansthan Agra, Delhi, Hyderabad and Shillong) During the period under report, the Sansthan continued to devote its attention mainly to train a large number of Hindi tea chers of north-eastern states, namely, Nagaland, Mizoram, Meghalaya and Arunachal Pradesh where the paucity of Hindi teachers is felt. The Sansthan has also been preparing Hindi textbooks and other teaching materials for these States. The Sansthan has started a B.Ed. level correspondence course in Hindi teaching for untrained in-service Hindi teachers of non- Hindi speaking States. During the year under report, the Sansthan has admitted 844 persons, in different courses of the Sainsthan at its four centres. The Sansthan has also published seven books as reading material for the Department of the Official Language. Another set of seven books is under preparation. The Sainsthan has also published 10 books on various subjects whereas three more are in press. The research journal ‘Gaveshna’ is also being published by the Sansthan apart from ‘Sansthain Bulletin’. A seminar on ‘Hindi-Urdu Lexicography’ was organised by the Sansthan with the cooperation of Jamia Millia, Delhi. The Sansthan has also organised two All India Hindi Elocution Com petitions for trainees of Hindi Teacher’s Training Colleges situa ted in non-Hindi speaking States. 42 students and teachers of 12 universities participated in these competitions. About 900 books on the various subjects such as Linguistics, language-reaching and Hindi Literature etc. were purchased for the Sansthan library The Language Laboratory of the Sansthan has prepared teaching material and 20 lessons for Assam. B. P r o m o t i o n o f M o d e r n I n d i a n L a n g u a g e s Production oi University Level Books in Hindi and Regional Languages A programme for the Production of books of University level was launched in 1968-69 with a view to facilitating early adop tion of Indian languages as media of instruction in as many dis ciplines as possible. Under this programme about 4700 books have been published out of which 950 are translations and about 1 4 4 3000 books are in the pipeline. The current year’s budget pro vision for this scheme is Rs. 150.00 lakhs. Grants totalling Rs. 1038.07 lakhs have been given till the end of December, 1978. Book Production through CSTT The Commission for Scientific and Technical Terminology selected 827 titles, out of which 101 titles have been published, 69 are press ready and 646 are under process. Core-Book Production Programme Core-books in history and medicine are being broUght out by the ICHR and NBT respectively. In medicine, two books have been published, one book has been assigned to publisher for printing, nine books are under preparation with authors/editors and four titles are under consideration. In Hindi ICHR. have selected 557 titles/manuscripts for publication in various Indian languages. National Award for writers of standard books The Scheme was launched to encourage Indian authors writ ing original standard works of university level in Indian langua ges. It envisages Award of Prizes to authors for original books of university level published within a specified period of time. The Scheme wa9 originally with the U.G.C. and has since been taken over by the Ministry. Production of Books in Urdu In pursuance of the above decision, the Government set up in June 1969 Taraqqi Urdu Board to advise the Government on the production of academic literature in Urdu. This Board was reconstituted on November 10, 1978 with the Minister of State in the Ministry as its Chairman. The Bureau for Promotion of Urdu which functions as the office of the Board was declared a subordinate office with effect from 5 November 1977 Under the guidance of the Board, about 550 titles have been selected for translation/original writing. Out of these nearlv 140 titles have been published. These comprise university level books, school textbooks, popular science books, children’s literature, supple mentary readers, general books and reference works. Several manuscripts are in press and in various stages of editing. 145 As calligraphy is an integral part of Urdu Book Production, three calligraphy centres have been set up at Delhi, Bon:,bay and Hyderabad for the training of calligraphists, while assistance is provided to the extent of 50 per cent of expenditure to the Aca demy of Arts and Languages (Srinagar) and Bihar Urdu Aka- demy for their calligraphy centres. The Bureau has formulated a proposal for teaching Urdu to non-Urdu speaking people through correspondence courses. A certificate course and diploma course have been worked out. This scheme will be implemented in the next year. Production oi Books in Sindhi This scheme was taken up in the latter part of 1975 under the guidance of an Advisory Committee of Sindhi scholars. The objective of this scheme is to bring out educative books in Sindhi for the benefit of Sindhi students. The implementation of the scheme has been entrusted to the Commission for Scientific and Technical Terminology. Under this scheme two reference works, namely, Sindhi-English Dictionary and Sindhi Grammar have been printed. A number of manuscripts for higher secondary stu dents in various disciplines are under preparation and 5 manu scripts are in press. To encourage Sindhi writers, a scheme of award of 5 prizes ha's been taken up. Forty-five entries under this scheme have been received. CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF INDIAN LANGUAGE, MYSORE The Central Institute of Indian Languages, Mysore was set up in 1969 with the objective of promoting the study rf modern Indian Languages and through such activities creating an emo tional empathy between the people of the different regions of the country. The programmes of the Institute are geared tn encour age the study of Indian languages by those who do not have that language as their mother-tongue. This will also facilitate the im plementation of the three-language formula. The main activities of the Institute are centered around language teaching, linguistic research, preparation of teaching materials studying of tribal lan guages and dialects, socio-linguistic research and studies on folk lore. (i) Tribal and Border Languages Unit An Adult Literacy Workshop was organised and li'eracy mate rials were prepared in Manipuri, Miri, Bhuti, Sema, Konyak and Kuvi. 146 The first draft of grammars of Mishmi, Konyak and Apatani was prepared and the work on the dictionary of these languages progressed. Ahgami, Hindi Dictionary, Ladakhi grammar and Adult reader were completed. (ii) Cartography Unit The literacy Atlas of India based on 1961 and 1971 Census data was released in the month of October, 1978. The Atlas con tains 23 maps on Literacy in terms of male, female, rural, urban, district and state showing decennial variation over the decade. The district-wise and tribe-wise data on the Atlas of Tribal Languages of India is being collected. (iii) Reading Unit As part of the Technology transfer project, orientation pro grammes were conducted for school teachers and teacher educa tors on ‘Language-Teaching-Method Material and Medium’ iind for students on Demonstration of Audio-Visual aids and testing of the ability in reading, speaking in English', Hindi and Kannada. A comprehensive report of the reading speed of ten students in three languages has been prepared. (iv) Material Production Unit Need based Courses were organised for special groups of learners. A Correspondence Course in Tamil has been started for non-Tamil speakers. 170 students have registered for the certificate course this year. (v) Publications : The following books have been published:— 1. Language load. 2. Sociolinguistic Survey of Indian Sindhi. 3. Adult Literacy Reader—Copy Book in Manipun. 4. Classified Bibliography of linguistic Dessertation on Indian Languages. 5. Classified Bibliography of Articles published in Indian Languages. 6. Studies in Munda Numerals. 147 The following books are in press : 1. Maltc— An Ethno—Semantic Study 2. Tamil Basic Course, 3. Kannada State level Primer. 4. Language Use in Himachai Pradesh. 5. Linguistics. Language and Literacy Education. (vi; Regional Language Centres The Southern Regional Language Centre organised 3 refresher courses of 3 weeks duration in Tamil, Tclugu and Kannada at Nagercoil, Hyderabad and Mysore respectively. An Integration Camp for Kannada was held in May for 10 days at Mysore which 9 teachers and 89 students participated. The Academic Session 1978-79 in Regional Language Cen~ ires started in July 1978. 314 teacher trainees have been admit ted in all the Centres for intensive training programme in miijoi Indian Languages. C . P r o m o t i o n o f E n g l i s h & O t h e r F o r e i g n L a n g u a g e s Central Institute of English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad An autonomous Body set up by this Ministry and fully financ ed through the University Grants Commission, this Institute is deemed to be a university under the UGC Act. It has a regional Centre at Shillong to look after the needs of the North-eastern region. Another Centre for the Northern region is being set up at Lucknow this year. During the year under report the depart ment of Arabic has been started at the Institute. During the year the Institute carried on with its teacher train ing programmes in English, French, German and Russian, research on the methodology of teaching, production of teaching materials and extension services. The training programme has been diver sified to meet the needs of key personnel in definite areas of English and foreign languages teaching in the country. Areas of meaningful research have been indentified and efforts are being made to publish the findings. The scope of extension services has 16 ESW/78—11 148 been broadened to give effective assistance both at the collegs and secondary levels for the improvement of standards of English teaching. The M.A. (Correspondence-cum-contact course) m French and German was introduced during the year. About 1479 participants are on the rolls for the courses for various diplomas and degrees in English, French, German and Russian, lcn M. Litt. dissertations have been completed in different subjects regarding Lexicography, English learning/teaching in different groups, trans lation evaluation etc. Radio lessons in English were produced for various classes at school level. Three textbooks for various classes at the school level were also completed during the year and another five arc under preparation. Four five-weeks summer Institute contact programmes in English were held during the year in collaboration with the UGC and the British Council. A new Post-graduate Diploma in the teaching of English by correspondence started in October this year with 95 participants. Workshops and seminars for the pro ducers of Radio programmes on syllabus and examinations in English for universities in Tamil Nadu, Gujarat and Union Ter ritories were held. Extension programmes for the improvement of English teaching and proficiency in English were held for vari ous universities, schools and colleges and diagonostie tests were administered for probationers and students at various institutions. Short need based courses were also conducted to meet the demands of various organisations. These were in such areas as courses in Phonetics & Spoken English, Orientation course for Post-gradua e teachers of English, Capsule Course in Report-writing etc. D . P r o m o t i o n o f S a n s k r i t a n d o t h e r C l a s s i c a l L a n g u a g e s s u c h a s A r a b i c a n d P e r s i a n Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan More than 825 students were admitted into the Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeethas which are constituent Units of the Sans than for various courses. 68 new publications from the Sansthan as well as from the Vidyapeethas are likely to be published dur ing the year (10 publications have already been published so far). 473 scholarships were awarded to the students of Vidya peethas under the Sansthan. Free hostel facilities have been pro vided to more than 300 students. Teacher Training facilities have been provided to about 121 students. Over 2524 students are ex pected to appear in the various examinations of the Sansthan. 149 Schohrships R;scarch scholarships to 173 students of traditional Sanskrit Pathsialas have been awarded during the year. Besides 150 scholarships were awarded to students pursuing Shastri and Aehaaya courses and more than 800 scholarships for Post-jnat- ric stidies in Sanskrit, amounting to about Rs. 9 lakhs. Financial Assistance to voluntary Sanskrit Organisations Grants amounting to about 30 lakhs are likely to be reioased to atout 750 Voluntary Sanskrit Organisations and 15 Guru- kulas by the end of the year. A sum of Rs. 18.00 lakh:> has alreacy been sanctioned to about 300 institutions. Publication of Dictionary based on Historical Principles The project is being implemented in the Deccan College Post-Graduate and Research Institute, Poona. The work on the preparation of the Critical Sanskrit Dictionary on historical prin ciples has been making steady progress and the College brought out the third fascicule of 300 pages and complete ! t!i „■ first Volume in three parts. Adarsh Sanskrit Pafhslialns Grants amounting to about Rs. 6.00 lakhs are likely to be released .o six Adarsh Sanskrit Pathshalas. Out of this Rs. 4 iakhs has already been released. One more pathshala is also likely to be given grants during the year. Financial assistance to voluntary Arabic and Persian organisations Grarts amounting to about Rs. 5 lakhs are likely to be releas ed to mere than 100 Voluntary Arabic and Persian Organisations by the eid of the year. A sum of Rs. 3.50 lakhs has already been released to about 80 institutions. Central!’ Sponsored Scheme for the promotion of Sanskrit i) Rendering financial assistance @ Rs. 1-800.00 per annum to eminent Sanskrit Pandits. At the moment about 1000 Sanskrit Scholars arc receiving assistance under this scheme. 150 (ii) Award of Scholarship @ Rs. 10.00 per month to the students of High|Higher Secondary School studying Sanskrit. About 2500 students arc getting this Scho larship. (iii) Providing facilities for teaching of Sanskrit in Sec ondary Schools. At present 9 States are taking ad vantage of this scheme. (iv) Modernisation of Sanskrit Pathshalas. Nine States and Union Territories are taking advantage of this Scheme. (v) Grant to State Governments for promotion of Sans krit. Assistance at the rate of 100 per cent is now being provided to 13 States under this scheme. A sum of about Rs. 19.30 lakhs is expected to be incurred on this during 1978-79. Production of Sanskrit Literature To encourage the production of new Sanskrit Literature and preserve ancient literature, financial assistance is given to indivi duals, organisations, research institutions and universities for the publication of works relating to Sanskrit language and literature, printing of out-of-print Sanskrit works, printing critie.il editions of rare Sanskrit manuscripts and bringing out Sanskrit journals. Copies of books relating to Sanskrit are also purchased. Work on the following works for which assistance has been sanctioned, was in progress : (i) Preparation & publication of critical edition of Maha- puranas by the All India Kashiraj Trust, Varanasi. (ii) Dharam Kosha, by Dharam Kosha Randal. Wai, Satara. (iii) International project of preparation of critical Pali Dictionary at Government Sanskrit College. Calcutta. (iv) Preparation & Publication of editions of Taitiriya Samhita, Shrauta Kosha & Avestan by Vedic Sam- shodhan Mandal, Poona1. First Volume of the Des criptive catalogue of 65000 Sanskrit Manuscripts was brought out by Oriental Research Institute, Mysore. 151 All India Elocution Contest for the Students of Sanskrit Path- shalas The seventeenth All India Elocution Contest for the students of Sanskrit Pathshalas was held at Gauhati in the mon,th of January, 1979. Students from different States and Union Territory participated in the contest. Simultaneously a Vedic Convention was also held at Gauhati in which about 65 Vedic Scholars took part and recited different Shakhas of four Vedic Samhitas. From last year, a scheme ‘Preservation of the tradition jf Vedic Recitation’ was introduced under which Vedic Scholars have been selected to train two students each under them in the art of recitation of Vedic Samhitas. Every Vedic Scholar gets Rs. 500.00 per month and a student Rs. 100.00 per month. Scholarships to 3 Scholars and 6 students were sanctioned this year. Sanskrit Day To popularise Sanskrit among general public, the Shnvanl Pumima is being celebrated as Sanskrit Day, since 1969, by States, Union Territories and the Centre. This year’s Sans krit Day was observed on the 18th August, 1978 (Riksha B an d h an ). Award of Certificate of Honour to Sanskrit. Persian and Arabic Scholars with Monetary Grant of Rs. 3,000.00 per Annum Transferred from Ministry of Home Affairs, this Scheme envisages, giving of President’s Award to 6 Sanskrit, one each of Persian and Arabic Scholars on the 15th August, which in cludes, grant of Rs. 3,000.00 per year, for life and Robe of Honour at the Investiture ceremony. The total number of Scholars now getting the Award is 97. CHAPTER IX INDIAN NATIONAL COMMISSION FOR COOPERATION WITH UNESCO India has been a member of the United Nations Educational, ScicE’irie and Cultural Organization since its inception in I94t\ Article VII of the Constitution of Unesco requires that "Each, Member State shall make arrangements as suit its particular conditions for purposes of associating its principal bodies interested in educational, scientific and cultural matters with the work of the organization preferably by the formation of National Commission broadly representative of the Govern ment and such bodies” and further provides that “National Commissions or national Cooperating bodies, where they exist, shall <.cf in an advisory capacity to their respective delegation* to ttii General Conference and to their Governments in matters relating to the organization and shall function as agencies of liaison in all matters of interest to if. Accordingly a perma nent Commission was established in 1951. The Commission disdw-'gej* its functions through the four sub-commissions on Educ;.-: ton. Natural Sciences, Social Sciences, Humanities & Cu!!ure and Communication. Having consideration to the fact ib:;: the Indian National Commission for Cooperation with Uihsc'’ was too unwieldy with its membership at 102, to function effectively, the Commission was reconstituted in Fcbr; :,rv 1978 and its membership was brought down to 56 to Tjao it more compact and workable. The four Sub-Com- miss'!C-n< of the Indian National Commission for Co-operation with Unesco met in New Delhi on Julv 5 and 6, 1978 to discuss the Draft Programme and Budget of Unesco for 1979-1980. The. re commendations made by these Sub-Commissions were diseased at the 14th Session of the Indian National Commission held • r; 21st July. 1978. Through this meeting, the Com mission was informed of the details of the problems envisaged l>y lVc?i in the next biennium. The advice was also obtained 0^ 152 153 specialised agencies, the Indian National Commission for Cooperation with Unesco has been promoting Unesco Club Movement in the country. It is also a function of these clubs lo develop activities in the field of education, science and culture and to promote international understanding, co-opera tion in World peace, e.g. observance of UN. Day, Human Rights Day, Unesco Week etc., organization or participation in exhibitions oi' Unesco publications, symposia, seminars, lecture programmes, UN/UNESCO Work-Shops etc. There are 133 Uncsco Clubs functioning throughout the country. Majority of these Clubs are located in Universities and public libraries. Unesco Coupons The Commission continued to operate the Unesco Interna tional Coupon Scheme designed to help educational and re search institutions and also individuals working in the fie'ids of education, science and culture to import their bona- ftdc requirements of educational publications, scientific equip ments and educational films from abroad without undergoing the foreism exchange and import control formalities. Coupons worth rupees sixteen lakhs approximately are like!, to be sold during 1978-79. Unt'sco Courier The Indian National Commission for Cooperation with Unesco continues to get the Hindi and Tamil editions of ‘The Unesco Courier’ published through the Central Hindi Directorate and the Southern Languages Book Trust, Madras, respectively. The present number of each language issue is 3000 copies. News- Letter The Commission brings out a quarterly ‘Newsletter’ to pub licise information about the activities of the Commission and Uncsco in India. In all 3000 copies are printed which are distributed among National Commissions abroad, Education Departments of States, Universities and other Educational institutions including Unesco associated Schools in the country and abroad. Contribution to Unesco India’s contribution to Uncsco for the biennium 197S-79 amounted to Rs. 1.36,18,000 representing 0.65 per cent of 154 UNESCO’s Budget. Out of this, an amount of Rs. 78 lakhs representing dues for 1978 has already been paid. The balance amount due for 1979 will be paid before the close of the financial year 1978-79. Visit of Director-General of Unesco H. E. Mr. Amadou-Mahatar M’Bow, Director-General of Unesco, accompanied by the four officials made a brief stop over at New Delhi on the 15th June, 1978 on his way to Kathmandu. On his return journey from Kathmandu, he stayed at New Delhi for the night on the 18th June, 1978. On this occasion, the Director-General met the Education Minister and the Secretary General, Indian National Commission for Unesco, and discussed matters of mutual interest. 20th Session of the General Conference of Unesco An Indian delegation of Official and Non-official Delegate;, participated in the 20th Session of the General Conference o‘ Unesco held at Paris from 24th October to 28th November, 1978. The delegation was led by the Education Minister 4th Regional Conference of MinisJers of Education Unesco convened the 4th Regional ( onference of Ministers of Education and those responsible for Economic Planning in Asia and Oceania at Colombo iiom 24th July to 1st Au^s: 1978. The Indian Delegation which participated in Uiis Conference was led by Minister of State for Education. Sochi Welfare and Culture. Deputations Delegations Abroarf As in previous years, delegations were sent for participa tion in the various International Conferences, Regional Seminars, Meetings etc. CHAPTER X ADULT EDUCATION In accordance with the highest priority being given in edu cational planning to adult education in parallel along with tha: of elementary education, the tempo in the preparatory action and implementation of the National Adult Education Programme was maintained during the current year. Although in the Outline of the National Adult Education Programme the period until the end of March 1979 for all practical purposes is to be treated as a period of intensive preparation, considerable spade work has been done for consolidating and reinforcing on-going programmes and strengthening the administrative struc tures for implementation of the NAEP in different States md Union Territory Administrations. The Directorate of Adult Education which is the national resource agency in the lieid of adult education, and the concerned Division in the Ministry, both were strengthened to cope up with the increasing responsi bilities for implementation of the Programme. Launching of the National Adult Education Programme The National Adult Education Programme was launched in New Delhi bv the Vice-President of India on October 2. 1978. The Prime Minister was the Chief Cmest at the function, which was presided over by the Education Minister. Cabinet Ministers, Members of Planning Commission, Parliament, the Metropolitan Council- Delhi. Heads of various Centra! organisations and Foreign Missions, Professors and Principal of colleges/schools, as also the field participants in adult edu cation programmes attended the function. The State Govern ments and Union Territory Administrations were advised to organise similar functions in their areas. The Universities, various Colleges and the Education Secretaries of State Govern ments/Union Territory Administrations were advised to organise Conferences/Seminars on important topics of Adult Education. All this had salutary effect for creating the appropriate atmos phere for implementation of the National Adult Education Programme. 155 56 National Board of Adult Education and its Committees The National Board of Adult Education was set up in s 977 lor advising the Government in regard to the formulation jf policies and programmes of adult education, their coordina tion. implementation and evaluation. The Chairman of the Board is the Union Minister of Education, Social Welfare and Culture and its members are Union Ministers of Information & Broadcasting, Agriculture & Irrigation, Labour & Parliamen tary Affairs and Health & Family Welfare. The Deputy Chairman of the Planning Commission is also its member. The other members of the Board include two Members of Lok Sabha, one Member of Rajya Sabha, five Ministers of Education from States, one Chief Commissioner of Union Territory, five Ex-Ofiicio Heads of Organisations having bearing on adult edu- canor: programme and nine distinguished Educationists. The Joint Secretary in charge of Adult Education in the Ministry is its Member-Secretary. The Board held its second meeting on 5th July. 1978 and its third meeting on 30th January, 1979 At ms second meeting the Board emphasised the need for setting up oi State Boards of Adult Education in every State/Union Territory for facilitating implementation of the programme. As ad:)]’ education is now visualised as an integral part of the developmental strategy, the Board desired that steps should be •aijktT; to have proper coordination with other concerned deve lopment Departments/Ministries. Accordingly, the Conference on Development and National Adult Education Programme was convened in New Delhi on 1-2 August, 1978 in which represen tatives dealing with development programmes in the Central Ministries/Departments of the Government of India, of selected voluntary organisations, District Collectors- Heads of Develop ment Departments in the States, etc. participated. The guide line'' emerging out of the deliberations of the Conference were circiriated to all concerned. The Committee of National Board of Adult Education on Preparatory Action for National Adult Education Programme wfr- convened on Julv 20, 1978 under the Chairmanship of D* Y.K.R.V. Rao. Necessary action has been taken on its ’-e-commendations regarding supplv of basic materials to all Members of Parliament interested in NAEP. circulation of guidelines for organising seminars in colleges and universities, :ind emphasis for setting up of State Boards of Adult Education clc The National Board of Adult Education decided to set up a Special Committee under the Chairmanship of Dr. Ram Lai 157 Parikh to go into the motivational aspects of the National Adult Education Programme. This Committee had a number of meetings during the period under report, and submitted an interim report in September 1978. A comprehensive document on th: subject is proposed to be brought out by the Committee very soon. As motivation of the illiterate learners and the various functionaries is of great importance in the implementation of the programme, the guidelines of this Committee would be very useful. The following three other Committees of the Board have also been set up : (i) Committee on Evaluation; (ii) Committee on Voluntary Agencies : and (iii) Committee on Post literacy and Follow-up Activities. Rural Functional Literacy Projects As part of its responsibility for social and economic planning, the Central Government continued to provide leadership in NAEP. Among the efforts of the Central Government in this direction, mention may be made of the model pace-setter pro jects under the scheme of “Rural Functional Literacy Projects (RFLP)” which is the new nomenclature of the two on-going schemes of Farmers Functional Literacy Programme and Non-formal Education for 15—35 age group. The Central Government has undertaken to finance, on ccnt percent cost basis, at least one Rural Functional Literacy Project in each district in every State during the mid-term plan 1978—83. The implementation of the projects would be the responsibility of the State Governments. The size of each such project is up to 300 adult education centres with an enrolment of 30 adults in each centre. Tn a year, each Project of the size of 300 centres is expected to provide adult education including literacy to about 9.000 adults. During 1978-79, the Central Government have taken up 206 such Central Projects (including 146 on-going projects under the Schemes of Farmers’ Functional Literacy Project and 60 projects under Non-formal Education for the age group 15—35). The benefits of adult education, through these central nace setter projects- is expected to reach to about 7 lakh adults during 1978-79. The financial provision for this scheme for the cur rent vear is Rs. 4.12 crores and for the next year 1979-80. Rs. 13.5 crores. 158 Strengthening of Administrative Structures in the States/Union Territories and establishment of State Boards of Adult Education In planning and implementation of the National Adult Edu cation Programme, the States have the pivotal role to play. In order to enable them to play this role, grants have been re leased under this scheme to practically all the States and Union Territories. A budget provision of Rs. 50 lakhs for this scheme has been made during the current financial year and of Rs. 90 lakhs for the next financial year. The Government of India also advised the State Governments to set up State Boards of Adult Education for advising in the formulation, implementation and evaluation of adult education programmes. Almost all the States and Union Territories have set up State Boards of Adult Education. Assistance to Voluntary Agencies working in the field of Admit Education NAEP visualises that voluntary agencies would play a special’ and partnership role in the implementation. This is to be done by securing greater involvement of the voluntary agencies already working in the field of adult education or having potentiality to do so and by creating circumstances for emergence of new agencies particularly in areas where they are few. Efforts have been made to secure greater participation of the voluntary agencies in the NAEP after the Government; decision to launch it from October 2, 1978, was taken. Consul tations at different forums were held with key representatives of voluntary agencies working in different fields to involve them in the NAEP. This matter was discussed at length at the Con ference of Education Ministers held in New Delhi. Consultations were also held at various other forums. Based on all these deliberations, the scheme of Assistance to Voluntary Agencies was reviewed and revised. The revised scheme visualises the participation of voluntary agencies mainly in planning and im plementation of field programmes including post literacy and follow-up activities; and in resource development, particularly production of teaching/learning material, training, research and evaluation, etc. The pattern of assistance has been liberalised. Financial assistance is now provided to voluntary agencies on 100 per cent basis of the programme cost and 75 per cent of 159 the administrative cost. In addition to the existing eligibility conditions, the following criteria have been made :— (i) not discriminate against any person or group of persons on the ground of sex, religion, caste or creed; (ii) not directly function for the furtherance ct' the in terests of any political party; (iii) not in any manner incite communal disharmoiy; (iv) not proselytise; and (v) eschew violence. The National Adult Education Programme, in order to become a mass movement, requires the involvement anl support of political parties and the organisations of womei, youth and peasants, all-India cultural, religious and youth organisa tions, and federations/associations of teachers, students, trade, industry, etc. These organisations, though not eligible for financial assistance, can contribute in a substantial nanncr in the creation of a favourable environment for implementation of the programme. They can also help by motivating learners, teachers and other field workers. The State Governments have a special responsibility in, the mobilisation of the voluntary effort. Thiy have also to coordinate the programmes organised by thj various agencies and to monitor them. For this reason, the applications of all voluntary agencies for field programmes have to come through the State Governments, and financial assistance is pro vided to them only on specific recommendations of .he State Governments. Where the State Governments have s) desired funds are also disbursed through the officers nominated by them. As a result of the special efforts made during th; current year to mobilise voluntary agencies for taking up adiit educa tion programmes, it is expected that by the end of thj current financial year the number of voluntary agencies approved for assistance would reach about 500 involving over 20,000 Centres with an enrolment in these centres of approximately 5 lakhs. The quantum of financial assistance to be provided to /oluntary agencies during the current financial year would )c about Rs. 2 crores. 160 Besides, the field programmes of running adult education centres, voluntary agencies have also been assisted for the deve lopment of resource support. Out of the 14 State Resource Centres established so far, 10 have been set up under the aus pices of voluntary agencies. The State Resource Centres have made very useful contributions in the areas of training of field workers, and preparation of teaching/learning materials. For the evaluation of the programme to be taken up by voluntary agencies, institutions of social science research aj. being identified in each State. Sardar Patel Institute of Econo mic and Social Science Research, Ahmedabad has already comp leted the evaluation for Gujarat State. Similar institutions are being identified in other States and it is intended that a critical evaluation of all the adult education programmes taken up by voluntary agencies would be undertaken through these Institu tions for which they will be financially assisted. Adult Education through Colleges/Universities in India An important component of NAEP is the involvement of educated youth. The guidelines of Adult Education and Exten sion Programme, formulated by the University Grants Commis sion, have been circulated to all the colleges/universities and other institutions eligible for assistance from the Commission. In the guidelines, it has been laid down that the universities must assume Adult Education and Extension Programme as an impor tant responsibility and give it a distinct status. Over 20 universities arc participating in the Programme of Adult/Continuing Education. With a view to creating an aware ness in the academic community and to enabling the students in the universities and colleges to participate in the Programme, workshops have been organised at various universities/colleges. With the assistance provided by the University Grants Com mission, workshops/group discussions were held at a number of universities including those of Bhopal, Kerala, Nagpur, Udai pur, Jabalpur, Agra and at a very large number of colleges. These meetings and discussions have to a great extent mobilised the opinion of the academic community for their active parti cipation in the programme. Sri Venkateswara University and the Kashmir University have established State Resource Centres and a Regional Resource Centre has also been established at the Punjab University, Chandigarh, for the States of Punjab, Har yana and Himachal Pradesh. 161 Over 600 proposals of the colleges have been considered so far of which over 200 have been accepted for assistance from the UGC to organise Adult Education Centres at the rate of at least 10 centres (in many cases 30 centres) per college. Over 150 colleges were sanctioned a grant of Rs. 500/- each as “seed money” for the formulation of the proposals. In the case of colleges where the number of centres proposed is less than 10, such colleges have been advised to organise Adult Education Centres from the NSS funds. Forty universities (including ins titutions deemed to be university) have been sanctioned “seed money” for the formulation of the proposals to participate in the N A EP. Exchange Programme The exchange of experiences with other countries in the field of Adult Education has assumed special significance in view of the launching of the National Adult Education Prog ramme in the country from 2nd October 1978. Such exchange programmes have been included under the bilateral cultural agreements with a number of countries. A Seven-Member team visited Tanzania for studying Adult Education Programme in that country for a period of 10 days. Another delegation con sisting of ten Members visited Thailand and Vietnam to study National Literacy Training Programmes in those countries. Simi lar exchanges were established with some other countries inclu ding Yugoslavia, Brazil and the U.K. Such exchanges have been useful in acquainting to the adult education functionaries to get insight into the Adult Education Programmes of the coun tries and to make use of their experiences. These exchanges are proposed to be continued during the year 1979-80. Directorate of Adult Education The Directorate of Adult Education established in 1971 as a subordinate office of the Ministry, is its academic and techni cal wing in respect of matters relating to adult education prog rammes at the all India level. As National Resource Centre for adult education, the Directorate’s activities during the year re mained largely oriented towards preparations for the launching of National Adult Education Programme. It was considered necessary to strengthen the professional base of the Directorate. A full-time Director in the Directorate took over from 1st March 1978. In addition to some additional posts of senior 162 level professional staff, provision has been made in the Direc torate to have services of six short-term Consultants for provid ing specialist support in matters of planning and implementa tion of National Adult Education Programme. Consultants have been appointed in the field of Material, Research & Evalua tion, and Development. The salient activities of the Directorate during the current year were the following : — Promotional Activities These included : (i) Insignia on National Adult Education Programme designed to popularise the Programme and to vis ually communicate the message of literacy combined with social awareness and functionality; (ii) Tableau for highlighting the focus of National Adult Education Programme, presented in the Republic Day Parade, 1978; (iii) Slides on National Adult Education Programme hav ing 120 colour slides with commentary depicting the real life situations of the poor and illiterate people and the change through National Adult Education Programme; (iv) A 10-minute documentary on National Adult Edu cation Programme produced through the Films Division, Government of India entitled ‘To Hold a Head High’ released all over the country on the 29th September 1978; (v) A Poster on National Adult Education Programme and a Cartoon Brochure entitled ‘The Other Side of the Fence’ each brought out in 13 Indian languages and 10 lakh copies; (vi) Exhibition on Nation’s preparedness on the occasion of launching National Adult Education Programme on 2nd October, 1978; (vii) National Adult Education Programme Newsletter brought out for wider circulation from October 1978: (viii) Participation in the Third World Book Fair at New Delhi in February 1978 and Ninth National Book Fair in December 1978 at Bangalore; (ix) Publications on National Adult Education Programme included : 13 titles on Illustrative Teaching-Learning 163' Materials for the Learners on Primers, Readers, Work Books and other Supplementary Readers; 4 titles on Materials on Curriculum Development; 3 titles on Training Materials; 5 titles on Materials on Monitoring, Evaluation, Research & Statistics ; 2 titles on Motivation; and 4 titles on Materials for Reference and General Information. Preparation of Materials (1) A seminar was organised on Methodology of Prepara tion of Material at Mysore in collaboration with the Central Institute of Indian Languages; and (ii) The Directorate collaborated with NCERT in organis ing Writers’ Workshops in Khori of Haryana State for develop ing basic adult education materials for rural learners and in Madhya Pradesh for production of teaching-learninig meterials for non-formal education for the age-group 9 to 12. Another workshop was organised by Directorate for developing model supplementary literature for adult learners. Training (i) A National Seminar on Training Strategy was organised in June 1978 at New Delhi in which representatives of the deve lopment departments of Central Ministries and State Govern ments participated to evolve a coordinated strategy for training of personnel under National Adult Education Programme; (ii) A Regional Training Programme was organised in col laboration with the State Government of Meghalaya for North Eastern Region at Shillong from November 13-18, 1978. The nrinar aimed at orienting Project Officers and enabling the States to plan their detailed training strategies; and (iii) Specialist support in the form of resource persons was provided to the States/Union Territories of Chandigarh, Delhi, Haryana, Gujarat and Jammu and Kashmir in planning and or ganising training programmes for National Adult Education Programme personnel. Monitoring, Evaluation and Research (i) A four-day All India Seminar on Monitoring the National Adult Education Programme for evolving guidelines 16 ESW/78— 12 164 was organised in August 1978 in collaboration with Council for Social Development, New Delhi. 44 participants drawn from universities, voluntary agorcies, Planning Commission, State Resource Centres and other development departments attended; (ii) Specialist assistance was provided to the Monitoring Group of Adult Education constituted by the Planning Commis sion to study education programmes including adult education by the Directorate; and (iii) On the recommendations of the Committee on Pre paratory Action for National Adult Education Programme, the Directorate prepared an illustrative anthology of case studies of past and on-going experiments in adult education under the title ‘Fifty Years of Adult Education in India—Some Experiences’. Sharing of International Experiences (a ) Organisation of International Conferences and Meetings: On behalf of the Government of India, Directorate collaborated with Unesco Regional Office for Education in Asia and Oceania in organising the Meeting of Regional Panel of Experts for Re search and Training in, Literacy which held at New Delhi from 19-25 September 1978. In all 26 participants representing 11 countries participated in the meeting and made recommendations regarding research and training in literacy especially in \he deve loping countries having low level of literacy in the region. (b) Deputation of Officers for the study visits abroad : (i) As a member of the Indian Delegation led by the Union Education Secretary, Dr. A. K. Jalaluddin, Director attended the Annual Conference of APEID Member States organised from March 21-30, 1978 at the Unesco Regional Office, Bangkok. He also visited Geneva to attend the International Seminar on Re search and Literacy organised by the International Development Research Centre, Ottawa from November 18-27, 1978. (ii) A ten-member Indian Delegation led by Dr. (Smt.) Chitra Naik, Director, State Resource Centre, Maharashtra, visi ted Thailand and Vietnam under a three-week Unesco Prog ramme. Shri D. V. Sharma, Deputy Director and Shri S. P. Jain, Assistant Director represented the Directorate. 165 (iii) Under the Colombo Plan, Shri R. S. Mathur, Deputy Director was deputed to a six-month training programme in adult education at the University of Manchester in the U. K. Shri Mathur was also deputed to participate in, a three-week workshop on Evaluation organised by Unesco Regional Office for Education in Asia and Oceania, Bangkok and the International Institute of Educational Planning, Paris; and (iv) Shri B. C. Rokadiya, Dir ector (PVC) participated in the 7-Member team of Adult Edu cation Experts from India to study the Adult Education Pro gramme in Tanzania in November 1978. During the period under report, there were several field visits from foreign visitors and delegations. The Directorate arranged consultation meetings and study programmes for them. Technical support to On-going field programmes The Farmer’s Functional Literacy Project and Non-formal Education for 15 to 25 continued to receive technical support from the Directorate during the year. The Directorate has ini tiated steps to strengthen the professional base and resource de velopment for the effective implementation of these programmes. Urban Adult Education Unit An area of innovative and explorative effort in adult educa tion is related to education and occupational growth of workers employed in various sectors in urban and industrial area. Under the scheme of Government of India, Shramik Vidyapeeths which represent an institutional framework for planning and organising educational programmes for workers in urban and industrial settings have already been set up in 8 different places in the country. In all 50 such centres are envisaged to be in operation by the end of Sixth Plan period. In order to provide technical guidance in matters relating to planning and implementation of the programme of education of workers in urban and industrial areas in the country, an Urban Adult Education Unit has been set up. The Unit continued to provide specialist support to Shramik Vidyapeeths in existence at Bombay, Ahmedabad and Delhi. Operational guidelines have also been provided for deve loping the programmes of the newly approved centres at Ban galore, Calcutta and Jamshedpur. Efforts were also initiated to convert all workers Social Education Institutes set up earlier at Indore and Nagpur on the lines of Shramik Vidyapeeth. Shramik Vidyapeeth, Delhi continued to function as a sub unit of the Directorate. Besides organising programmes for 166 education of workers in Delhi and New Delhi areas, this Shramik Vidyapeeth is also intended to serve as a laboratory for develop ing model of programmes and illustrative teaching-learning mate rials and extend specialist support to programme of education of workers implemented in urban areas. Through Shramik Vidya peeth several programmes tailored to the needs of different cate gories of workers were organised during the year. CHAPTER XI EDUCATION IN THE UNION TERITORIES Education in the Union Territories constitutes a special res ponsibility of the Central Government. The Territories of Goa, Daman and Diu, Pondicherry, Artinachal Pradesh and Mizoram have their own legislatures and exercise powers specified in the Government of Union Territories Act, 1963. Delhi has a Metro politan Council and an Executive Council which functions accor ding to the provisions of Delhi Administration Act, 1966. The other Territories, namely, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Chandi garh, Dadra and Nagar Haveli and Lakshdweep have no legisla tures. An account of the Educational facilities and activities during the. year in respect of each of the Union Territories is given in this chapter. A . A n d a m a n a n d N i c o b a r I s l a n d s The Directorate of Education, Andaman and Nicobar Islands continued to function under the administrative control of the Director of Education assisted by Education Officer (Principal, HQ), Assistant Director of Education, 6 Deputy Education Officers, 6 Assistant Inspectors of schools and heads of educa tional institutions. There are 235 educational institutions comprising 15 Pre Primary, 163 Junior Basic, 35 Senior Basic, 10 High schools and 10 Higher Secondary schools. There is a Teachers’ Training Institute for pre-Service training. For the University Education, there is a Post-Graduate College providing facilities in Arts, Science and Commerce streams at degree levels and in Political Science and English subjects at the Post-Graduate level. All the High/Higher Secondary schools are affiliated to the Central Board of Secondary Education, New Delhi. The Go vernment College is affiliated to Punjab University, Chandigarh. 167 168 The total number of pupils at all levels was 35,994 whose levelwise breakup is given below : — State of Education Boys Girls Total i. Pre-Primary stage . . . 628 524 1,152 2. Primary stage . . . . 13,125 10,790 23,915 3. Mid die stage . . . . 4,415 2,986 7,401 4. High/Higher Secondary stage . 1,761 1,269 3,030 5. T T I ...... 24 26 50 6. C o l l e g e ...... 275 171 446 Total . . . . 20,228 15,766 35,994 The total number of teachers was 1844 of which 1629 were trained. Stage of Education Male Female Total No. trained 1. Pre-Primary . . . 4 35 39 12 2. Primary .... 623 436 1059 984 3. Middle .... 320 138 458 400 4. HigH/Higher Secondary . 179 55 234 218 5. T T I ...... 11 4 15 15 6. College .... 31 8 39 Total .... 1168 676 1844 1629 Medium of instruction At the Primary stage instruction is imparted through Hindi, Urdu, Bengali, Tamil, Telugu, Malayalam, Nicobarce and Eng lish; at the middle stage through Hindi, Urdu, Bengali, Tamil, Telugu and English; at the High school stage through Hindi, Urdu, Bengali, Tamil and English and a't the collegiate level through Hindi and English. 169 The annual Plan allocation for 1978-79 was 100.00 lakhs of which scheme wise allocation is as under :— Scheme Allocation (Rs. in lakhs) 1. Elementary Education ...... 53.000 2. Secondary Education ...... 25.000 3. Teachers’ Training ...... 2.700 4. University Education ...... 7.000 5. Adult Education ...... 0.700 6. Physical Education & Games ...... 0.550 7. Youth Services (Scouts & Guides) . . . . . 0.150 8. N S S ...... 0.100 9. Direction and Administration ...... 4.450 10. Art & Culture ...... 1.350 11. S.I.E...... 1.000 12. Other programmes ...... 2.000 13. Development of Hindi ...... 2.000 Total ...... 100.000 Financial concessions Tuition free education up to the Higher Secondary stage., free midday-meals up to class VIII @20 paise per pupil per day, free Travel concession to students attending schools from beyond 4 kms and studying in secondary stage, free books to poor pupils whose parents income is less than Rs. 4000 per annum, up to Higher Secondary stage, free Text books and stationery to all tribal pupils up to Higher Secondary stage, hostel stipend to boar ders @ Rs. 60 at school stages and Rs. 75 at collegiate level, free set of uniform to poor pupils whose parents income is less than Rs. 2500/- per annum, post higher secondary scholarships to local students for such courses for which facilities are not available in the existing Government college for higher education on the mainland are some of the concessions offered to students. 170 During the year 1978-79, 10 new Primary schools were opened, 2 existing Primary schools were upgraded to Senior Basic Schools, 2 existing Senior Basic Schools were raised to High schools and existing high schools were raised to + 2 stage under the new pattern of education. In addition to above additional sections in different media were introduced according to require- guidance to physical Education Teachers of schools. Teachers’ Training Towards training of teachers a sum of Rs. 50 per month is paid as stipend to each teacher trainee. In service courses for refreshing elementary teachers in Science and humanities were organised. The II year Summer-cum-Correspondence course for B. Ed. was conducted with the help of the Regional College of Education for 224 inservice teachers. University Education During the year, Post Graduate classes in English and Political Science subjects were added in the existing Government college. 6 Lecturers, Driver, Library Assistant/Attendant and 2 class IV were appointed. Aduit Education A State Level Committee for Adult Education was constituted. On 15th August, Adult Education Programme was launched. 24 adult education ccntres were started. The total number of adults enrolled in these centres was 862. A separate unit of Adult Education was constituted. An Assistant Education Officer, one Stenographer, one Lower Grade Clerk were appointed for organisation of Adult Education Programme. Textbooks Bureau During the year 1978-79, a Text-books Bureau was established in the Directorate with skeleton staff in the initial stage. The Board will arrange translation of NCERT books in Tamil, Telugu, Bengali and Malayala'm for elementary classes. State Institute of Education From the current academic session, the State Institute of Education has been started. The State Institute of Education will provide facilities of inservice education to all categories of 171 teachers in different subjects by organising seminars and work shops. Physical Education & Sports A post of Supervisor Physical Education has been created to promote Physical Education activities in schools and arrange guidance to Physical Education Teachers of schools. State and Zonal Libraries With a view to strengthening the State as well as Zonal Libraries, new posts have been created at different levels. Art and Culture It is proposed to appoint part-time teachers in Music, Dance and Drama in order to cater for the people of this multilingual territory. Remedial Teaching For the benefit of weak students, remedial teaching was arranged at 6 centres to help weaker students to bring them at par with other students in different subjects. A provision for remedial teaching has been made for 8 months in 6 centres. Supervised Study Centres 20 Supervised Study Centres are being opened at various places to provide coaching facilities to weaker students of middle classes in different subjects with the help of part-time Supervisors and teachers on a fixed monthly remuneration. Compartmental classes Compartmental classes were arranged for su:h students as were placed under compartment in the Secondary School Exami nation, 1978 to assist them to go through the compartmental examination. 172 Other Programmes B.Ed. Course—With the resource persons of the Regional College of Education Bhubaneswar, the second year course i.e. Summer-cum-Correspondence Course leading to the B. Ed. degree was organised for 224 inservice untrained teachers at Port Blair during th& vacation. 203 appeared of which 21 were placed in the first division, and 118 in second division. National Award for Nicobaree teacher Shri Fred Davidson a tribal Primary School Teacher was honoured with the National award for Teachers during 1978 from this territory by the Government of India, Ministry of Education. Senior Division NCC For the first time, Senior Division NCC has been introduced in schools in this territory. 51 cadets have been enrolled in three troops. Symposium on Library Development A symposium on the Growth and Development of Libraries in Andamans was organised on April 23, 1978 under the chair manship of the Chief Commissioner. Educational Broadcast for Classes X l-X il A consultative panel under the chairmanship of Director, All India Radio, Head, Radio & Television of the Central Institute of English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad, Chief Producer, Director-General of All India Radio and Principals of Higher Secondary schools was appointed to advise on the material for and presentation of educational programmes. Rock climbing 14 cadets, 8 from Army and 6 from Navy were deputed to Kerala for the rock climbing course. Symposium on Improvement of Educational Standard Symposia and workshops were conducted during the year on education and educational technology. 173 A team consisting of three officials namely Dr. R. P. Singhal, Chairman, Central Board of Secondary Education, Shri Baldev Mahajan, Commissioner, Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan and Shri Girdharilal, Deputy Secretary, Ministry of Education and Social Welfare visited these Islands from 12th to 19th September, 1978 to study the educational problems and suggest solutions. Income slab raised to Rs. 4,000 for free books The Government of India has raised the income limit to Rs. 4000 as against Rs. 2500 per annum for the supply of free text books to poor students from the current academic session. Continuing Education A meeting of the State Board of Continuing Education was held on 19-8-1978 to review the progress of Adult Education in which representatives of Central Board of Secondary Education, NCERT and Regional College of Education, Bhubaneswar participated. It was suggested that the programme of the terri tory should be adjusted to the needs of the territory and to develop its own material. Commendation certificates to teachers On Independence Day, 5 persons (one Principal, 1 Physical Education Teacher and 3 Primary school teichers received commendation certificates for their meritorious services in the field of Education. Inservicc Training for Hindi Teachers An inservice training programme was irganised in the Teachers’ Training Institute for Hindi teacheis teaching Hindi to non-Hindi students from 1-11-1978 in whch 20 Primary School Teachers participated. Inservice Training for Primary School Teacher; in Science Edu cation Another inservice training course was orgarjsed at Car Nico bar for primary school teachers teaching Science n Primary classes. 1 7 4 Refresher course for Scout masters A refresher course for scout masters and guide teachers was conducted at Diglipur from 7-11-1978 to 12-11-1978 in which 15 scout masters of North Andaman participated. B. A ru n a c h a l P radesh Allocation of Fund The funds allotted for Education Department during 1978-79 axe shown below :— (Rupees in Thousands) SI. Major Head 1978-79 No. Non- Plan Total plan 1. 277 Education . . . 19727 15200 34927 2. 288 Social Securities & Welfare 5060 650 5710 Position and Number of Educational Institutions Category wise SI. Type of Schools/Institutions 1978-79 Remarks No. 1. Pre-School Education Centres 35 According to the Government of India’s programme for the introduction of Pre Schooling. 2. Primary School . . . 8341 According to the Central School 3. Middle School . . . 107 !- Organisation Syllabus these J Schools are run. 4. Secondary School . . 221 As per the Central Board of Secondary Education rules 5 . Higher Secondary School V !* and regulations. (10+2) pattern. J 6. College .... 1 With both Humanities and Science streams up to the Degree level—affiliated to Gauhati University. 7. Teacher Training Institute 1 — 8. Central School . . 2 — 175 Besides these, Voluntary Organisation'! like Ramakrishna Mission organised 3 (three) schools (two Secondary and one Middle) atid Vivekananda Kendra Organisation organised 7 Pri mary Schools with the Government grant-in-aid in this Union Territory. Vocationalisation of Education Programme is introduced in a few selected Schools of Arunachal Pradesh. Enrolment Position Stage-wise (Provisional) Enrolment (1978-79) SI. Type of Institutions ------— ------—■ No. Boys Girls Total 1. Pre Primary ..... 925 480 1405 2. P r im a r y ...... 23181 9679 32860 3. M i d d l e ...... 9269 4263 13532 4. S e c o n d a r y ...... 5111 2307 7418 5. Higher Secondary .... 2377 1154 3531 6. C o l l e g e ...... 311 20 331 Other Educational Institutions SI. Item Number of No. Institutions/ Centres 1. National CaJet Corps (i) Senior Division Army Wings .... 1 (ii) Junior Division Army Wings .... 32 (iii) Junior Division Air Wings .... 1 (iv) Senior Division Girls Army Wings . . . 1 (v) Junior Division Girls Army Wings . . . 2 2. Rural Sports Centres ...... 10 3. National Phvsical Efficiency Drive Test Centres (N.P.E.D.) ' ...... 34 4. Adult Education Centres (including functional litreacy) Adult Education ...... 217 Farmers’ Functional Literacy Programme . . . 120 Non-formal E d u c a tio n ...... 71 5. Boy’s Scouts T r o o p s ...... 55 6. Girls’ Guide C om panies...... 20 7. Club P a c k s ...... 15 8. Bulbul flocks ...... 10 9. Girls’ H o s te l...... 47 176 Deputation/Scholarships/Stipends in PublicSainik Schools SI. Item No. of Rate of Stipends No. Students 1 2 3 4 A. FOR SCHOOL EDUCATION (i) R.I.M.C. (Dehradun) 1 Rs. 2,660/ (ii) Banasthali Vidyapith . 45 (school student) 5 (College Rs. 2,200/- P.A. student) (iii) Vivekananda Vidyalaya 1 Rs. 1,700/- P.A. Digboi, Assam. (iv) Sainik School, Goal- 13 (Old) Rs. 3,750/'- P.A. each para, Assam. (v) Sainik School, Imphal 31 (Old) Rs. 3,750/- P.A. each. (vi) Sainik School, Rewa 2 (Old) Rs. 3,750/- P.A. each. (vii) Sainik School, Imphal 8 (New) Rs. 4,000/- P.A. each. (viii) Post Graduate Students 27 (Old) Rs. 175/- P.M. each. Rs. 150/- Book Grant per Annum (Subsequent). 5 (New) Rs. 175/- Per Month each. Rs. 300/- Book Grant Per Annum. (ix) A.P. Stipend 204 Rs. 150/- Per Month each. Rs. 150/- Per Annum (Book Grant). (x) Post Matric Scholarship 43 As per Government of India’s rate. B. FOR GENERAL HIGHER EDUCATION I.A.S. Coaching in North 1 Rs. 75/- Per month as assis Eastern Hill University. ted by Government of India. Examination Results— 1978 SI. Name of Examination No. No. No. appeared passed 1. All India Higher Secondary Examination 16 9 2. All India Secondary Examination . 553 252 Ill In service Training in 1978-79 SI. Course No. of Name of the Training No. Teachers Institute 1. Short term English Training 96 Buniyadi Siksha Bhavan, Course. Changlang. Procurement/Supply of School Text Books During the year under report an amount of Rs. 9,04,095.00 was sanctioned and communicated to the District authorities to purchase Text books from authorised Publishers and Book sellers as per books prescribed by the N.C.E.R.T. and the Central Board of Secondary Education for the students of Arunachal Pradesh. The Schools are affiliated to this Board. Supply of Newspapers/Magazines/Periodicals Two sanctions—one amounting to Rs. 68,070.50 for Primary and Middle Schools and the other Rs. 12,272.00 for Secondary and Hhigher Secondary Schools for procurement of Newspapers and Periodicals have been, accorded. An amount ot Rs. 40,774.00 was also sanctioned to the 19 (nineteen) different Secondary/Higher Secondary Schools as a subsidy for printing of school magazine during the year under report. Developmental and Expansion Programmes Target (1978-79) SI.I t e m s ------Remarks No. Physical Financial 1 2 3 4 5 (Rupees in lakhs) Elementary Education 1. Opening of Pre-School 14 5. 31 14 Schools Education Centre. sanctioned. 2. Establishment of Primary 75 100.83 75 Schools Schools. sanctioned. 3. Upgradation of Primary 10 43.03 10 Schools School to Middle School. upgraded. 4. Strengthening of Primary 300 G/T 13.30 300 Graduate and Middle Schools. Teachers sanctioned. 178 1 2 3 4 5 5. Administration and Super 20 A.D.E.O.S. 4.24 vision of Elementary Edu 4 L.D.C. cation. 4 U.D.C. 2 D.E.O. 6. Grant-in-aid . . . 6 30.00 Total 196.71 Secondary Education 7. Opening of Girls’ Hostels 10 9.55 10 Girls’ School sanctioned. 8. Upgradation of Middle 40.82 — School to High Schools. 9. Strengthening of Secondary 6.57 —' Education. 10. Opening of Sports Schools 1 1.51 — 11. Opening of New Higher 1 3.12 Sanctioned School at Itanagar. 12. Vocationalisation of Edu 6 Senior cation. Teachers Total 64.83 Direction and Administration 13. Establishment of State 1 2.04 — Institute of Education. 14. Organisational Set up . 1.27 — 15. Establishment of Board of 1 0.46 School Education. Total 3.77 Other Educational Schemes 16. Opening of Adult Education 42 2.00 Sanctioned. Centres. 17. Scouts & Guides . . (1) Scout 4 "11 (2) Guide 7 0.95 Sanctioned. (3) Cub 15 (4) Bulbul 10 J 18. N.C.C. Activities . . 0.42 19. Sports, Games & Physical 3.32 Sanctioned. Education. Total 6.69 179 University Education 20. Strengthening of J. N. 15.00 College. 21. Establishment of New 5.00 College. Total 20.00 Recruitment of Teaching Staff si. Categories of teachers Existing New No. No. of Recruitment Sanctioned Posts 1. Senior Teacher . . . 122 4 2. Assistant Head Master . . 4 Nil 3. Junior Teacher (Graduate Teacher) 1262 303 4. Assistant Teachers Grades ‘A’ & ‘B’ 960 45 5. Assistant Teachers Grade ‘C’ . 96 Nil 6. P.T.I...... 18 Nil 7. Librarians .... 18 Nil 8. Teachers for Agriculture . . 4 1 9. Teachers for Wood Work . . 10 Nil Gazetted Posts 1. D.P.1...... 1 — Z Jt. D.P.1...... 1 — 3. D.D.P.X...... 3 — 4. A.D.P.1...... 4 1 Post newly created but yet to be filled in. 5. Principal, J. N. College . . . 1 —• 6. Principal, B.S.B. .... 1 — 7. Principal, Higher Secondary Schools . 7 1 for New Ita- nagar School. 8. D .E .O .s ...... 8 2 newly crea ted but yet to be filled in. 9. Lecturers, J. N. College . . . 39 — 10. Headmasters, Secondary Schools . 22 — 11. Vice Principals, Higher Secondary S c h o o l s ...... 7 — 1'6 ESW /78— 13 180 C. C h a n d ig a rh The Union Territory of Chandigarh continued to make rapid progress in the field of Education during the period under report. Following the heavy increase in the work load of the Depart ment, the Administration placed the Department under two Direc tors of Public Instruction, one for Colleges and General Adminis tration and the other for Schools. Budget The Budget of the Department increased as under : (In lakhs) 1977-78 1978-79 N o n - P l a n ...... , 128.75 259.84 Plan 52.74 66.00 Enrolment The enrolment at various stages increased as under .__ 1974-75 1978-79 Class I—V ...... 34.700 39.100 VI V I I I ...... 14.700 19,950 IX X I ...... 8,000 10.100 New School Chandigarh being the Head-quarters of the neighbouring two States of Punjab and Haryana and of the Regional Offices of the Central Government and established Business concerns, it is expanding rapidly in all spheres. New Sectors are developing fast. This development has led to the opening and upgrading of new schools in Chandigarh during the last 23 years. In the year 1978-79 in Rural Areas, seven primary schools were upgraded to the middle standard and one middle school was upgraded to the high standard. In the urban areas are a Model Primary school in Sector-31 exclusively for the Children of Army person nel and 3 primary schools in Sector 34, 47, and 37. 181 Building A sum of Rs. 10.00 lakh has been provided for extension of school buildings in the rural/urban areas. In the year 1978-79 construction of school buildings iu Sec tors 32, 34 and 26 Transit Site has been undertaken. Apart from this, funds have been provided for the construction of school buildings in sector-40 and for additional wings in the Government Middle School Sector-32 and Government Primary School Sector-35. It is expected that by the end of 1978-79, all these buildings shall be handed over to the Education Depart ment. Incentive for Children of weaker sections of Society (i) Attendance Scholarships During the year 1978-79, attendance scholarships to girl students have been increased from 500 to 1000 and a sum of Rs. 4800 has been earmarked. (ii) Mid-day meals Under the Mid-day Meals programme, children upto class V have been covered from all rural and labour colonies and class I to IV in Urban Government School and from Nursery to Class II in recognised schools. The number of beneficiaries has increased from 14500 to 20500 approximately. (iii) Free stationery and books is being given to 1000 children from the weaker sections of Society. Curriculum Improvement (i) An Uniform pattern of education which was introduced in class IX during 1976-77 was extended to class X during 1977 78. Since the neighbouring States of Punjab and Haryana had not switched over to the new pattern of education, the starting of class XI under 10 + 2 pattern in Union Territory Schools was deferred during 1978-79. To solve this problem, class XI (Pre University) has been opened in all the existing Higher Secondary Schools. The Punjab University, Chandigarh shall be conduct ing the examinations of the Xlth class students alongwith Pre University classes attached to colleges. 182 Reading Rooms During 1978-79 two Reading rooms have been sanctioned and are functioning effectively in village Kajheri and Sector-26. Adult Education Adult Education is being given more impetus during 1978 79. It is proposed to start 150 Adult Education Centres in Chandigarh. Presently the 77 Adult Education Centres are functioning which are run in collaboration with PWD/Health Departments and Nehru Yuvak Kendra. Besides 77 Centres, Voluntary organisations are also running 31 Adult Education Centres. The number of these centres is likely to increase upto 150 during 1978-79. For effective supervision and control over these agencies/ centrcs an Adult Education cell is being set up which will be placed 'under a Deputy Director. University Education Besides the normal expansion, additional funds have been sanctioned for strengthening libraries/laboratories of Government Colleges. Sports and Youth Welfare (i) Rs. 1.00 lakh has been sanctioned for the purchase of boats for the Lake Club, Chandigarh. (ii) Rs. 2.09 lakhs have been sanctioned for the Badminton Hall anti Tennis Stadium. Art and Culture A National Portrait Gallery has been opened in the heart of the City in order to make it accessible to the residents of this territory. Library facilities are being strengthened. It is pro posed to start mini-libraries. Additional funds have been pro vided for strengthening the Central State Library and Mobile Library. Middle School Examination The Middle School Examination has also been introduced for students of Model schools in the Union Territory, Chandigarh. 183 D. D e l h i Educational Facilities To cope with the ever increasing growth of student popula tion in Delhi, the Administration opens schools every year. Wherever necessary, new sections are also added in existing schools. This year the Administration has opened 5 middle schools and 23 Secondary schools. The tables given below reflect total number of schools in Delhi. Middle Secondary Senior Seconclary Agency Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys (iirls Total Government . 159 91 250 78 56 134 115 145 290 Aided . . 16 12 28 27 12 39 65 54 19 Unaided . . 33 y 41 23 7 30 18 15 33 N.D.M.C. . 8 2 10 2 2 4 Centre . . 13 ! 3 T o t a l . 216 113 329 128 75 203 243 216 159 Enrolment in thousan 1 1977-78 Agency Boys Girls Total Primary. . 270 223 493 Middle . . t60 118 27* Secondary . 81 56 s 37 Senior Seconder; 27 19 46 Education through Correspondence Courses is being provided to such students who cannot attend regular schools. J2 adult schools ihave also been set up for such students. At present Jibout 1400 students are getting' education through correspondence course and about 6500 students are in evening schools. This year 3 of the 12 adults schools have been upgraded to class X ll U> give more facilities to those students who are not able to take advan tage of regular schooling but want to continue their studies. Also + 2 stage has been introduced in Correspondence Course. Since it is not economically expedient to open secondary schools in every village, free transport facilities have been pro vided to girl students in rural areas to enable them to travel to 184 the nearest school. At present 2700 girls from 112 villages are getting benefit from this facility. Maintenance gratot is provided to all Colleges sponsored by the Administration. Building grant to the extent of 50 per cent of the total expenditure is provided. Improvement in the quality of Education F'iie S.l.E. and Science Branch attempt to improve the quality oi education by improving the quality of teaching by orienting teachers by organising suitable inservice education programmes, Semirjars workshops, and demonstration teaching. Conferences are organis'd in different subjects with a view to bringing about quali tative improvement in the teaching of non-Science and Science based sujccts. I lie workshops are conducted to re-orient teachers in new contents of courses and methodology in the teaching of new subjects under the new pattern of education and on the basis of re\>-ed curriculum. As during the previous years the Science Branch conducted JSTS Examination in which 100 candidates were declared successful. Science fairs were arranged to develop the talents of young scientists. Educational Administration and Planning Recognising the crucial importance of the role of the District Eduction Officer as an 'administrative planning, professional leader, bridge builder between the school and community and also obscr.-ng that there arc inherent weaknesses in the present set up c! administration, the Delhi Administration organised two six days training courses for 40 education and deputy education officers with the assistance of National Staff College for Education al Administration and Planning. 4th All India Educational Surveys Viewing with concern the High rate of dropouts even before completing first step of education despite continuing rise in the percentage of enrolment at different levels of education during the la1-- 2 decades, the Administration is conducting 4th All Indi. Educational Survey at the request of Ministry of Educa tion The preparatory work has been completed under the exper guidance of one Survey Officer and the task is likely to be u mpleted within 6 months. 185 Adult Literacy Programme Acknowledging the fact that even after 25 years of indepen dence, half of the illterates of the world live in India and the per centage of literacy is very low i.e. as per 1971 census, the total literacy is 56.6 per cent (63.71 male and 47.75 female) parti cularly the percentage of rural literacy is 23.74, the administration has launched a big adult literacy programme and propose to spend 50 lacs during the current year. A separate unit has been esta blished for the purpose. The main aim of this programme is to increase the number of literates in the Union Territory of DelhL The illiterates in the age group 15-35 will be helped to aeqliiiic literacy skills which may enable them to read and write and Unis becomes useful citizens. This programme hopes to increase the social awareness of the people and help them to im prove their living conditions and to lend maximum possible hand in the huge task before the country. Students’ Welfare Monetary incentives arc given to students belonging to poor and backward classes for their meritorious performance, scholar ship worth Rs. 92 lacs have been given benefiting 72000 students. Stipend to all students belonging to SC/ST is being given which amounts to Rs. 20 lacs in total. Book Bank Book Banks already established in Government and Govern ment aided schools have further been strengthened by adding books worth Rs. 5 lacs during the year. Students whose parents’ income does not exceed Rs. 500/- get benefit of these book-banks. Educational Tours The Administration provided funds to the tune of Rs. 5000/ for conducting educational tours to the various parts of the country so as to strengthen the feeling of openness among students of rent parts of the country. Study Centres & Camps Those students who do not have suitable accommodation and light arrangements at their homes are provided facilities at 30 study centres in city area. 4 camps in rural areas also provided opportunity for study. They are given suitable guidance by the teacbcrs. 186 Funds to the tune of Rs. 10 lacs have been earmarked for the purchase of uniforms for its free distributions among the poor students of weaker sections of society. To improve the physical fitness of students and encouragc healthy growth, 3 schemes are being implemented on which the administration lias spent Rs. 6.00 lacs. The unit established for the purpose organised competitions at Zonal/District level in different games and sports. It also encouraged out-of-sctiool players by giving them annual grants and certificates. Teachers’ Welfare State Awards are given to 10 teachers who have rendered meritorious service in the field of Education. For the benefit of students desiring admission in Class XI after passing the Boards’ Examination of Class X, a special admission cell under the Assistant Director of Education was set up to give guidance to students and lend every possible help in getting admission in Delhi Schools. Provision of School Building 13 new Higher Secondary School buildings have been com pleted and 18 buildings are under construction. Construction of 8 new buildings will be standi during the year. Extension to 6 school buildings have been completed and extension to 7 buildings are being carried out. The construction of 515 tem porary class rooms will be started this year. These will rephcc tents. Important Committee Examination Committees The Directorate of Education in consultation with the Ceiurai Board of Secondary Education iLcided to hold examination for class XI which was previously to be held by the Central Board of Secondary Education. Thus an examination Committee has been set up under the Chairmanship of Joint Director of Educa tion, and members which looked i.iier he conduct of examination for class XT. 187 Autonomous bodies There are 3 autonomous bodies under the Directorate of Education viz. Sahitya Kala Parishad- Delhi Council ot Sports and Textbook Bureau. Sahitya Kala Parishad organises Dance and Music programme and other cultural programmes in the Capital. It also give grants to the recognised/noted poets/ writers for their services in the field of art and culture and cele brates days of national importance by organising various cul tural programme. Delhi Sports Councils perform the same func tions in the field of games or sports. The Textbook Bureau takes up the responsibilities for the publication of textbooks prescribed for primary and middle classes in Government schools. It also undertakes the work of distribution of paper received from the Government of India at concessional rate among the publishers for the publications of textbooks and exercise books at cheaper rates. (Rupees in lukhv Plan Non-P Ian Budget 1978-79 .... 989.77 HW 20 lixpenditure up to D-xvmhcr ..... 558.21 2?>2i This year (1978-79) being the last year of 5th Plan and also first year of the 6th Plan all committed liability shall be transferred to Non-Plan from next year. However, to extend further the schooling facilities and for this, a provision of 1 erore has been made under Plan during 1979-80. E. D adra & N agar H a v eli The Union Territory of Dadra and Nagar Haveli is very small territory having 72 villages with a total population of about 80,000 out of which 88 per cent population is of adiv&sis. There are only 157 Primary Schools teaching from Standard I to VT1 and 4 High Schools teaching from Standard VII to X amd one Higher Secondary School started from June, 1976 with three wings viz. Arts, Science and Commerce. There are 11 Pre-Primary Schools run by the Administration. 188 Enrolment Boys Girls Total Pre-Primary Schools . . 11 287 264 551 Primary Schools (Government) 144 8367 5081 13448 Private Recognised Mission Primary Schools . . . 13 802 461 1263 High Schools . . . 4 557 302 859 Higher Secondary School . 1 141 51 192 The territory is following the prescribed syllabus of our neigh bouring State of Gujarat. New Syllabus has been introduced in illI the Primary Schools. A seminar was organised in the summer vacation during the year to give orientation to the teachers. Jn order to prepare the students for technical and vocational subjects this Administration has introduced the following subjects in all the secondary schools of the territory : 1. Workshop Technology, 2. Element of Electrical and Mechanical Enigneering. 3. Engineering Drawing. Vocational Subjects 1. Agriculture 2. Typewriting 3. Tailoring 4. Drawing. In short all the Secondary Schools have been vocationalised as per the instruction of the Government of India. One Higher Secondary School is running at Silvassa the capi tal of this territory, on the pattern 10 + 2 + 3 adopted in Gujarat State In order to prepare teachers in the teaching of the new 'Vllabas. three teachers were deputed for the training of Higher Secondary Subjects in Gujarat State. Tbc-re is no facility for Higher Education in this small terri- iory However, Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes as well as Lower Income Group Students are being awarded post-:natric 189 scholarships. In addition to this, those students who leave study before the SSC class and desire to pursue professional courses are being granted Pre-Matric Scholarship. TTie number of such students is on the increase. Besides, the Government of India is allocating seats for various courses like Medical, Engineering, Agriculture, Petro-chemical, Pharmacy and Veterinary Science. The applications for the said reserved seats are invited and eli gible students are being sent every year. In the field of Elementary Education, this Administration provides facility of hostels to all Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and Economically Backward Class students. 655 inmates were benefited during the year. There are 9 such Social Welfare Hostels including 2 girls hostels and one Ashram Type School being run by the Administration, in which free lodging and board ing are provided to the inmates. So far as Physical Education is concerned, the department has introduced Physical Education in all Primary, Secondary and Higher Secondary Schools and this subject is made compulsory. Adequately qualified teachers have been provided. There are two troops of NCC cadets established in two Secondary Schools, each troop having 125 cadet strength including girl cadets. In short due importance has been given by the Administration to Physical Education in all the schools for which adequate budget provision is also made. Enrolment of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes Scheduled Scheduled Castes Tribes At Primary l e v e l ...... 457 11,855 At Secondary level ...... 40 310 At Higher Secondary level . . . . 7 49 Promotion oi Games & Sports A multipurpose Olympic Stadium ground is provided by the Administration at Silvassa, the capital of Dadra and Nagar Haveli. Different games and sports are being organised by the school students and youths. The Annual Sports Competition of school students is being organised on the same ground. Moreover, as proposed in the Annual Plan the Open sports competition will 190 also be held from this year. The activities of sports and game.-, are carried out in all the schools of the territory. UNICEF Science Education Programme UNICEF Science Education Programme has been launchoi in 60 Primary Schools and 90 Primary Teachers have bee;-, trained. One trained Science Teacher of High School has been appointed as Science Supervisor under the programme. 50 Ku- boxes are received and distributed to the 50 Primary SchooK Necessary guidance lor the use Kit-boxes has been given to the concerned teachers. One Training Camp was also organised a' Rakholi Ashramshala from 16-10-78 to 27-10-78 for imparting training to more teachers. 125 Primary School Teachers have been trained in this training camp. The classes were conducted by two experts from Science Education Unit of Gujarat State 4 High School Science Teachers have given the lectures and practi cal work. 45 more Kit-boxes have been received shortly. One Supervisory vehicle is also allotted to this territory for be^cr implementation of the programme and supervision. Non-Formal/Adult Education Programme The Adult Education Programme has been implemented n the territory from 2nd October, 1978 by opening a Centre at Randha Under the programme, in all 30 centres have been started with the enrolment of 992 adults in the age group of 15— 35. The e classes are being run at night lime by the school tcachcrs or village youths. The formal & Non-formal education centres have been merged into Adult Education Centres. Lear/sin" materials arc being supplied to the adults free of cost. One Supervisor for supervision of adult education classes has noer appointed from the Primary Tcacher and one more Supervisor will be appointed shortly. School Buildings This Administration has taken keen interest to provide ade quate facilities of Government buildings for schools wherever possible. There arc 144 Primary Schools run by this Adminis tration. out of which 75 schools arc having pucca building and remaining schools are running in the private rented houses. During the ensuing Sixth Five Year Plan all the remaining schools will be provided with pucca building with residential accommo dation for teachers. All the four High S c h o o ls with Higiser Secondary School is having its pucca schools btiilding with ade quate facilities of Laboratory and Workshops. 191 In order to provide the adivasi students with facilities to study Agriculture and Animal Husbandry this Administration has started Agriculture as a vocational subject in selected Primary Schools and all four High Schools. Educational Facilities 1. Free Education is provided up to Higher Secondary stage in this territory. 2. Free Mid-day-meals are being provided to all the Students of pre-primary and primary schools. 3. Free supply of text-books, note-books, slate-pen-pencils, to all the Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes and other economically backward students. 4. Free supply of cloth to Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes and EBC students of Primary and High Schools. 5. There are 9 Social Welfare hostels being run by the Administration, in which free lodging and board ing facilities being provided to the inmates of the hostels. Only Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes and Economically Backward Class students are given admission. Basic Education Most of the Primary Schools have Spinning and Weaving and Agriculture subjects as crafts which are being taught from Stan dard V to VII. The simple craft of making objects and articles from clay and thick paper is also being taught to the pupils of Standard I to IV. There are three Primary' Schools each in Silvassa, Naroli and Dadra where Carpentry, Sewing, Embroidery etc. acre being taught to the students in addition to Spinning, Weaving and agriculture subjects. Applied Nutrition Programme There are 11 Primary Schools where applied nutrition pro gramme is being run by the Block Department of this Adminis tration. These schools grow vegetables, paddy, fruits etc. The vegetable is utilised by the pupils. Friiit bearing trees are also planted during monsoon season. 192 Teachers’ Welfare Teachers’ Day was celebrated on 5th September, 1978 and an amount of Rs. 2,685.35 p. was collected towards the Teachsrs Welfare Fund. F. L a k s h a d w e e p School Education The number of educational institutions in the Union Territory during the year of report is 39, which includes 17 Junior Basic Schools 9 Nursery Schools, 5 Senior Basic Schools, 7 High Schools and one Junior College. The enrolment in different stages are shown below : Nursery Schools 682 Primary Schools 8325 High (Secondary) Schools 1132 Junior College 226 Besides the above, 156 students are studying for different Post- Matric/degree/professional courses in mainland. Special facilities for Girl’s Education Two Senior Basic Schools are functioning exclusively for girls. Separate divisions for girls are functioning in High School Sections at Kalpeni- Hostels are also provided for girls at the high school and college levels where free boarding and lodging are given. Vocational Education Typewriting is taught in four High Schools and in two High Schools Fisheries Technology is taught. In Five High Schools paper machine craft and clay modelling are tafught. All the seven High Schools have facilities for needle work and tailoring for girls by appointing four more needle work teachers, in four high schools this year. Scholarships and Grants The Scheme of granting Scholarships to students of high schools and College was continued. Students deserving higher 193 education on mainland are sent there and they are either given scholarship and lump sum grants or if they are admitted in appro ved hostels actual mess dues are sanctioned by the Administration The total number of Scholarship holders this year is shown be low :— High School 769 Junior College 31 On mainland 156 For those students who come from one island where facilities for higher education are not available to another island, hostel accom modation is provided free. In case due to shortage of accomoda tion, admission to the hostel is refused, they are given scholarships at the approved rates. Books and writing materials are given to all students free. Students upto seventh standard arc given free midday meals- Facilities for teacher training There is no Teacher Training Institution or any Technical Institution in this Territory. Candidates for these courses are sent to different Institutions on, mainland. Special facilities > All the inhabitants of these islands are classified as Scheduled Tribes and all the facilities are meant for them. Students’ Tour Students of the final year classes (Xth Standard and second year of Pre-degree course) were taken on educational tours to various places on mainland. Sports, NCC and Scouts and Guides Supply of Sports articles were made to all schools. Inter-J.B. School Sports meet was conducted in all islands. National Physical Efficiency Tests were conducted. High School, Minicoy represented this Union Territory in the Subroto Mukherjee Cup Football Tournament at New Delhi during December 1978. Addi tional Playgrounds were acquired at Kavaratti and Androth. Five Junior Divisions and One Senior Division NCC troops continued functioning. Besides, one more Junior Division NCC troop was 194 opened at High School at Agatti. Nine Scouts troops and one girl guide started functioning. Social Education Adult literacy Centres continued functioning in all islands. Under the National Adult Education Programme, additional Cen tres were opened on 2nd October 1978. Besides literacy classes, women are given training in. tailoring at the Mahilasamajams under this programme. Nine Reading room-cum-libraries in nine islands and one Central Library at Kavaratti also functioned dur ing the year. Library books, Magazines and Newspapers were supplied to all libraries. The State Social Welfare Advisory Board continued function ing. Under this programme, 7 Balawadis and one Boarder Area Project have been started. The Board conducted one seminar of women to train them in, leadership. Student amenities Textbooks, Writing materials, Mid-day meals were supplied to all pupils free. Scouts were supplied with free uniforms. Other programmes For the first time in the history of these islands some students were sent to Junior Technical School in Kerala. Also ten candidates were sent for Fishing second hand course and Engine Driver's course at Central Institute of Fisheries Technology at Cochin during the year. G. M izoram As on 17 January, 1979 the enrolments at the primary, middle, secondary and college stages were as shown below7 : — Primary Middle Secondary College Stage Stage Stage Stage Enrolments .... 83,408 24,035 14,129 3,495 195 Buildings While one institution at the secondary stage and me at the college stage have a pucca building, 361 buildings at tie primary stage, 185 at the middle stage, 90 at the secondary stige and 3 at the college stage are semi-pucca buildings. 153 primary schools, 49 middle schools and 25 secondary schools ire housed in tents. Some buildings are under construction. Budget The budget allocation made for 1978-79 and tic amount utilised for the construction of buildings at the various stages of education are as below :— (Rupees in housands) Budget Amount Allocation j Utilised Primary...... 13,709 26,718 M iddle...... 11,890 11,900 Secondary/high Schools...... 9,749 10,078 College...... 2,360 3,020 The question of switching over to the new pattern o Educa tion is still under consideration. The earlier target of 95% set for achieving universaisation of education, by 1980 for the age group 6— 11 years is beiig revised with a view to achieving 100 per cent universalisati A Polytechnic is proposed to be started during 1978-'9. 16 ESW/78—14 196 H. P o n d ich erry Education in this Union Territory during 1978-79 has recor ded commendable achievements. The physical targets set out under various schemes have been achieved in full in most of the schemes. Two Pre-primary Schools (One French Medium and One English Medium) have been opened in Pondicherry. Two posts of Balasevika and two posts of conductress were created. Five new Primary Schools have been opened. Twenty six next higher standards and nine additional classes haive been opened at the Primary stage of Education. The enrolment at the Primary stage is 72310. The additional enrolment during the year under report is as follows : G i r l s ...... 31,740 (90%) B o y s ...... 40,570 (106%) T o t a l ...... 72,310 (103 %) Two Primary Schools have been up-graded into Middle Schools. Two next higher standards and two additional classes have been opened at the Middle stage of Education. To run these classes 5 posts of Secondary Grade Teacher have been crea ted. Two posts of school Assistant Grade-IL six posts of Tamil Pandit Grade-II, one post of Hindi Pandit Grade-II, three posts of Craft Teacher, three posts of Physical Education Teacher, four posts of Peon, five posts of Watchman, one post of Sanitary' Helper and two posts of Sanitary Assistant have been created. Most of these posts have been filled up. The total enrolment at the Middle stage of Education is 28641. The details of addi tional enrolment achieved during this year are as follows : B o y s ...... 1188 85 % G i r l s ...... 682 51 % Total ...... 1870 68% To achieve the enrolment target fixed, incentive schemes viz. supply of Mid-day Meals to poor children studying in I—V Standard and free supply of stationery articles like school bags, 197 slates, pencil, elc. to about 22570 poor children studying in i to V Standard is continued. As regards Lower Secondary Education, 3 new High Schools (One Girls High School and Two Mixed High Schools)have been opened. Six additional classes and one next higher standard have also been opened in the High Schools. One post of Head master Grade-I, ten posts of School Assistant Grade-II, ten posts of Language Pandit Grade-1, ten posts of Assistant Librarian Grade-Ill, two posts of Drawing Master, three posts oi' Sewing Mistress, two posts of Music Teacher, two posts of Physical Edu cation Teacher, four posts of Laboratory Attender, two posts of Lower Division Clerk, four posts of Sanitary Helper, four posts of Sanitary Assistant, three posts of Watchman, and one post of Peon have been created for the High Schools. The present enrolment of students at the Secondary stage of Education is 12889. Additional enrolment achieved under this stage during this year is indicated below : B o y s ...... 8778 46% G i r l s ...... 4111 21% T o t a l ...... 12889 31°,; Science clubs have been started in eight more schools in addition to thirty two clubs already opened. This Administration have formulated a master plan on “Uni versalisation of Elementary Education” following the guideline of the Ministry of Education. The Planning Commission has approved an outlay of Rs. 1.70 Crores for the elementary educa tion for the entire sixth five year plan. This Administration have proposed to achieve 100 per cent enrolment of age group 11—14 also by the end of sixth plan. To improve the professional competence of teachers, refresher/ reorientation courses have been conducted. A seminar on deve loping concepts relating to Universalisation of Primary, Educa tion and Functional Adult Literacy for Primary School Teachers in Rural areas was conducted at Karaikal from 12-10-78 to 14-10-78. The programme was conducted in collaboration with Field Adviser, NCERT, Madras. Eight Graduate Teachers were deputed to attend the orientation programme of the new staff of State Institute of Science Education in Science at the Department 198 of State Educational Research and Training, Bangalore from 6-9-78 to 16-9-78. A one day seminar on “condensed lesson plan" for the benefit of Heads of Secondary and Higher Secondary Institutions was arranged on 7th September, 1978 at Pondicherry in which 45 Heads of Institutions participated. The Field Advi ser, NCERT, Madras, organised the seminar. Two French Teachers have been deputed to attend a refresher course in French at the Centre International d’etuds Pedagogiques under the Indo-French Cultural Exchange Programme. A refresher course for the benefit of all French Teachers was held from 17-4-78 to 24-4-78 at Pondicherry. An exhibition on linguistics was also conducted. Three Principals of Higher Secondary Schools where vocational courses have been introduced were depu ted to attend the High level Seminar on Vocational Education in the + 2 system held at Madras. Nine Teachers have been deputed to attend the Orientation Course under the scheme “Propagation of Culture among college and school students” organised by the Department of Culture, Government of India from 22-11-78 to 19-12-78 at new school, Kurusukuppam, Pondicherry. One hundred Secondary Grade Teachers working in Primary schools (70 from Pondicherry and 30 from Karaikal) were given orien tation training in Primary Science from 16-10-78 to 14-11-78. A Workshop on “selected concepts in Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Mathematics” was conducted from 28-11-78 to 2-12-78 at Calve College. Pondicherry which forty Graduate Teachers attended. Seven Government High Schools, (five in Pondicherry, two in Karaikal) have been upgraded into Higher Secondary Schools. Besides Higher Secondary Courses have also been introduced in two Women’s Colleges in Pondicherry and Karaikal. In addition to the Government Institutions, four private Institutions have also been permitted to conduct +2 courses. This is the first year of the two years Higher Secondary Course in Pondicherry and Karaikal regions of this Union Territory when the new pattern (10 + 2) of education has been implemented during 1978-79. The enrolment of students in the Higher Secondary Courses is as follows : — Boys Girls Total Government Higher Secondary Schools . 1100 499 1599 Private Higher Secondary Schools . . 203 75 283 Totai . . . . 1308 574 1882 199 The Educational facilities in ihe Colleges/Polytechnic have been expanded by providing laboratory materials in order to im prove the standard of Education. Tlie following new degree/ Post Graduate Courses have been started. B.Sc., (Physics) \ Arignar Amu Government Arts College. B.Sc., (zoology)_/ Karaikal. B.Sc., (Botany) Avvaiyar Government College for Karaikal. B. Com. . . Government Arts College, Yanarn. M.L. . . Government Law College, Pondicherry. 150 awards of Pondicherry State Post Matric Scholarship, 3 awards of National Scholarship for the children of School Teachers, 18 awards of National Scholarships and 18 awards of National Loan scholarships are being sanctioned to help the poor and meritorious students to prosecute their higher studies. The scholarship scheme for political sufferers, the Scheme of Student Aid fund in the Colleges and the Merit cum Means scholarship scheme have been continued in Secondary Schools. 250 merit prizes at the rate of Rs. 10/- per student and 175 merit cum means scholarship at the rate of Rs. 100/ per student per annum is being sanctioned. Two more high schools have been selected to introduce ihe Work Experience Programme. Interior Decoration and Book Binding are the Crafts selected during 1978-79. Two posts of Junior Instructor and two posts of Attender were created under this scheme. Physical Education schemes like, Play Festival, Youth Festi val, Childrens’ Rally, Inter Schools competition etc., have been continued. Seventeen new Non-formal Educational Centres and ten Far mers Functional Literacy Centres have been started during 1978-79. The National Adult Education Programme was also launched on, 2nd October, 1978. 70 new1 Adult Education Cen tres have been started under this scheme. A separate cell headed by the Deputy Director of Education has been set up in the Direc torate of Education to deal with all matters connected with Adult Education. The National Service Scheme made strides with a student strength of 600 and 300 for normal activities and special cam ping programme respectively. 200 The Public Libraries have been strengthened by addition of books. Twelve new branch libraries will be opened and 12 posts of Assistant Librarian Grade-111 will be created to look after the new libraries. A Book fair was held under the auspices of the Romain Rolland Library iii the Library premises for ten days. The Jawaharlal Bhavan has been provided with additional facilities to function satisfactorily. Eight children of the Bal Bhavan got prizes in the VIII All India Child Art Exhibition con ducted by Navarang Chitrakala Niketan, Guntur. 1. G oa , D am an and D r ; Enrolment Middle Secondary Higher College Stage Stage Secondary Stage Stage 1,18.953 65.238 34,525 5,965 6,025 Staffing Pattern (Tcacher/'Pupil Ratio) P mary Stage Middle Secondary College Stage Stage Stage ! :30 1:16 I:'6 Buildings (Stages) Primary Middle Secondary College Puce,! . 89! 233 Kachcha TenK etc 201 Budget Provision (Rs. in lakhs) 1977-78 1978-79 B.E. R .E . B.E. Primary and Middle .... 260.30 356.46 351.19 Secondary ...... 336.63 509.61 476.27 College...... 48.41 67.22 63.39 Utilisation of funds at all stages Primary and Middle 356.46 lakhs Secondary . 509.61 lakhs College . . . 67.22 lakhs Position regarding switching over to new pattern The new pattern of education i.e. 10 + 2 + 3 has already been introduced in this territoiy from the year 1975-7,6. During 1978 79 a total of 16 institutions (both Government and Aided) have attached higher secondary classes with a total enrolment of 5965 students. The total provision for Higher Secondary education is Rs. 16.00 lakhs under plan sector. Universalisation of elementary education In order to universalise elementary education and also to minimise the rate of wastage and stagnation this administration has adopted the following measures and incentives • (i) Free elementary education in all the Government institutions. (ii) Ungraded pattern—As a measure to combat wastage and stagnation and to encourage retention at Primary stage, the common examination at the end of the year for the class I to IV is eliminated and instead ungra ded pattern is introduced. (iii) Mid-day meals/school feeding programme plays a dual role; firstly to provide nutritious food to the primary school children belonging to 6-11 age group 202 hailing from backward areas and also to act ;is an incentive to achieve maximum school attendance. (iv) Book giants and supply of school uniforms to needy and deserving students at primary and middle stage are being provided under plan schemes. (v) The percentage of trained primary school :;aoiiers is steadily rising (which is 73.2%) who are advised to pay house to house visits specially in rural areas at the commencement of the academic year to per suade reluctant children to join schools. Number of Institutions— Government and Aided Govern- Aided (P • :e) mem ii)'Colleges . . . 6 J 5 (ii) Schools . . . 1054 277 (iii) Technical Institutions 8 (iv) Special Institutions . ( inclaJing I Engineering College I Polytechnic and 5 lTl’s). 'WFood JJcraft Institution). CHAPTER XII ACTIVITIES IN COMMON AND CLEARING HOUSE FUNCTIONS In this chapter, is included an amount of the various activities undertaken by the Ministry, not covered by the earlier ones. These activities include policy formulation, development planning, budgeting, encouragement to the progressive use of Hindi, reser vation of posts in the services for Scheduled Castes/Tribes and other backward classes, and student welfare measures. Some of them pertain to the Departments of Education and Culture in common. Also included in this chapter is an account of the clearing house functions followed during the year. One of the important functions of the Union Ministry of Education is to act as a clearing house of information on all matters relating to educational deve lopment. The Ministry, accordingly, collects, compiles and pub lishes educational statistics, brings out journals and other publish ed material on education and culture in Hindi and English. A students Information Service Unit in the Ministry attends to enquiries about facilities for higher education in this country anti abroad. Conference of Education Ministers A Conference of Education Ministers of States and Union Territories was held in New Delhi on July 13-14, 1978. The resolutions adopted and decisions taken at this Conference are : I. Universalisation of Elementary Education The Conference approved a frame-work of action for imple mentation of universalisation of elementary education on a time- bound basis based on the recommendations of a working group set up in collaboration with the Planning Commission. The fram e work of action emphasises the following aspects :— 203 204 (1) National target of enrolment of 320 lakhs of children in the age group 6-14 during the next Five Year Plan 1978-83. This will imply enrolment of 90% of the children in the age group 6-14. (2) Location of schools to cover all un-covered habita tions within a span of 1-3 years with priority to rural and backward areas particularly remote tribal areas. (3) Enrolment to be planned school-wise and block-wise and district-wise maps to be prepared to identify backward and disadvantaged pockets. (4) All out effort to enrol either in formal or non-formal education system, girls and children belonging to under-privileged and backward sections. (5) Periodical monitoring of both of enrolment and attendance. (6) Optimum utilization of existing facilities and use of double shifts. (7) Academic year and vacations to be planned with re ference to local needs. (8) Unified elementary educational administration. (9) Objectives of universalisation of enrolment and re tention emphasised. (10) Every child in age group 6-14 shall be enrolled at 6 + and shall continue to learn on full-time basis, if possible, and on part-time basis, if necessary. (11) Provide 50 per cent of the State plan budget for elementary education. (12) Ensure 30 per cent of this for qualitative improve ment. (13,) Review and revise existing teacher training curricula and inservice programmes and strengthen primary' teacher training institutions. (14) Central assistance to educationally backward States for innovation and experimentation and non-formal education programmes. 205 The Conference, while approving these proposals made spccial mention of the following :— (1) The provision for voluntary effort in the massive expension of elementary education particularly in non-formal education. (2) That the primary schools have to be provided the necessary facilities, particularly a simple functional building to ensure effective education. (3) The quality of the teacher has to be improved and hence teacher education deserves special attention. (4) Special efforts needed for enrolment and retention of girls. Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and wherever necessary special incentives such as midday meals, uniforms, attendance scholarships etc., to be provided. (5) Since the requirement of funds will be large, efforts should be made to attract private donations for school improvement programmes which should be eligible for income tax rebate. (6) Spccial efforts needed to provide for tackling the problems faced by the Hilly States and desert areas. C) Time-bound programme to be taken up by which NCERT should be able to provide not merely the framework and guidelines but also model instructional material for the non-formal education programmes. II. Educational Structure and its Content The Conference considered the structure of formal education in the country. It took note of the fact that 26 States and Union Territories have already introduced 10 + 2 + 3 structure as re commended by the Education Commission 1964-66 and National Policy on Education, 1968. The Conference further considered the obligation of the States in regard to elementary' education and is of the view that this structure does not in any way run counter to the Directive Princi ple of the State Policy so long as obligation to provide education free upto the age of 14. (Standard VIII) is recognised and ac cepted. 206 The Confe rence agreed that the school education should com prise elementairy, secondary and higher secondary stages of 12 years’ duration. The under'graduate stage of higher education may be of three years’ duration. However, where a State Government so desires it can have a t wo years Pass and a three years Honours course. As regards the content of school education the Education Ministers’ Conference considered and approved the Ishwarbhai Patel Committee Report except the recommendation relating to the alternative courses in Mathematics and Science. The Con ference suggested that this particular recommendation be studied further by the National Council of Educational Research and Training and f.heir views be made available to the State Govern ments/Boards of Secondary Education. The Conference broadly approved the proposals regarding the content of higher secondary education and vocationalisation based on the Report of the Malcolm Adiseshiah Committee and Working Group on Vocationalisation. The Conference remarked on the need to keep in view the availability of employment oppor tunities in implementing the vocationalisation programme. It stressed the importance of developing proper outlook where these courses are not considered inferior to other courses of study. The Conference also stressed the need to provide bridge courses to enable students to pursue higher education. The Conference emphasised the need to improve the quality of vocational cowses especially in the development of the skills and vocational train ing. The Conference endorsed the view points expressed in the paper on higher education prepared by the University Grants Commission and placed before the Conference. III. Adult Education The Conference considered the paper on the detailed actioi to be taken by the State and Central Governments in regard to imple mentation of the National Adult Education Programme and the recommendations of the Working Group on the subject. The Conference endorsed the general approach and recognising signi ficance of the programme resolved to give the highest priority to it. It also called upon all concerned to make necessary prepara tions to launch the programme with effect from October 2, 1978. The Conference wanted the disbursement of funds to volurtarv agencies to be routed through the State Government. 207 IV . Art atul Culture The Conference considered broad outlines of the Paper cir culated on art and culture and welcomed the proposals outlined in it. V. Physical Education and Sports The Conference considered broad outlines of the paper on physical education and sports and welcomed the proposals out lined in it. V I. National Policy on Education The Conference gave its approval for the broac outlines indi cated in the draft National Policy on Education piepared by the Government of India in the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare. However, the States will give their derailed remarks before the end of July, 1978, to enable the Centnl Government to proceed further with the finalisation of the Policy V II. Draft Five Year Plan 1978— 83 The Conference took note of the proposals ii the field of education in the draft Five Year Plan 1978—83. These will, however, be subject to further discussions between the State and Central Governments and finalisation by the National Develop ment Council. A c t iv it ie s in C o m m o n Budget Estimates— Department of Education The total budget provision for 1978-79 and 1S79-80 for the Department of Education in the Demands for Graits concerning the Department are as under : (Rs. in lakhs) Particulars Budget Revi:ed Budget 1978-79 197879 1979-^0 i 2 r 4 Demand No. 25 Department of Education: Secretariat of the Department, including the Pay and Accounts Offices, hospitality and enter tainment and discretionary grant of the Education Min ister ...... 1,75,87 1 ,'5,87 1,90.89 208 1 2 3 4 Daman! No. 26 rduc-dtion: Provision for general education, oi.ier revenue expenditure of the Department, including provisions for grants-in-aid lo States/Union Territories on Central and Centrally Spon sored Plan Schemes and also provision for loans for cons truction of hostels, etc., and other educational loans for Central and Centrally Spon sored Schemes . . . 2,23,36,51 2,17,74,80 2,26,48,6* T o t a l .... 2,25,12,38 2,19,50,67 2,28,39,57 Budget Estimates— Department of Culture The budget provisions for 1978-79 and 1979-80 for the Department of Culture are as under : (Rs. in lakhs) Particulars Budget Revised Budget 1978-79 1978-79 1979-80 Department of Culture : Demand No. 97 .... 10,95,21 10,48,53 11,91.21 Archaeology : Demand No. 98 .... 7,19,95 6,71,43 6,96.48 T o t a l ...... 18,15,16 17,19,96 18,87.69 Audit Observations and Inspection Reports In accordance with the recommendations made by the Public Accounts Committee in its 215th Report on the Action Taken by Government on the Recommendations of the Public Accounts Committee contained in their 169th Report (5th Lok Sabha), the Ministry continued its concerted efforts to clear the outstand ing audit observations and inspection paras. Instructions were 209 Issued by Education Secretary to all subordinate formations in the matter of speedy clearance of outstanding audit observations and inspection paras and asked for quarterly progress reports indicating their disposal. As against 4735 audit observations made up to March, 1977 but outstanding on 31st August, 1977 and 4013 inspection paras which were included in the Comp troller and Auditor General’s Report for the year 1976-77, the Ministry cleared 2187 audit observations and 1853 inspection paras till 31st Maivh, 1977. Efforts are being continued to clear the remaining outstanding observations and paras. L ist o f A udit O bservations F o r T h e P eriod E nding 31-3-1977 B u t O u tsta n d in g O n 31-8-1977 (According to the Report of the Comptroller and Auditor General of India for the year 1976-77). AUDIT OBSERVATIONS S. No. Name of Die Accountant General Departments Education Culture Social Welfare 1. Andhra Pradesh . . . . 15 228 2. Bihar ...... 22 50 3. Central Bombay . . . . 493 524 4. Central Calcutta . . . . 33 3 5. Gujarat ...... 39 6. Himachal Pradesh, Chandigarh . . 52 7. Jammu and Kashmir. . . . 18 91 8. Kerala ...... 109 9 9. Karnataka .... . 63 8 10. Madhya Pradesh . . . . 26 27 11. Orissa ..... 20 3 12. Rajasthan .... . 5 5 13. Uttar Pradesh .... 18 16 14. Manipur ..... 1 15. P u n j a b ...... 1 16. Assam ..... 4 17. Tamil Nadu .... 274 18. R.A.O. Goa .... . 1 19. A.G.C.R. (TM) . . . . 422 961 22 20. A.G.C.R. (GM) . . . . 1 21. A.G.C.R. (DAXXI) . • . 736 413 T o t a l .... . 2055 2196 484 210 C on so lid a ted S u m m ary Department of Education ..... 2055 Department of Culture ...... 2196 Department of Social Welfare ..... 484 T o t a l ...... 4735 L ist o f I n s p e c t io n R e p o r t s P aras F o r T h e P er io d E n d in g 31-3-77 B u t O u tsta n d in g O n 31-8-1977 (According to the Report of the Comptroller and Auditor General of India for the Year 1976-77). PARAS SI. Name of the Departments No. Accountant Education Culture Social Welfare General Reports Paras Reports Paras Reports Paras 1. Andhra Pradesh . 10 25 2. Assam . . 2 4 3. Central Bombay . 1 1 3 3 4. Central Calcutta . 16 76 7 28 1 12 5. Bihar . . 9 22 6. Himachal Pradesh and Chandigarh 64 363 1 4 5 15 7. Madhya Pradesh . 1 2 10 24 8.Orissa . . 1 2 -> 6 9. Kerala . . 7 5 10. Karnataka . . 1 3 11. Tamil Nadu . 39 87 13 43 1 2 12. Uttar Pradesh . 15 28 11 37 1 7 13. Rajasthan . . 3 11 14. Gujarat . . 26 68 11 47 15. London . . -> 5 16. A.G.C.W.M. . 9 51 9 84 17. A.G.C.R. New Delhi . . 909 2212 52 194 193 542 T o t a l . 1098 2936 120 452 212 625 211 Consolidated Summary Reports Paras 1. Department of Education . 1098 2936 2. Department of Culture . 120 452 3. Department of Social Welfare 212 625 T o t a l 1430 4013 Observance of orders regarding reservation in posts and services for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes A special Cell functions in the Ministry to ensure that re servation orders relating to the appointment of m embers of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in the Departments of Education and Culture are strictly observed. The activities of this Cell are at present carried out in three different units under the supervision of the Deputy Secretary (Administration). The question of rationalising the functioning of this Cell is under examination. During the year under report, rosters pertaining to the follow ing categories of posts in the Department of Education and Cul ture (proper) were inspected to verify whether these have been maintained in accordance with the reservation orders issued by Government from time to time .— (1) General Advisory .Cadre. (2) Technical Advisory Cadre and other Miscellaneous posts. (3) Grade III posts. (4) C.S.C.S. Grade I. (5) Posts filled by promotion to the Grade of Assistant. (6) Reservation in Promotion in various Grades Class IV/PAs (Grade II). (7) PAs Grade II (Permanent/Temporary). (8) Stenographers (Grade III Temporary). (9) Class III Miscellaneous Posts. (10) LDCs (Permanent/Temporary). (11) Class IV posts, and 16 ESW/78— 15 212 (12) Librarian Grade II/Grade Ill/Grade I/Junior Libra rian, Library Attendants (Senior/Junior)/Compilers. Annual statements concerning the representation of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in posts and services received from the Ministry (Proper) and its attached/subordinate offices were scrutinised by the Cell and consolidated material furnished to the Department of Personnel and Administrative Reforms, Government of India. Action was also initiated to collect up-to-date information in regard to the filling up of the vacancies reserved for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes by the members belonging to these communities not only in the subordinate formations of this Minis try but also in the autonomus organisations and educational ins titutions with which this Ministry is concerned. On receipt of this information, the question of adopting suitable measures to correct the existing deficiencies in filling up the required quota of posts reserved for Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe candi dates in different organisations will be considered. Information was also collected from the different organisa tions with which this Ministry is concerned in regard to the faci lities provided to the students belonging to Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe communities in the matter of admission, scholar ships, hostel and other concessions, as desired by the Committee on the Welfare of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes of the L ok Sabha. Progressive use of Hindi The Ministry regularly circulates to its officers and the various sections within its control, in addition to its attached and subor dinate offices, the administrative instructions issued by the Govern ment regarding the full implementation of the official language policy and the statutory requirements relating to it. The Ministry keeps a regular watch on the progress of all the programmes in this regard. Quarterly Progress Reports Progress in 1978-79 was watched and reviewed, inter-alia, through quarterly progress reports obtained from the various Divisions and the attached and subordinate offices under the control of this Ministry. These reports were scrutinised, con solidated and sent to the Ministry of Home Affairs. 213 Correspondence in Hindi Under the administrative instructions, letters received in Hindi from individuals as well as from State Governments have been replied to in Hindi. Noting and Drafting in Hindi According to the bilingual policy, every Central Government employee is free to use Hindi or English for his official work. However, all the officers and staff in the Ministry and its attached and subordinate offices are requested from time to time to en courage their Hindi knowing staff to increase the use of Hindi for their notes and simple drafts. About 74 per cent of the staff of the Department has working knowledge of Hindi and Hindi is being partially used in noting and drafting in 39 sections. Provision of Additional Hindi Typewriters At present 53 Hindi typewriters are available in the Minis try. Translation of Statutory Manuals, Forms and Other Procedural Literature So far, 187 forms and manuals of this Ministry have been translated into Hindi. Translation of Acts and Statutes The work relating to translation of Acts and Statutes has been completed. Maintenance of Separate Registers for Letters Received in Hindi All sections in the Ministry maintain separate diary registers for letters received in Hindi and specific entries are made about the replies sent in Hindi- Where replies are not sent in Hindi or are not considered necessary, suitable explanation is given by the Section concerned. Official Language Implementation Committee Official Language Implementation Committees have been set up in the Ministry and five of its subordinate offices. These 214 committees hold quarterly meetings and review the progress of use of Hindi for official purposes at these meetings. The minutes of the meetings are sent to the Ministry of Home Affairs, Depart ment of Official Languages for informtion. It has not been considered necessary to set up such committees in other subordi nate offices, whose total staff strength is very small. Issue of Bilingual Circulars in Hindi Special care is taken to see that letters received from Hindi speaking States are invariably replied to in Hindi. Circulars meant for general information are issued bilingually. Training of Employees in Hindi On a review made recently about the officers and members of the staff who either had Hindi as a subject in their higher sec ondary examination or had passed Pragya examination conducted by the Ministry of Home Affairs, it was found that approximately 74 % officers and staff belong to these two categories and have a working knowledge of Hindi. Besides, 41 persons were deputed for the various Hindi Teaching Classes. Special care is taken to see that the persons so nominated attend the classes regularly. Special attention is also being paid for the training of employees in Hindi Typewriting and Hindi Stenography. Six persons were deputed for training in Hindi Typewriting and Hindi Stenography. Workshops Regular workshops are being conducted to impart tarining to Hindi-knowing employees of this Department in noting and draft ing in Hindi. Setting up of Hindi Advisory Committee A Hindi Salahkar Samiti has been set up for the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare and the Department of Culture under the Chairmanship of Union Education Minister, to advise the Ministry on matters relating to the Progressive use of Hindi for Official purposes. The Committee held its last meeting on 10th December, 1976 and received a report on the action already taken by the Ministry for the Progressive use of Hindi and for ensuring compliance with the provisions of the Official Language Act, 1963, as amended by the Official Language (Amendment) Act, 1967. The Samiti has been reconstituted on 3-11-1978 as its terms expired in December, 1976. 215 Supply of White Printing Paper at Concessional Rate for Produc tion of text books, Exercise Books and Examinations The scheme for the allocation of white printing paper at concessional rate of Rs. 2750 per tonne ex-mill which was initiated in 1974 was continued during the year under report. Following the decision of the Government to earmark the entire production of white printing paper for the educational sector to meet the increasing demand of paper for textbooks, exercise books and examinations (University and schools boards) and for books and reading material for the adult education programme, the availability of paper for educational purposes has increased from the year 1978-79. As against 1.20 lakh tonnes of this paper available in the previous years it is expected that about 2 lakh tonnes of paper would hereafter be available for the education sector subject to actual production of paper mills. During the year 1978-79 an allocation of about 1.60 lakh tonnes of paper has been made to the States and Union Terri tories for the specific education purposes. To ensure proper use of concessional paper and to avoid its possible misuse, the States and Union Territories have been requested to follow the guidelines issued in this regard. As a result of regular supply of concessional paper to the States and Union Territories, the prices of textbooks have either been reduced or stabilised at the 1973 level. The prices of exercise books which were fixed in January 1976 have remain ed stationary despite the rising cost of various inputs like raw material, labour and power. It may be pointed out that the lowest price fixed for at 48-page exercise book is 20 paise and the upper price is Rs. 1.30 for a 240-page exercise book. Import of paper from Norway Under the bilateral agreement entered into between the Government of India and the Government of Kingdom of Norway in 1974, Norway has been supplying paper to India as a com modity assistance. The allocation for this purpose for the year 1978 is five million Norwegian Kroners. This paper is utilised for the production of school textbooks produced by N.C.E.R.T. The Government of Norway have agreed to supply paper worth ten million Norwegian Kroners for the year 1979. Arrange ments for the import of paper worth this amount will be finalised shortly. 216 (a) Statistics (i) Training Course in Educational Statistics A training course in educational statistics was organised at the National Staff College for Educational Planners and Ad ministrators, New Delhi, in collaboration with the Ministry of Education and Social Welfare from May 23 to 29, 1978 for the benefit of Statistical Assistants of the Statistical Units of various State Education Departments. Fifty-three officials, including a few Statistical Officers from 21 States and the Union Terri tories of Delhi, Chandigarh and Mizoram and from the Uni versities of Cochin, Kerala and Kerala Agricultural University attended this course. (ii) Standing Committe on Educational Statistics The Standing Committee on Educational Statistics, at its third meeting held on September 27, 1978, approved the forms for the quinquennial collection of statistics on selected items. Besides, the Committee recommended the following :— (1) formulating crash programme of deputing teams for on-the-spot collection and finalisation of statistics for the years 1976-77 and 1977-78. (2) setting up a Sub-Group to work out the details of staff requirements of the States with a view to finalis ing the Centrally sponsored scheme "Assistance for Establishment of Planning, Monitoring and Statistical Cells in the States” for which a provision of Rs. 35 lakhs for the year 1978-79 was agreed to by the Planning Commission and included in the Ministry of Education Budget. (3) setting up of a Sub-Group to decide the methodology to be adopted for theme-oriented studies and selec tion of topics for periodical collection of the data. (iii) IJnesco sponsored National Training Seminar cn Method for Project School Enrolment The Ministry of Education and Social Welfare participated in the UNESCO sponsored National Training Seminar on Methods for Projecting School Enrolment organised by National Staff College for heads of Educational Statistical Services of all States and Union Territories from November 20, to December 1, 1978. 217 One person each was deputed by the Department of Education and Department of Culture. Besides, three officers of the Planning, Monitoring and Statistics Division of the Department of Education acted as resource personnel and contributed the following papers at the seminar :— 1. Educational Statistics in India. 2. Use of Projection Techniques far Estimating non-res ponse in Educational Statistics. 3. Wastage and Stagnation by sex and grade in Primary and Middle level Education in India. (iv) Publications The following publications were brought out during the year 1978-79 :— 1. Pay Scales of School Teachers in India— 1976-77 ; 2. Progress of Education of Scheduled Castes and Schedul ed Tribes— 1972-73 ; 3. Expenditure on Education as shown in Central and State Annual Budgets— 1975-76 to 1977-78 ; 4. Selected Information on School Education in India— 1976-77; 5. Progress of Education of Scheduled Castes and Schedul ed Tribes— 1974-75; 6. Educational Statistics—District-wise— 1976-77, Vol. II—Tripura; 7. Educational Statistics—District-wise— 1976-77, Vol. (I)—Pondicherry; 8. A Study of Administrative set-up in States for educa tional programmes of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes; 9. An intensive Study of Elementary Education in Four Blocks of Chamba District of Himachal Pradesh; 10. Selected Educational Statistics— 1977-78. 218 (b) Planning and Monitoring Preparation of Central Annual Plan of Education for the year 1979-80 was undertaken. A Central Plan o£ Rs. 90.50 crores for 1979-80 was agreed to by the Planning Commission. Working Group meetings to discuss State Annual Plans were held under the Chairmanship of Education Secretary in the Ministry. The reports of the Working Group have been presented to the Plan ning Commission. Physical and financial targets in respect of State Plan pro grammes were collected and progress in various sectors analysed. Necessary guidelines were issued to the State Governments for preparing educational programmes for the development of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. The integrated Tribal Development Projects received from the State Governments were evaluated and the Ministry’s comments were forwarded to the Ministry of Home Affairs for consideration in the Sub-Committee set-up under Central Coordination Committee. A Study on the Administrative set-up in States for educa tional programmes of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes was undertaken by the Ministry. The Study was conducted in the States of Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Jammu and Kashmir, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Orissa, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, Tripura and Uttar Pradesh and the study report brought out. It was forwarded to the Chief Ministers by Education Minister and to the Chief Secretaries by Education Secretary. A depart mental study of the recommendation of Planning Commission re garding allocation of funds for various sections of education in 1978-79 annual plan and the actual budget allocations by the State was prepared and sent to the States. Publications The Publication Unit during the year 1978-79 up to Decem ber, 1978 brought out 31 titles in English including 1 bilingual (English and Hindi) and two quarterly journals, viz. ‘The Education Quarterly’ and ‘Indian Education Abstracts’. The Education Quarterly entered its 30th year and the ‘Indian Edu cation Abstracts’ its 23rd year of publication. The Unit organised the ‘Second Travelling Photo Exhibition’ sponsored by the Asian Cultural Centre for Unesco, Tokyo at Lalit Kala Akademi Galleries, New Delhi from November 19— 24, 219 1978 and at Goa from 8-12-78 to 14-12-78. It also participat ed in the 9th National Book Fair held at Bangalore from 29-12-78 to 7-1-79. The Hindi Publication Unit brought out during the same period 17 titles including 2 quarterly journals ‘Shiksha Vivechan’ and ‘Sanskriti’. Students Information Service Unit The Students Information Service Unit collects, compiles and disseminates information on higher education in India and abroad for the benefit of the students and attends to their enquiries on various subject-fields. During the year under report, it attended to approximately 5142 enquiries related to facilities for higher education in India and abroad. Nearly 2261 persons visited the Reference Library attached to this Unit to consult the calendars, handbooks, pros pectuses and other bulletins of information on various courses offered by Indian/foreign universities/institutions. 1046 addi tions were made to the Reference Library of the Unit by way of latest calendars, prospectuses, and other relevant literature acquired from several Universities/ Institutions. About 19 compilations on different topics/subjects on higher education were brought out and revised during the year under re port. The publication “General Information for Indian Students Going Abroad— 1977” has been revised and published DEPARTMENT OF CULTURE 221 CHAPTER 1 CULTURAL AFFAIRS The main institutions and programmes in this field followed by the Department of Culture are : (1) Sahitya Akademi, Lalit Kala Akademi, Sangeet Natak Akademi and other institutions engaged in literary and cultural activities; (2) Propagation of culture including financial assistance for performing arts and cultural organisations; (3) Centenary celebrations; (4) Gazetteer work; and (5) Cultural agreements, cultural exchange programmes, in-coming and out-going cultural delegations. A. T h e A k a d em ies A nd O t h e r C u l t u r a l O rganisations With a view to preserving, fostering and developing the creative arts-literary, performing and plastic, the Government of India has set-up three National Akademies viz. Sahitya Akademi, Sangeet Natuk Akademi and Lalit Kala Akademi and the National School of Drama. The main activities undertaken by these organisations during the year under report are given below ; Sahitya Akademi The main activities of the Akademi are organisation of symposia and seminars on subjects of creative literature, transla tion and publication of outstanding Indian a-nd foreign classics into various Indian languages and awards to outstanding books of creative merit. The Akademi organised the following symposia and seminars during the year : (1) A seminar on ‘Nationalism and the Poet’ to mark; the birth centenarv of the Malayalam poet Vallathol was organised in New Delhi and Trichur. 223 224 (2) A symposium to mark the 150th birth anniversary ot Leo Tolstoy was held at Bombay. Besides these seminars, the Akademi organised two exhibi tions of its publications—one at New Delhi and the other at Trichur. The Akademi published 33 books and released 3 issues of its journal in English, Indian Literature, and one issue ot its jour nal in Sanskrit, Samskrita Pratibha. The Akademi has given 20 awards to 20 books in various Indian languages, the details of which are given below : Language Book Author (Subject) 1. Assamese Pita Putra (Novel) Homen Bargoliain 2. Bengali Vivekananda O Samaka- Sanskari Prosad Bose lin Bharatvarsa, Vol. I, II & III (Biography and Cultural History) 3. Dogri Sanjhi Dharti Bakhle Narshingh Dev Jarawal Mahnu (Novel) 4. English Fire on the Mountain Anita Desai (Novel) 5. Gujarati Hayati (Poetry) Harindra Dave 6. Hindi Utna Vah Suraj Hai B.B. Agarwal (Peotry) , 7. Kannada Hasuru Honnu B.G.L. Swamy (Travelogue) 8. Konkani Manni Punav (Humourous D.K. Sukthankar Essays) 9. Maithilli Baji Uthal Murali Upendra Thakur (Poetry) Mohan 10. Malayalam Ratrimazha (Poetry) Sugathakumari 11. Manipuri Ngabong Khao (Drama) G.C. Tongbra 12. Marathi Nakshatranche Dene Arati Prabhu (Poetry) 13. Nepali Khahare (Short Stories) Shiva Kumari Rai 14. Oriya Saptama Ritu (Poetry) Ramakanta Rath 15. Punjabi Orvar Par (Short Stories) Gurmukh Singh Musafir 16. Rajasthani Meve Ra Runkh (Novel) Annaram (Sudama) 17. Sindhi Cheekha (Poetry) H.I. Sadarangani 18. Tamil Pudukavithain Thottra- Vallikkannan mum Valarchiyum (Criticism) 19. Telugu Collected works of Krishna D.V. Krishna Sastry Sastry (6 Volumes ) (Poetry & Plays) 20. Urdu Hafiz and Iqbal Yusuf Husain Khan (Criticism) 225 Shri Umashankar Joshi, President of the Akademi visited the USSR in September, 1978 to participate in the 150th Birth anni versary celebrations of Leo Tolstoy and Dr. R. S. Kelkar, Secre tary of the Akademi amended the 52nd conference of the Union Academique Internationale at Bruxelles. Lalit Kala Akademi The important programmes of the Akademi during the year were the organisation of exhibitions, publication of art booics, journals and multi-coloured reproductions and award of fellow ships. Among the important exhibitions organised by the Akademi during the year, mention may be made of the following :—• (a) Indian exhibitions organised abroad (i) An exhibition of twenty six paintings and sculptures by twenty six artists selected from the permanent collections of the Lalit Kala Akademi, and a few from galleries was sent to Moscow. (ii) The Department of Culture and the Lalit Kala Akademi jointly organised an exhibition of 64 contemporary paintings by 15 arists representing a wide cross-section of contemporary art in Romania in August, 1978. (iii) An exhibition of Indian Art comprising 46 works by 11 Indian artists residing and working in New York was organised at the Consulate of India, New India House, New York on 27th September, 1978. (b) Foreign exhibitions in India (i) An exhibition of Designs from Fiiland was jointly organised by the Embassy of Finknd and the Lalit Kala Akademi in November, 197£. (ii) Copies of medieval Yugoslav Frescos were exhi bited in Delhi, Madras and Calcut a. (c) Indian exhibitions in India (i) Akademi’s Circulating exhibition :omprising their collections was shown in Andhra Pradesh, Orissa and Madhya Pradesh- 226 (ii) National Exhibition of Art in New Delhi. The Akademi brought out the following publications during the period under report : — (i) No. 24-25 of the Journal “Lalit Kala Contemporary” and “Lalit Kala Ancient No. 18”. (ii) A book “Moving Focus” by Shri K. G. Subramanyan. (iii) In multi-colour reproduction series, the Akademi has brought out three prints, one by Jogan Chaudhury, another by Prabhakar Barwa and one by Shri Tyeb Mehta. One Mysore Style painting Shri Rajarajeshwari has also been brought out. S/Shri P. T. Reddy and Dhanraj Bhagat have been elected as fellows of the Akademi. As a programme for decentralizing the activities of the Aka demi, a Regional Centre was opened in Madras in October, 1978. The Regional Centre will cover Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Kerala and Pondicherry. Besides the land which has been donated by the Tamil Nadu Government, the State Government shared 50 per cent of the cost of construction of the building which cost Rs. 8 lakhs. Sangeet Natak Akademi Apart from the support given to projects and programmes which are a regular feature of its work, the Akademi, during the year under report, laid special emphasis on developmental acti vities directed towards the future well-being of the socio-culture fabric of the country. Instead of giving priority to the arts which have already received recognition in urban metropolitan centres, the Akademi’s new priorities were in areas of preservation and systematic documentation of languishing forms in the performing arts. Assistance is now available for the totality of efforts which includes support to performers, scholarships to train new learners and monies for renovation of materials and equipment. Amongst the forms which have been so identified are Koodiyattam (Kerala), Bhagwat Mela Natakam (Tamil Nadu), Pavakoothu-Glove Pup pets (Kerala), Ravan Chhaya Leather Puppets (Orissa), Chhau- Seraikella (Bihar), Dhrupad and Tappa (Uttar Pradesh), Chandaini (Madhya Pradesh), Maach (Madhya Pradesh), Bhavai (Gujarat), Alaha (Uttar Pradesh) and Bhand Pather (Kashmir). 227 Concerted efforts are now being made to document these forms on a scientific basis. The Akademi had collected over the years valuable materials in the shape of films, photographs, video-record ings, slides, discs, cassettes, but these were not properly archived and scientifically documented. All these materials are now being properly codified, indexed and archived and a satisfactory retriev able system is introduced to ensure inter-action with similar col lection';, in India and in foreign countries. One of Akadetni’s main concerns has been directed towards bridging the gap between the world of science and world of culture. Realising that Indian music has had a prefund scientific basis for its theory, the Akademi opened a new section to conduct and co-ordinate researches in the acoustics of music. Initially con siderable spade work had been done by way of organising semi nars, workshops and lectures in various parts of the country. Reports of these were published. Financial aid was extended to scientists and musicologists for research in ihis field. While this programme continued, the Akademi proposes to institute fellow ships to assist research workers, and for the production of short educative firm on "Voice Culture’ which is of prime importance but which has remained neglected. The Akademi is co-operating with a number of universities, research bodies and scholars in this work. The Akademi has also given emphasis to dissemination, by reaching out to the public, and organising for this purpose per formances on a thematic basis. Instead of organising programmes on an ad hoc basis, the new thrust is to select an area or a theme and to present it in its totality. In November 1978 an attempt was made to bring together the traditional performers of Shadow Theatre at a five-day festival of Shadow Theatre in Bangalore in collaboration with Karnataka Sangeet Natak Akademi. Nearly 50 persons, both traditional artists and scholars participated, to witness, analyse and suggest ways of future development of shadow puppet forms now surviving in Karnataka, Andhra, Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra and Orissa. A Workshop was held and communication established between traditional practioners and those teaching these arts in educational system. Representatives of NCERT, University of Delhi, ICCR also par ticipated in the festival and workshop with a view to utilising these forms for educational purposes and for projection abroad. The area of its normal work included the presentation, on behalf of the Department of Culture, performances of the Central 16ESW/78—16 228 Puppet Theatre, Sofia (Bulgaria), in October 1978 and presen tation, on behalf of ICCR, of the dance ensemble of G. D. R. in October 1978. The Akademi in previous years announced Fellowships and gave awards to distinguished artists representing the highest standard of excellence and achievements in the field of music, dance and drama. They were given to the following persons : Fellowship : Shri B. Puttuswamaiyya ; Thiruvengadu Subra- mania Pillai. M usic : Khadim Hussein : Hindustani (vocal music); Puru- shottam Das : Hindustani Instrumental (Pakhawaj); Madurai S. Somasundaram : Karnatak (vocal music); Lalgudi Jayaraman; Karnatak Instrumental (Violin); Sandhyavandanam Srinivasa Rao (Dasa Pada—devotional Karnatak music); Rai Chand Boral : Creative music. Theatre : N. Krishna Pillai : playwriting (Malayalam); Jab ber Patel : Direction ; Dattaram Volvoikar alias Master Datta- ram : Acting; Thounaojam Kunjakishore Singh : Jatra (Mani pur) ; Kathinanda Das : Ravan Chhaya (Oriya Shadow Pup petry). Dance : C. R. Acharyalu : Kuchipudi (Teacher); Kalaman- dalam Kalyanikutty Amma : Mohini Attam; Bapuram Bayan Atai : Sattriya. The Akademi continued publications programme includ ing issues of SANGEET NATAK. Publication of other works on hand are : Aesthetical Essays on Hindustani Rhythms, Ras- leela Tatha Ras-nukaran Vikas, Music and Dance in Rabindra nath Tagore’s Education Philosophy, and Sange. Other titles include Who’s Who of Indian Musicians, Anthology of Muthu- swami Dikshitar and Monographs on Bhaona, Malushahi Ballads and Kariala. The Akademi continued to give grants to institu tions. In addition the Chairman sanctioned discretionary grants to selected individuals and organisations. National School of Drama The School and its Repertory Company was engaged in a large number of performances. During the period under report, the School and its Repertory Company produced 8 new plays and pave 98 performance of various old and new productions. 40 performances were given by the school in which only students 229 of the school participated. Some of the important productions of the school and the Repertory Company were :— Repertory Company Productions 1. Mukhya Mantri School Productions 2. Oedipus Rex (In Hindustani) 3. Nar Bakshi 4. Ek Lik Kathi 5. Andher Nagri Chaupat Raja 6. Lower Depth (Hindustani) 7. Handful of Dust (Hindi) 8. Hedda Gablar (Hindustani) The school also invited a number of eminent persons includ ing some foreign experts for delivering lectures and giving de monstrations for the benefits of the students. To give an opportunity to children of the 8-14 years age groups the National School of Drama organised a 6 months training for them in Voice, Speech, Acting and Movement in collabo ration with the Childrens’ Creative Theatre as already run by Miss Sushma Seth. This is the first time when children were given a chance to show their talent the media of drama, within the professional expertise, contributed by the National School of Dram a. To take the theatre from the capital into the neglected pro vincial stream, where professional expertise is not easily avail able, the National School of Drama organised a Theatre Work shop at Gandhigram Rural University, Madurai, Tamil Nadu. At the invitation of the American Government, Dr. B. V. Kamath, Director of the School visited important cities of America in June/July, 1978 to observe the community theatre activities in the U.S.A., in particular the interesting experiments which are being undertaken in that country in developing com munity theatre activities amongst social groups of different kind of people such as Negroes, Youth etc. 230 Dr. L. M. Singhvi was appointed as the Chairman of the National School of Drama. School of Buddhist Philosophy, Leh The School of Buddhist Philosophy, Leh is an autonomous Organisation fully financed by the Government of India. It was established in 1959 to impart education in modern and classical Tibetan Studies on the monastic pattern to enable Lamas to receive training in Tibetan-Buddhism. The School is managed by a Board of Management with a senior officer of the Depart ment of Culture, as ex-officio Chairman. The other Members of the Board include a representative each of the Ministry of Ex ternal Affairs, Government of Jammu and Kashmir, All Ladakh Gumpa Association and Ladakh Buddhist Association, Leh and scholars of Buddhist Philosophy and Tibetan language. The School follows a course of 7 years—5 years Iot T*urva M adh- yama and two years thereafter for Uttar Madhyama of the Sampurnanand Sanskrit Vishvidyalaya, Varanasi, to which it is affiliated. The School has a capacity to admit up to 80 students. Each student is paid a stipend of Rs. 80/- per month. Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies, Varanasi The main objective of the institute are preservation of Tibe tan Culture and tradition and imparting teaching of ancient and traditional subjects through a modern university educational framework and conducting research in Tibetan studies. The Institute was established in 1967 and is functioning as a regis tered Society wholly financed by the Government of India. The Institute is managed by a Board of Governors of which Joint Educational Adviser Department of Culture is the ex-officio Chairman. The other Members of the Board include represen tative of the Ministry of External Affairs and Finance, represen tative of H. H. the Dalai Lama and eminent scholars nominated by the Government of India. Presently the Institute is located at Sarnath, Varanasi in various rented buildings. Now the Ins titute has purchased a plot of land measuring 8.25 acres at Sarnath to house it in a building complex of its own- The work of construction of buildings for the Institute and its hostels etc. are proposed to be taken up in the next financial year. During the year under Report the Institute has 218 students on rolls and a complement of 20 teaching staff including the Principal. 231 Sikkim Research Institute of Tihetology, Gangtok The Sikkim Research Institute of Tibetology, Gangtok is en gaged in research and development of Tibetology i.e. Chhos. The Institute is financed by the Government of Sikkim and the Government of India, both contributing Rs. 1 lakh cach annu ally for its maintenance. B. Propagation of C u l t u r e Propagation of Culture among College and School Students The objective of the scheme is to expose the students in our schools and colleges, the teachers and the teacher educators to the rich and diverse cultural heritage of our country so that they may grasp the inherent unity underlying the diversity of our Cultural forms. The scheme has three pans viz. : (i) organising of refresher courses for teachers drawn from secondary schools and colleges in di!T:rent parts of ihe country ; (ii) production ol' educational kits; and (iii) acquainting (he student community with artistic heritage oi' India as an integral part of Indian cul ture. During the period under report 6 Orientation Courses were organised for the teachers and teacher educators at Chandigarh, Pondicherry, Agra. Goa and Delhi. About 300 kits arc proposed to be produced during the period. Institutions engaged in literary and cultural activities The Government of India in the Department of Culture has been assisting Institutions of all-India character of the type such as Asiatic Society, Calcutta, Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture, Calcutta, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bombay, Jallianwala Bagh National Memorial Trust, Amritsar, Institute of Traditional Cultures, Madras, PEN Ail India Centre, Bombay, Numismatic Society of India, Varanasi. Some of the Institutions like Asiatic Society Calcutta, Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture, Cal cutta are given grants on the basis of the recommendations of the committees, constituted by the Government of India from 232 time to time. The other institutions are given maintenance gramts in token of the services rendered by these institutions to- waxds the cause of literary and cultural development of the country. Building Grants to Voluntary Cultural Organisations Under this scheme, a number of cultural organisations pri marily working in the cultural fields of dance, drama, music, fine arts, indology, literature (other than religious institutions), public libraries, museums, municipalities, school and universities were selected for grants for construction purposes and purchase of equipment during the year. Scheme of Inier-Stafe Exchange of Cultural Troupes The objective of the scheme is to enable people from different parts of India to know more about the culture of different re gions and thereby promote emotional and cultural integration of the country. Under it selected troupes of performing artists visit States other than their own. The schcme has been revised so as to enable the State Governments to take more interest in the schcme. During the period under report about 8 troupes visited other States/Union Territories for performing their prog rammes. Financial Assistance to professional Dance-Drama and Theatre Ensembles The objective of the scheme is to provide help to perform ing troupes in the country which have been working in the field through purely voluntary efforts over the last 10 to 15 years. 15 dance-drama and theatre groups were in reccipt of grants under the scheme during the year 1978-79. It has since been decided to institute the following two schemes in lieu of this during 1979-80 : (i) Scheme for financial assistance to institutions of national importance in the field of performing arts; (ii) Scheme for financial assistance to professional groups as well as individuals engaged in different fields of performing arts. 233 C. S cholarships a n d F e l l o w s h ip s (i) Scheme for the award of fellowship to the outstanding artists in the fields of the performing, the literary and plastic arts The Scheme provides basic financial support for either very advanced training or individual creative effort or for revival of some of our traditional forms of art to outstanding men, iii the fields of the literary, the plastic and the performing arts ii the age group roughly 25-60 years. Under the scheme, 16 fellow ships of Rs- 500 per month each are awarded each year teiable for two years. (ii) Scholarships to Young Workers in different Cultural Field? Under the Scheme, 50 scholarships arc awarded every year to young artists of outstanding proimise in the age group of 18-28 years for advanced training within India in the fielcs of Hindustani Music, Karnatak Music, Western Music, classical forms of Indian dances, Traditional Theatre, Drama, Painting and Sculpture. The value of a scholarship is Rs. 350 per nm th and the duration is for two years. In exceptional cases the s:ho- larship is extended by another year. 47 scholarships vere awarded under this scheme during 1978. (iii) Cultural Talent Search Scholarships Schcme This is a plan scheme under which facilities are provded to outstanding young children in the age-group of 10-14 yjars, studying in recognised schools, to develop their talents in var ious cultural fields, namely, traditional forms of Indian dazces, music, and theatre as well as painting and sculpture. Upto one hundred scholarships are awarded every year out of which 25 are reserved for children belonging to ‘Ghaaranas’ and ‘Sarrpra- dayas’. The scholarships are granted on year to year basi: till the completion of secondary stage of education by the awarlees or up to the age of 18 years, whichever is earlier. The vahe of scholarships is Rs. 600 per annum but where the child i; re quired to shift to a new station for purpose of specialised t-ain- ine in the approved fields the value is increased to Rs. 1200 per annum. In both cases, the actual fee paid for the speciaised training is reimbursed to scholarship holder, subject to a naxi- mum of Rs. 1000 per annum. 100 scholarships have >een awarded during 1978. The scheme for the award of scholar ships for 1979 is also being announced and State Govemirents 234 are being requested to recommend candidates. In addition emi nent persons connected with institutions working in the field of promotion of cultural activities have been requested to recom mend suitable candidates from the families or practising tradi tional forms of dances, music and other arts at least for the last three generations. Candidates" recommended by these eminent persons will also be considered along with the candidates recom mended by the State Governments and Union Territory Adminis trations. ( ev) Scheme oi financial assistance to persons distinguished in letters, arts and such other walks of life who may be in in digent circumstances and their dependants The scheme provides financial assistance to persons distin guished in letters, arts etc. who may be in indigent circumstances and to their dependants who arc left unprovided . Under the schcme a monthly allowance of upto Rs. 200 is given to per sons who are above 58 years and whose monthly income is be low Rs. 400. Under the Scheme l/3rd expenditure is shared by State Governments. In case of Union Territories and in exceptional cases the entire expenditure is borne by the Govern ment of India. At present 415 persons are receiving monthly allowance under the scheme. D. C e n t e n a r y C elebrations Memorial to Mahatma Gandhi on Beliaghata Road, Calcutta It has been decided to give Rs. 6.00 lakhs to the Govern ment of West Bengal for setting up a memorial at 150-B, Belia- ghata Road, Calcutta where Mahatma Gandhi stayed in August, 1947 and prayed for communal harmony. It is proposed to open an Adult Education Training Centre or a Craftsman Training Centre on this site as a befitting monu ment to the Father of the Nation. The Central Government contribution will mainly cover the cost of acquisition of the building and the adjoining land, repair and renovation of the building and cost of furniture and equip ment etc. for the memorial. 235 Sur Panchshati Celebrations A Sur Panchshati Coordination Committee has been set up in the Department of Culture under the Chairmanship of Dr. P. C. Chunder, Union Minister of Education, Social Welfare and Culture for celebrating on a national level the 500th anniversary of the birth of Mahakavi Surdas from May, 1978 to April, 1979. The year-long celebrations were inaugurated on May 12, 1978 (date of Mahakavi’s birth) at Mavalankar Auditorium, New Delhi by the Vice-Presidcnt of India. The highlight of the programme was the presentation of a Ras Leela Programme by a Ras Mandali from Vrindaban. Some of the major programmes planned for the celebrations relate to translation of selected verses of Surdas into Indian languages (including English); opening of a library wing on Surdas in the Central Secretariat Library; development of places associated with Surdas; holding of seminars/lectures in univer sities and colleges; programmes on radio and television; organi sation of a World Sur Conference and cultural programmes like Ras Leelas. Other Centenary Programmes Financial assistance has been provided towards certain pro grammes in the celebration of 500th Anniversary of Swami Havidas. the fc'.vth ccntewary of Mahakavi Vallathct and th; birth Centenary of the Mother of Sri Aurobindo Ashram. E. G a z e t t e e r s District Gazetteers Under the scheme for the Revision of District Gazetteers, the drafts of 290 districts gazetteers have been completed so far, of which 280 have been approved for publication. Gazetteer of India Out of the proposed four volumes of the Gazetteer of India, volume—I “Country and People”, volume II—“History and Culture”, and valume III—“Economic Structures and Activities” have been published. Volume IV— “Administration and Public 236 Welfare”, the last volume in the series, has been published. As all the copies of volume I were sold out, its reprint was brought out. Some of the chapters of this volume such as ‘People’, ‘Languages’, ‘Physiography’ which have a wider public appeal, were also brought out separately in the form of booklets. Revision of Stafe Gazetteers It was decided to publish one State Gazetteer for each State. The State Gazetteers are intended to replace the provincial Gazetteers brought out during the British period. Supplements to District Gazetteers The Supplements to District Gazetteers will update some of the material particularly economic data in the District Gazetteers which have become outdated. The Supplements will be brought out in respect of those District Gazetteers which were published 10 years back. The drafts of 8 Supplements have been comple ted, of which one supplement has been published Who’s Who of Indian Martyrs The project of Who’s Who of Indian Martyrs was completed and all its 3 volumes were published. F. C u lt u ra l R l l a h o n s Cultural Agreements and Exchange Programmes With a view to promoting cooperation with countries in the fields of education, culture, science and technology, medicine, agriculture, radio and television, film and press, art and sports, cultural agreements and exchange programmes are concluded with various countries from time to time. While cultural agree ments provide for broad terms of policy in regard to cultural contacts between the two contracting parties and financial liabi lities to be borne by each side, the Cultural Exchange Program mes are drawn up from time to time (one to 3 years) giving specific programmes of exchange during such periods. Such cooperation provides for exchange of professionals, artists, wri ters, scholars, journalists, doctors, agricultural experts, dance and music troupes, organisation of films festivals, art exhibitions, ex change of scientific and technical information, books and publi cations, radio and TV programmes, etc. 237 Till the end last year, cultural agreements had been con cluded with 51 countries. During this year, cultural agreements were signed with Malaysia and Zaire : Till the end of last year, India had Cultural Exchange pro grammes with 23 countries. During this year, Cultural Ex change Programmes were signed with the following countries. 1. Vietnam 2. Syria 3. Republic of Korea 4. Cuba 5. Tunisia Cultural Exchange Programmes with Afghanistan, Iraq, Tui- key. Mongolia and Czechoslovakia were also renewed during the year. Cultural Delegations (Outgoing Delegations) As usual, several cultural delegations, both performing and non-performing, were sent abroad. The performing troupes com prised artists from the fields of ballet, Bharatanatyam, Oddissi, Kathak, Kathakali, folk dance and puppetry, and Indian popular and classical music. These troupes visited U.K., Algeria, Ghana, Yugoslavia, Bulgaria. Romania. Syria, U.A.E., Yeman and Egypt. Notable among the troupes sent were the 42 member dance en semble consisting of the Darpana Troupe from Ahmedabad, the Kadamb School of Kathak of Ahmedabad, and Kathakali troupe of the Kerala Kala Mandalam, which visited China, the Demo cratic Peoples Republic of Korea and Hongkong. Smt. Vijayanti- mala Bali and her troupe gave performances in Paris, etc. on the occasion of the exhibition of Indian art in Paris. Delegations of experts from the fields of art and culture were also deputed to participate in festivals and seminars under the cultural exchange programmes with the USSR and to Australia to take part in the World Congress of Education through Art. Exhibitions An exhibition of Indian Art, concerning the five thousand years from the Indus Valley Civilization to the Mughal period, 238 was arranged in the Petit Palais, Paris, that was on display from 17th November, 1978 to 15th February, 1979. Another exhibition of works of modern Indian artists has been sent on a tour of West Asia and East Europe. Incoming Delegations The cultural delegations invited to visit India from foreign countries consist of performing delegations, non-performing dele gations (like educationists, officials, musicians, writers, painters, scholars, indologists, etc.) and art exhibitions comprising pain tings, photographs, graphic arts, posters etc. Until October 31, 1978, three performing groups, one each from G.D.R., Yugoslavia and Bulgaria visited India and gave performances in Delhi and other parts of India. During the same period 4 art exhibitions—one each from Poland, Iraq, Yugoslavia and Romania were also received in India. These have been displayed in Delhi and a few other places in India. The work relating to the visit of individual/non-performing delegations, boih outgoing and incomings, in the fields of art, culture and literature had been transferred to the Indian Council for Cultural Relations with effect from 1975-76. The remain ing work relating to the visits of performing delegations and art exhibitions from abroad under the Cultural Exchange Program mes has also been transferred to them with effect from 1st October, 1978. The Department of Culture will be releasing necessary funds to the Indian Council for Cultural Relations to meet expenditure on the transferred items of work. Presentation of books to foreign countries Under the scheme for presentation of books abroad, the De partment sanctioned a sum of Rs. 2 lakhs to Indian Council for Cultural Relations which administers this scheme on behalf of the Department of Culture. The ICCR have presented books, during the current year, to some 38 countries in the world. Spe cial mention may be made of gift of books to USA, Canada. Ghana, Thailand, Guyana, Fiji, Syria, Tanzania, USSR, Senegal and Algeria, Books worth Rs. 50,000 were sent to Bangladesh for presentation to various institutions. The total number of books so far sent during the current year is approximately 5,500. 239 Presentation of Art Objects Under the scheme for presentation of Art objects abroad, a sum of Rs. 50,000 is made available to ICCR. Under the scheme ICCR has despatched to various countries pieces of contemporary craft such as musical instruments, dolls, puppets, masks and costumes. Essay Competition The ICCR is administering the scheme on behalf of the Department of Culture for which the Council is granted Rs. 50,000. The objcct of holding these competitions is to create a better understanding about the life and culture of India by arousing interest among the younger generation abroad. The missions organise these competitions every year for school and college students in their territories. The Council sends items of handicrafts, books and L.P. records etc. as prizes to the winners. During the current year, prizes for these competitions were awar ded to competitors from 9 countries. Assistance to Indo-Foreign Friendship Societies Indo-Foreign Friendship Societies situated in 50 countries are assisted by grantsi-m-aid as a measure for promoting cultural contacts with India. These societies organise lectures, festivals and exhibitions on Indian Art and Culture. They also entertain prominent visitors from India when they happen to be in the concerned countries. During 1978-79, a sum of Rs. 2.60 lakhs was paid to cover 75 societies through Indian Missions abroad. CHAPTER II ARCHAEOLOGY The Archaeological Survey of India continued its activities in the various fields like Excavations, Explorations, Preserva tion of Monuments, Horticultural Operations, Chemical pre servation, maintenance of Site-Museums, preservation of Anti quities and Art Treasures and running of a School of Archaeo logy. I. E x pl o r a t io n and E xcavations A. Explorations A large number of sites were explored and discovered in parts of Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Jammu & Kashmir, Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka, Maharashtra and Uttar Pradesh which cover various periods extending from the Lower Palaeolithic Age to the medieval period. A Lower Palaeolithic site has yielded fine specimen of Acheulean hand-axes, ovates, flakes and cores of quarzite at Kalamalla village, District in Cuddapah, Andhra Pradesh. Lower Palaeolithic tools and microlith were collected from Agaria, Blarkho, Chopra, Gopisar, Hirankheda, Kharwal, Nim- kheda, Peeplekeda, Ratanpur, Satkunda and Sayatganj in Dis trict Raisen, M.P. During the course of explorations in Surguja District, Madhya Pradesh, Cores and flakes of the Upper Palaeolithic Age were collected from Jajgaon and the area surrounding the Ramgarh hill. A number of painted rock-shelters were noticed in villages Hirankheda, Kharwal, Ratanpur and Satkunda in District Raisen, Madhya Pradesh. 240 241 A late Harappan site has been located at Fatyabad, Sriram- pur Taluk, District Ahmednagar, Maharashtra. The surface collection includes good quantity of red ware, painted with designs akin to Rangpur II C pottery. Hundreds of Megalithic circles were noticed at Makalabala- palle in District Cuddapah on the slopes of Yerrakandalu hill. Some of the disturbed ones revealed cists made of thick Cuddapah slabs which are locally available. An extensive Buddhist site has been discovered at Laj- gakanuma-gutta, Nandallur Taluk, District Cuddapah, Andhra Pradesh. It contains profuse vestiges of Buddhistic establish ment. A Buddhist site containing the vestiges of stupas and other monastic establishments has been discovered on a hiJl top (Vijaya- kiladri) at Sitanagaram near Vijayawada. District Guntur, Andhra Pradesh. A four-lined Sanskrit inscription belonging to circa eighth- ninth century A.D. has been noticed on the pedestal of a minia ture votive stupa recently discovered at Raisen Fort in Madhya Pradesh. Two groups of medieval temples dedicated to Siva and Vishnu were noticed at Chidipiralla village in Kamalapuram Taluk, Dis trict Cuddapah. Both are having certain similarities in their plan and elevation. Their plan consists of square garbhagriha, ardha- mandapa followed by a closed pillared mandapa and an open mahamandapa with a provision of kakshasrna at the sides. There are some subsidiary shrines dedicated to various Partivara-devatas of respective sects. A Siva linga on a Yoni similar to one at Gudimallam is an interesting feature of a Siva temple here. An inscription engraved on a rock about 2 kms. from Arthuna, Rajasthan, was discovered. The epigraph in eight lines in Sanskrit (Nagari characters) is dated to V.S. 1181 (1124 A.D.). Traces of the mural paintings discovered below the lime- plaster in some of the halls in the Mattancherry palace, Cochin, have come out in the course of the chemical treatment. B. Excavation During the year under review, six problem-oriented excava tions were conducted in different regions of India. These cover 242 various periods of history extending from proto-historical age to medieval periods. (i) A ntichak : Excavations were undertaken at Antichak, District Bhagalpur, Bihar, to expose the remaining structures of Mahavihar. The work was completed. Portions of a boundry wall of the monastery complex have also been exposed. (ii) Chechar : Excavations at Chechar, District Vaishali, Bihar, have yielded evidence of Neolithic of occupation in the earliest period of occupation. (iii) Daunabad : Excavations at Daimabad, District Ahmed- nagar, Maharashtra, have given a sequence of five cultural phases. More evidence of late Harappan culture has been brought to light. A seal with typical Harappan pictographic script is an important find of the year. (iv ) Fatehpur Sikri : As a result of excavations conducted at Fatehpur Sikri, District Agra, Uttar Pradesh, a hammam com plex and some other buildings have been completely exposed. (v) Satanikota : With a view to scientifically assessing poten tialities of the site and salvage antiquarian remains before the area is submerged in Srisailam Project, excavations were carried out at Satanikota. The excavations revealed only one period of occupation and most important amongst the remains was a fortification wall and a moat having a draw-bridge. (vi) Sringaverapur : The ancient mound at Sringaverapur, 35 kilometers of upstream of Allahabad was jointly excavated by the Archaeological Survey of India and the Institute of Advance Study at Simla. The site had yielded a four-fold sequence from the early century of 1st millennium B.C. to 1300 A.D- C. Yillage-lo-village survey of antiquarian remains The village to village survey of antiquarian remains has been organised and the Archaeological Survey of India and 13 Univer sities and one Research Institute are at present engaged in village- to-village survey of antiquarian remains in the country. II. C onservation The Archaeological Survey of India continued to maintain, preserve and carry out major structural repairs to centrally 243 protected monuments during the year 1978-79. The Survey has faced the challenge successfully in taking up works at high altitude lor structural repairs to monuments at Ladakh. Important monu ments undergoing major structural repairs are Buddhist monu ments at Lahul-Spiti Valley in Himachal Pradesh; Parimahal and Buddhist site at Harwan in Jammu and Kashmir State ; group of temples at Bhubaneswar, Jagannatha temple complex at Puri and Sun temple at Konarak in Orissa State; astronomical obser vatories known as Jantar Mantar, the Qutab Minar, Raushanara Baradari, the Red Fort, Purana Qila and tombs of Bhure Khan and Chote Khan in Delhi; group of temples at Arthuna, monuments in Chitorgarh Fort, monuments at Deeg and Bharat- pur in Rajasthan ; Sarangpur Gate and monuments at Champaner, Dwarakadhish group of temples at Dwaraka in Gujarat State; Buddhist monument at Antichak in Bihar State; Varaha sculpture at Karanpur, monuments at Mandu in Madhya Pradesh; monu ments at Lucknow, the Taj Mahal, Red Fort at Agra, Akbar’s Tomb at Sikandara, Nirvana stupa at Deoria in Uttar Pradesh; Venkataramana temple at Gingee in Tamil Nadu; ruins at Khas- pur, Bishnudol at Sibsagar in Assam State; Gumti Gateway at Gaur and Dargah of Zafar Khan Ghazi at Tribeni in West Bengal; Bibi-ka-Maqbara at Aurangabad, Raygad Fort at Raygad, Panhala Kazi Caves, Beasein Fort in Maharashtra State; Bom Jesus and St. Francis Churches at Goa; and Tippu Sultan’s Palace at Bangalore, Cages and temples at Badami and Aihole in Karnataka State. Foi the preservation of the Shore temple at Mahabalipuram, a groyne wall is being constructed in the sea where on reclamation of land, plantation of trees will be done to act as a shield against blowing of the sea-salt. The salvation work of temples in the areas near Alampur, which are to be submerged under the Sri- salam Project in Andhra Pradesh, has also been taken up. The Survey has taken up large-scale Horticultural operation at Hampi and Chitorgarh Fort in addition to the maintenance and enlarging of gardens at various monuments. Chemical preservation of murals at Ajanta, Goa, Bundi palace, Brihadisvara temple at Tanjavur, monsteries at Tabo- in Lahu'-Spiti valley and chemical treatment of stones of tem ples at Khajuraho and Dhamek Stupa at Sarnath are being carried out. The Survey has set up a laboratory in Agra to conduct tests as also to study the air-pollution problems in and around :he monuments in Agra. 16 ESW/"8—17 244 III. P reservation O f A n t iq u it ie s A nd A r t T r e a su r e s All round progress was maintained during 1978 in the imple mentation of the various provisions of the Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972, especially in the matter of registration of antiquities and issue of licences for dealing in antiquities. Through efforts made to impress upon the people the necessity of getting their antiquities registered, the initial apathy towards registration was overcome to a very great extent and about twenty thousand objects were registered and certificates in respect thereof issued during the period under review. Due to paucity of funds. Regis tering Officers have been appointed only at important places of India, but keeping in view the extreme remoteness of Mizoram and the resulting inconvenience faced by the people there in getting their antiquities, a Registering Officer has been appointed at Aizal also. Various dealers in art objects were persuaded to take out licences for dealing in such objects, aad their response has been quite satisfactory. With a view to ensuring that people desiring to export objects of art which are not antiquities are not inconvenienced, Expert Advisory Committees have been functioning at various important places in India. During the period under review such a committee has been set up at Nagapattinam port also, thereby ensuring that the trade of export of non-antiquities from that part does not suffer. It had been found that the museums in India through purchase of objects of art and antiquities had provided an incentive to the theft of antiquities. To countermand if, the various museums have been asked not to purchase unregistered antiquities. The work of inspection of various institutions and museums, entitled in terms of the Act to exemption from registration ot' their antiquities, was continued- Guidance was issued to such bodies for complying with the necessary conditions and it is expected that very soon they would come up to the standard demanded- At the same time efforts continued for persuading such institutions as are not entitled to exemption to get their antiquities registered- Despite the delicacy of the situation caused by reli gious and emotional factors, some headway has been made. The working of the Act and the Rules made thereunder re mained under close watch and Antiquities and Art Treasures CAmendment) Rules, 1978 were promulgated to provide for tighter control over dealings in, and movements of antiquities. 245 The Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972, has now been extended to Si Idem State also. Steps have been taken to set up the machinery necessary for the enforcement of the Act in that State. For the effective implementation of the Act, a course—the 3rd Orientation Course, was organised for the benefit of all the agencies involved viz. Police, Registering Officers, Customs etc. Lectures by experts were delivered on all aspects of the matter, from the legal tc the technical ones. Various suggestions made at the course were taken notice of and follow up action was taken. To create consciousness of our cultural heritage amongst the people, an exhibition of the antiquities confiscated by the customs was organized at Bombay. Judging by the huge gathering at it, the exhibition was quite a success in arousing public interest in our antiquarian wealth. Sculptures lying loose in out-of-the way places have posed problems of protection and preservation. As a first step, measures have been initiated for their documentation and for shifting them to safe places wherever possible. In terms of the Act, only the Director-General at present can give final verdict as to whether an object is an antiquity ot not. Pursuant to this position many cases were decided by the Director-General at Headquarters office and at various other places. Most of the antiquities stolen from our monuments are des tined for the United States. As the United States has not so far ratified the Unesco Convention for the restitution of stolen cul tural property, steps have been initiated for entering into a bila teral treaty for the return of stolen cultural property with that country. IV. M u se u m s The Museums Branch of the Survey locks after 20 site mu seums spread over different parts of the country. Recently it has taken over the charge of ths War Memorial Museum at Red Fort which is proposed to be reorganised as a period museum of arms. 246 The setting up of the museums a't Taj at Agra, and Lothal, a Harappan site in Gujarat, has made considerable progress. The galleries in ground floor of the Taj Museum, highlighting the history of the construction of Taj and the period of Shahjahan, have been organised. At Lothal, the electric and water connec tions have been provided. The work of electrification at Bijapur and Halebid, both in Karnataka, has been completed. Two galleries at the Archaeolo gical Museum, Vaisali, have been set up and thrown open to the public, while the beginning of a site museum at Purana Qila has been made by displaying the representative excavated finds from th« site. Under the reorganisation programme the main hall of the Archaeological Museum, Bodh-Gaya, has been completely mod ernized, while the extension of Archaeological Museum, Halebid. by displaying more sculptures, and flooring of the Archaeological Museum, Bijapur, was also completed. Of the temporary exhibitions organized, the one put up at Gingee, Tamil Nadu, during the Second Conservation Course is noteworthy. This year one of the Directors of Survey organized the Thirteenth All-I-ndia Museums Camp at Hyderabad, the proceedings of which have been brought out. V. Sch o o l O f A rch aeolog y The School of Archaeology (under the Archaeological Survey of India functioning under a Director) has, as one of its main functions, the offering of a professional, One Year Diploma Course in Archaeology—of which the current year will be 20th session, since the inception of the School in 1959- This has been attracting officially sponsored trainees as well as students from both within the country and from the friendly neighbouring coun tries either under Colombo Plan or other arrangements, for which a seat is provided, subject to demand, every year. The expert teaching and training in the field offered under the Diploma course has been not only appreciated by these countries but also has been of benefit to them, as such a course is officially offered only in India under Archaeological Survey of India in the whole of Asia. In addition to this, special refresher as well as short term intensive courses in conservation of ancient monuments (Theory 247 and Practical) has also been one of the periodical features of the Survey and in recent years, the organisation of these has de volved upon the School of Archaeology. Two such special courses had been conductcd, one in 1977 at Mandu (Madhya Pradesh) and another in 1978 at Gingee (Tamil Nadu). In the latter one of the official trainee invitees from Sikkim has also been trained. Scholars coming to India on Cultural Exchange Programme for study of and visits to monuments have also been handled and their programme, usually, a month long, arranged by the School. Pursuant to the statutory need under the recruitment rules for Gazetted (class ]) Officers of the Archaeological Survey of India, a Departmental Training Course for Deputy Superintending Archaeologist and Superintending Archaeologist (Direct recruits j who are under probation, was also organised, after getting the necessary' syllabus and mode of examination, as a sequel to the training course, approved by Government. This course is for four months (October—January) every year, subject to the avail ability of Probationary Officers selected in a given year. The first such course was gone through in 1977-78, and the trainees were also imparted fieFd training in conservation and excavation, the latter where they had no approved experience in that field. Besides this, audio visual programmes during the theory lectures were also arranged. The syllabus was based on subjects of significance for both research and archacological administration. VI. P ublications The Survey has its own Publication Wing, which brings out, besides Archaeological and Epigraphical report of technical nature, various kinds of popular but erudite publications like guide-books on important sites and Archaeological museums, apart from folders and series of coloured and black-and-white picture postcards. The brief account of its publications during the period under review is given below :— (A) Reports of technical nature Of the two issues of Indian Archaeology— A Review, the one for 1972-73 has been published, while the next issue i.e. for 1973 74, is in the advanced stage of printing and is expected to be re leased for sale shortly ; further, the one for 1974-75 has also been made press-ready. In the Architectural Survey of Temples series was published the monograph entitled An Architectural 248 Survey of Temples of Kerala. The next number on the Cave-Tern- ples of the Deccan is in the press. The Indus Script which was published in 1978 as the Memoir of the Archaeological Survey of India no: 77 secured a trophy and a first prize in the Nine teenth All-India Master Printers Competition for excellence in printing. The next two numbers and the (78 and 79): the Report on Lothal Excavations (Part I) and Karandai Plates of Rajendra Chola I are in different stages of printing- Two volumes, one entitled Inscriptions of the Silahara and the other part II of the Inscriptions of the Paramaras Chandellos, Kachchapaghatas and two Minor Dynasties, were brought out, in the series dl the volume VI and VII respectively of the Corpus Inscriptionum Indi- carum. (B) Popular but erudite publication Five guide-books— Bhubaneswar, Sanchi, Chola Temples and Monuments of Kerala in English and Ajanta in Marathi, have been brought out. Ten such publications, Ajanta, Khafuraho, Mahabali- puram, Nagarjunakonda, Sarnath (English), Sarnath (Hindi), Amaravati, Archaeological Museum, Khajuraho, Archaeological Museum, Sanchi and Ahm edabad, are in various stages of print ing. A set of fifty picture postcards on important monuments of India and a number of other sets each devoted to monuments and museum like "Amaravati” “Halebid”, “Nagarjunakonda”, “Som- nathpur”, “Sringeri”, “Sriangapetnam” etc., were printed off. Forty coloured picture postcards and one black-and-white picture postcards set on the monuments at Gaurisagar, Jayasagar and Sibsagar (in Assam) are in press. These publications are sold at the sites for tourists and visitors. A folder on the Indus Valley Civilization was brought out on the occasion of the exhibition on the “Recent Finds from Harappan Sites”, organised at New Delhi, Bombay and Simla. CHAPTER III ANTHROPOLOGY Anthropological Survey of India, Calcutta attempts to preserve the diverse nature of our culture by orienting its programme to national tasks and by covering major gaps in developing pro gramme of nation-wide continuance of anthropological studies of human groups. Its main activities are :— (i) Physical Anthropology The research activities of the Physical Anthropology Wing encompassed different subfields such as osteology, palaeo-anthro- pology, human biology, demogenetics, dermatoglyphics, growth, and nutrition. The osteology laboratory was engaged in the restoration and preservation work of the ancient human remains excavated from different archaeological sites. An inventory of several ancient series was prepared; the remaining series are being inventorised. A report on the finds from Rupar (Punjab) was completed. The human remains excavated from the Bronze Age site at Kalibangan in Rajasthan were chemically treated and re constructed for laboratory study. Measurements were taken on this series; indices were calculated; and the stature and cranial capacity were estimated according to the standard precedure. A report entitled “Size of the post-canine tooth crowns of the Anda man Negritos” was completed. A study on the dental health of the aftcient Indian population was also completed showing that they were remarkably free from dental morbidities. The Anthro pological Survey of India collaborated with the Archaeological Survey of India by deputing officers to hold classes and deliver lectures at' the School of Archaeology, New Delhi. Blood samples were collected from different populations for studying the ABO, MN, and Rh blood group systems. Blood group data collected earlier from the Pradhan of Mandla District of Madhya Pradesh, the Parsi of Maharashtra, and the Mikir and Pnar of Meghalaya, were analyzed. Investigations on sickle cell trait, G6PD enzyme deficiency, ABH secretion, and phynyl-thio- carbamide taste sensitivity were carried out. 249 250 Five research teams were formed and deputed to work on the genetical demography of small populations in Orissa, West Bengal, and the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. The first round of field work on genetical demography has already been completed in Orissa and West Bengal. Field work has been in progress in Garo Hills and the Andaman Islands. Arrangements have been made for taking up the second round of investigations. Derma- loglyphic researches were conducted on the Parsi of Maharash tra, Dorla and Dhurwa of Bastar District (Madhya Pradesh), Nicobar Islanders, and some caste populations of Andhra Pradesh and Wesi Bengal. The relationships between dermatoglyphic characters and digital anomalies and other abnormalities were examined. Finger and palm prints collected from Karnataka, Uttar Pradesh and Kashmir were also analyzed. A study of the pattern of growth and development was con ducted among the Khasi boys and girls of Meghalaya. A report on the adolescent growth in both sexes, based on an extensive held study in Midnapore District (West Bengal), was completed. A report on the diet and body build of Lakshadweep Islanders was also completed. Anthropometric data of the Muslim and Parsi communities were statistically analyzed. Some data on bodyheight and bodyweight of the Indian people were furnished to the Finance Commission, New Delhi, as asked for by them. A number of research papers were prepared for presentation at the Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnolo gical Sciences, and also at the Indian Science Congress. An exhibition of ancient human remains belonging to the period from 2300 B.C. to 300 B.C. approximately was organised at Vigyan Bhavan, New Delhi, on the occasion of the Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences. (ii) Cultural Anthropology The Cultural Anthropology Wing of the Survey during the year 1978-79 completed the major All India Project on Tribal Customary Law. A total of 54 papers on different tribes were prepared by the research staff on the basis of field work, and a selected number of them were discussed in a seminar held at the headquarters from November 16 to 18, 1978. A volume is being edited in the light of the discussions. Research workers of the Survey are continuing the analysis of the data on^ the All India Project' “Culture Trait and Culture Area Survey”. A workshop seminar on Indian nomads was orga 251 nized b' the Survey at its Southern Regional office at Mysore in collaboration with the Indian Statistical Institute. Papers on both biological and social aspects of the nomads were presented and discussed in the seminar. On completion of 25 years of the Andamai & Nicobar Regional Office at Port Blair, a seminar on the triba: problem of the region and an exhibition of ethnographic specimers were organized from the 21st to 24th April, 1978. Scholars belonging to different Institutions participated on the seminar. A special programme of publication was also taken up on this cccasion. The Survey has actively participated in the Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Science held at New Delhi from the 10th to 16th December, 1978. About 40 original research papers were contributed by the members of the Survey to the Plenary and Post-Plenary Sessions of the Congress. An exhibition of photographs and artefacts depicting the tribal life in India was arranged at Vigyan Bhavan, New Delhi, during Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences Besides this, a total of 41 research papers including 16 on nomadic and tribal communities were completed. The Survey is continuing research work on the following topics ar.d projects : System of chieftainship in North East India; tribal politics in one selected area in Andhra: traditional political system in Central India; study of Gond Kingdom; society and culture of the people of Kulu; ethnographic study of the Tadvi Bhil; ethnographic study of the Cholanaiekens. Nicobarese, kon- dakapu, Garasia and Valmiki; Compilation of datat and prepara tion of notes on tribal education; shifting cultivation among the tribes of South, Central and North India; analysis of data on Linguistic Trait Survey and personality structure of the Bhils; comparative studies on social structure and political system of the Gonds of Central India; editing of a volume on social and political institutions of the hill people, progress of research in Cultural Anthropology between 1971 and 1975, and a compen dium on the Indian tribes. The Survey has also undertaken an AH India project on Tribal Education to identify the problems of Education in the Tribal areas. Psychology A seminar on psycho-social problems of selected tribes and ethnic groups was organized in August 1978 at the headquar 252 ters in which a number of research papers were presented and discussed. Eminent scholars from universities and other institutions participated at the Seminar. Linguistic A seminar on linguistic traits was held at the headquarters on 28-29 August, 1978 at which eminent scholars from universities and other institutions participated. Human Ecology The Survey sent a delegation to a conference held under the auspices of FAO in Bangkok from December 13 to 15, 1978 on the problem of shifting cultivation in collaboration with other developing countries of the South and Southeast Asia. Besides, special studies on the ecological adaptation of the Onge of Little Andaman and of the ethnic groups of the hill districts of Uttar Pradesh have been initiated. (iii) Museums Zonal muselims were opened at Jagdalpur in April, 1978 and at Nagpur in September, 1978. On the occasion, of inaugutation. of the museum at Nagpur a seminar on tribal situation in Central India was held at the Regional Office in which a number of papers on different tribes of the region and their problems were presented and discussed. (iv) Fellowship Programme Twenty three research fellows have been working on different problems in cultural and physical anthropology under the spon sorship of the Survey. The objective of this programme is to cncourage original research in anthropology by scholars who have passed post-graduate courses in anthropology and allied sciences. (v) Library More than 1000 books and a large number of periodicals on anthropology and allied sciences have been added to the Central and Regional libraries of the Survey during the year. 253 (vi) Photography and Cinematography A photographic album on the tribes inhabiting different regions of the country is being prepared by the Survey depicting their life and culture. The Survey participated in the meetings of the Commission on Visual Anthropology arranged during the Xth International Con gress of Anthropology and Ethnological Sciences and arranged ethnographic film shows. (vii) Publication During the period under review the Survey published three memoirs entitled “Culture Change in Two Garo Villages”, “Metal Craftsman of India”, “Impact of Industrialization on a Tribe in South Bihar”, two bulletins, and four other memoirs on urbanization, ethnolinguistics and ethnography. In addition, in formation brochures in Hindi and English were published on. the opening of Zonal Museums at Jagdalpur and Nagpur and Silver Jubilee celebration of the Andaman & Nicobar Regional Office at Port Blair. A Directory of Anthropologists in India has been arranged for publication. The publication of this Survey were exhibited at Vigyan Bhawan during the Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences, 1978. (viii) School of Anthropology A nucleus of the school of Anthropology has been organised and necessary ground work has been prepared for commencement of the courses. A draft prospectus with aims, objectives, rules, regulations, nature and extent of the courses and other details have been prepared. Courses in Anthropology in different insti tutions and rules of allied institutions were consulted and re viewed. An outline of the academic sessions and literature and practical programmes of the courses and the organisation of three semesters were discussed and developed. CHAPTER IV ARCHIVES National Archives of India is the biggest repository of Govern ment records and other archival material in the country. The notable event during the period was the celebration of ‘Archives-week’ held on 7— 13 August, 1978. In this connection to familiarize the public with the Archives, the Department orga nised an exhibition entitled “Our Heritage” based on old public records and private papers. It also invited “Open House” visits, where visitors were allowed to see the record rooms and techni ques employed in the preservation and rehabilitation of old fra gile papers. About 3000 persons, and about 2000 school and college students visited the National Archives of India during this week. Another interesting event of the period was the preparation of an album of 24 important documents in Persian available in the National Archives of India—both illuminated and in black and white—covering the period from Humayun’s times to the close of the 19th Century. The said album bearing the theme ‘Persian in Indian Administration’ was presented to the Foreign Minister of Iran on 3rd February, 1978 during the visit of their Majesties of Iran to India. Under its expansion Programme the National Archives of India would ass'ume the administrative control over the Pondi cherry Archives on January 1, 1979. Accession* During the period April-November ’78 the Department acqui red 4342 files of the Legislatives Department (1870— 1944) from the Ministry of Law and Justice; 7 Indices (1966-67) 5 files of the Ministry of States (Political Branch— 1948-40) an,d 28 files of the judicial branch from the Ministry of Home Affairs; 19 files of the standing Finance Committee (1950-53) and 48 files of Department of Expenditure (1923—57) from the Ministry of 254 255 Finance. Besides 111 authenticated Bills passed by the various State legislatures and assented to by the President of India were also received. During the remaining period under report, about 100 files are likely to be lecieved from various Ministries/Departments of the Government of India. As regards Private papers, the Department received from Shri M. K. Ghosh, of the Indian National Trade Union Congress, New Delhi, 3 files containing the papers relating to the labour move ment in Tatanagar. The Department also received as gift the following items. A Persian book entitled Dastan-i-Turhtazan-i- H ind (in five volumes) from Dr. H. R. Zaidi of Hyderabad; a diary “Lhasa at Last 1903-4” by Evan Trigh Crosleigh from the Defence Library ; 7 files, one report and some pamphlets belong ing to the late scientist Dr. Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar dealing with the scientific activities in, India during 1940— 54. Besides, on the recommendations of the Historical Documents Purchase Committee the following items were acquired on pay ment ; 91 documents in Persian in the form of Parwanas, Iqrar- nammas, Tamassuks ctc; an original farman of the reign of Shah Alam II (15th January, 1978 regarding altamgha grant; and seven old rare English books namely : (i) The Christian conquest In addition, microfilm copies of records of Indian interest were acquired from abroad & these included 51 rolls of Factory Records from India Office Library and Records, London, one Microfilm roll from the Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris, 5 microfilm rolls from Hungary; 3 microfilm rolls from Australia and 4 mic rofilm rolls of Indian National Committee, Sweden. Library About 6736 Journals, Periodicals, Gazetteers, Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha Debates were received and it is proposed to purchase more books/periodicals etc. during the remaining period. 256 Record Management During the period the Department appraised 43,791 files be longing to the following series of records : Ministry of Defence (Military Department, 1890-91), Public Works Department (1869 1923), Railway Department (1908— 52), Malwa Political Agency (1875— 1947), Bhopal Political Agency (1875— 1947J, Orissa States Agency (1904— 47), Central India Agency (1872— 1943), Bun,delkhand Agency (1827— 1947), Chhatisgarh States Agency (1901— 47), Eastern States Agency (1933— 47), Kalhiawar Poli tical A.gency (1873— 1944, 1908-—42), Gwalior Residency (1922— 47), Mysore Residency (1940—-47), Madras Residency (1875— 1925), Baroda Residency (1914— 48), and National Ar chives of India/Imperial Record Department. Out of these 13,751 files were recommended for permanent retention. As a result of the implementation of the Archival Policy Re solution issued by the Government of India, the fourth Report of the Director of Archives (1976-77) was printed and distributed among the Ministries/Departments, Offices. Besides, the fifth report of the Director of Archives (1977-78) on the subject was sent for printing which is likely to be out of the press shortly. Further, a circular letter seeking information from the Ministries/ Department's for the Sixth Report of the Director of Archives (1978-79) would also be issued by the end of the financial year. To put Record Management programme on proper lines, the Department examined Retention Schedules for records, prepared by the following agencies : Ministry of Shipping and Transport, Indian Council of Agricultural Research, Prime Minister’s Office, Department of Supply, Office of the Land and Development (Ministry of Works and Housing), National Museum, Department of Agriculture, Department of Food, Department of Company Affairs, Department of Electronics, and Ganga Basin Water Re sources Organisation. The Assistant Directors of Archives (Record Management) and other officers of the Record Management Division visited the Ministries of External Affairs and Home Affairs, Bihar State Archives, Department of Education, Pondicherrv, College of the Military Engineering, Poona, Collectorate of Custom, Bombay, Textile Commissioner, Bombay, Gujarat State High Court, Ah medabad, Controller of Insurance, Simla and advised them on their record management programme. 257 During the remaining period it is expected that the scrutiny of the Retention schedules for records of five Ministries/Depart ments will be completed and appraisal of abotot 8,000 volumes of Kathiawar Political Agency, 11,500 files of Railway Board and 10,000 files of Ministries/Departments outside National Archives of India will be completed. Towards Freedom Project Under the ‘Towards Freedom’ Project search for material from the records was continued and further selections of relevant materials were made from the collections of M. R. Jayakar (1942 47) & Rajendra Prasad (1939-42). Besides, the Unit also exa mined records of the following agencies : Home Department (Pub lic Police and Jail (1940-45), Home Political (1946-47), External Affairs (1942-44), External Affairs Political (1937), Rajputana Residency (1937-47), Freedom movement papers (B. Group, 1942-46). Further in the same connection the microfilm rolls of the private papers of Linlithgow (1937) and Haig (1937-39) were also examined and 9500 pages of the selected material were typed out. Members of the Unit also visited and selected relevant mate rial covering the years 1937-40 from the State Archives, Delhi. Rajasthan, Orissa and Uttar Pradesh. Besides keeping up its work regarding examinations and selection of material from the private papers as well as Official records the Unit proposes to select materials from State Archives of Karnataka, Madhya Pra desh and Maharashtra during the remaining period. Steady progress was maintained in the preparation of refe rence media, both for the public records and private papers. Under the programme of preparation of summary inventory of records belonging to Foreign (Secret) Department (1799-1811) during the period work on records for the year 1804 was com pleted and that on records for the year 1805 was taken up. Also subject lists of 4,777 files of different branches of Home Depart ment and 5,470 items of the collections of Rajendra Prasad, Da- dabhai Naroji, P. K. Malaviya and B. D. Chaturvedi were pre pared during April-November 1978. Besides, check lists of 61,268 files of the Public Works Department and Home Depart ment were prepared and also 800 documents belonging to the Inayat Jang collection were descriptively docketed. Subject listing of about 7,000 items of private papers, check list of about 13,800 files of Home Department (Separate Revenue) and 12,880 manuscript pages of Foreign (Secret) Department are to be prepared during the remaining period. 258 Under the project of compilation of a Guide to the Records in the National Archives of India, Part II of the guide was brought out. It covers the records of the Home Department, its predeces sor bodies {i.e. Public Department & General Department) as well as its successor body viz., Ministry of Home Affairs (1748-1957), The work regarding compilation of Part 111 (1756-1954) which is to include the records of the (i) Foreign and Political Depart ment/Ministry of External Affairs/Ministry of States and (ii) Indian Overseas Department/Commonwealth Relations Depart ment is in progress and it is expected to be completed during the remaining period under report. Research and Reference Service About 350 Indian and Foreign scholars were provided with facilities for research among the records during April—November 1978. Approximately 250 scholars are expected to attend during the remaining period. Technical Service Keeping up its programme of repair and rehabilitation of brittle documents, during the period the Department laminated 37,142 sheets, repaired 49,245 sheets and 749 maps and bound 580 volumes and 198 books. It is expected that 45,080 sheets will be laminated, 22,800 sheets will be repaired and 350 volumes and 300 books will be bound during the remaining period under report. Microfilming of records and rendering of reprographic ser vice to scholars were continued as usual. About 436260 expo sures of microfilm, 4485 metres of positive printing, 18642 xerox copies and 1635 photo copies were prepared. It is expected that during the remaining period 188000 exposures, 3225 metres of positive printing, 22042 xerox copies and 1985 photo copies will be attended to by the Department. Training in Archives Keeping During the period training facilities on the general principles of Archives Administration and repair and photo duplication of records, both in theoretical and practical fields, were provided to the trainees of the One-year Diploma Course in Archives Keeping as well as to the trainees of the short term courses of Record Management and Repair of Record. Under the One Year Diploma course 13 trainees (1977-78) completed their course and 16 candidates for the year 1978-79 course were selected. Under the 259 short term courscs of Record Management and Repair of Records 15 & 9 candidates respectively coming from various Government Departments/agencies completed their courses. In addition, special training facilities in Repair and Photo duplication were provided to nominees of the National Archives of Malaysia, and Record (Centre of National Archives of India, Jaipur. A special feature of the period under review was the commencement of the corres pondence course in Archives keeping for one year. The course was started in June 1978 and 154 candidates from different parts of India were admitted to the course and lessons were despatched to them. Practical training for these candidates would be conduct ed in National Archives of India and in selected State Archives like U.P., Orissa, Andhra Pradesh and Rajasthan. Publications During the period the following publications were brought out : Fort William India House Correspondence Vol. II (public series 1793—95, Honorary Editor Amales Tripathi) the Indian Archives Vol. XXV No. 2 (July—December 1976), Vol. XXVI No. 1-2 (January—June 1977) ; The Annual Report of the National Archives of India, 1976-77, Compendium of the Reso lutions of the Indian Historical Record Commission Volume II (1948— 72) and proceedings of the 45th Session of Indian His torical Record Commission. Compilation of Volume XXVII No. 1 (January—June 1978) of the Indian Archives was completed and it is to be sent to the press shortly. Besides, work on volume IX of Bulletin of Research Theses and Dissertations is in progress. The work regarding compilation of material for the Indian Archives Vol. XXVII, No. 2 (July—December 1978) and the Annual Report of National Archives of India, 1978 would be undertaken during the remaining period under report. National Register of Private Records Work on Volume IX containing information received from Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Karnataka, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal and also a note on the material ac quired by the National Archives of India from various private individuals during 1967-68 was completed. Compilation of volumes X and XI of the National Register is presently in pro gress. Other Activities During the period under report, several officers of the Archives were deputed abroad to various countries to participate in semi nars and conferences on various aspects of archives. 16 E SW /78— 18 CHAPTER V MUSEUMS AND LIBRARIES AND THEIR CONSERVATION AND DEVELOPMENT The Government of India' set up and have been administer ing a chain »f museums and libraries, each with distinguish ing features. They have also been extending substantial financial assistance to a few others, considered to be of great importance. Besides, they have been following a lew schemes relating to their conservation and development. An account of the activities in this field during the year is given in this chapter. M u se u m s Museums are repositories of cultural, historical, technical, industrial or other kinds of materials and help in the preservation of the National Cultural Heritage. The Government of India main tains the National Museum at New Delhi and administers some other Central Museums. They are ;— (i) National Museum. New Delhi (ii) Indian Museum. Calcutta (iii) Salar Jung Museum, Hyderabad (iv) Victoria Memorial Hall, Calcutta (v ) National Museum of Man (vi) National Research Laboratory for Conservation :>!' Cultural Property (vii) National Gallery of Modern Art (viii) Science Museums. National Museum, New Delhi The National Museum, one of the premier museums in the country, continued to develop in all directions, such as acquisi tions, exhibitions, conservation and educational activities. 260 261 Art objccts worth Rs. 8,19,000 were purchased by the Art Purchase Committee for the National Museum. Significant among the art objects are Standing Vishnu of Pallava period, 9th Cent. A.D., Ravatia shaking Mount Kailasha, Vijayanagar, 17th Cent. A.D, one jewellers mould, 3 seals and very interest ing inscribed coin of Ujjain. A gold coin of Vindhya Sakti of about 8th Cent. A.D. was donated by Shri S.M. Shukla of Bombay. Ten sculptures were received in exchange of art objects from the Sagar University Museum. Th® Archaeological Survey of India gave a long term loan of 2 sculptures from Mandor, 2 from Bassein, 2 from Badami, 2 from Ellora and one from Ajanta, besides one from Mansar and one from Pauni. Exhibitions The following exhibitions were organised in the Museum . fa) Reproduction of Ruben’s paintings (b) Contents of the 'Time Capsule.’ (c) Elwine collection of Tribal Arts and crafts. (d) Naga Arts and crafts. As part of the celebration of the Museum week (January1 8— 14, 1978) the Mlisical Instruments Gallery was formally opened by the Minister of Education, Social Welfare and Culture. Dr. P. C. Chundcr. Under the Culture Exchange Programme an “exhibition ot Indian Art” was organised by the Museum in Paris. The choice of the exhibits was made to present a cross-section of Indian Art from the days of the Harappan civilization going back to 2350 B.C. to the 19th Cent. A.D. The exhibit includes a large number of items from the collection of the National Museum but some of the exhibit belonging to some other Indian Museums and private collections have also been included. The exhibi tion opened on the J7ih November, 1978 and continued till the end of February, 1979. Under the scheme “Propagation of culture among students in schools and colleges”. 150 educational and cultural kits were prepared and distributed to such educational institutions from which teachers had been deputed to attend orientation courses organised at different places on the appreciation of fine arts. 262 A regular schedule of gallery talks by Sectional/Departmen tal heads, was instituted during the year. Besides the above, the usual guided tours, special lectures using slides and films both in the Museum auditorium and in various schools and colleges and other cultural institutions were continued. The Mobile ex hibition mounted with the exhibition “Architects of India’s glory” visited a number of schools and colleges and was seen by stu dents and teachers. At each place screening of selected films on Indian art was also arranged. The Modelling Section of the National Museum continued to prepare replicas of Masterpieces of Indian sculptures and bronzes from the Museum collections for sale to the visitors as well as supply 10 the educational and cultural institutions. Conservation The Conservation Laboratory continued to advise and assist Museums in India in conservation and preservation of art objects in their collections. It has also been assisting the National Museum of Afghanistan in then- conservation needs for setting •up a laboratory at Kabul. A three months course on conserva tion of cultural property is being organised from middle of Feb ruary until May 1979. Publications The following publications are in process : — (a) Krishna in Indian Art—-by Dr. P. Bancrjee (being completed). (b) Babamama—by Dr. M. S. Randhawa (c) Ritual Arts in rural India—by Mrs. Pupal Jayakar (d) Two sets of colour picture post cards of miniature paintings in the National Museum collection. (e) Javar Gita Govinda—by Dr. (Smt.) Kapila Vatsyayan (f) Directory of Museums in India. Indian Museum, Calcutta The Indian Museum, Calcutta comprises three Sections viz. Art. Archaeology and Anthropology. 263 Three new Galleries in the Art Section viz. (i) Chinese afnd Japanese art objeets; (ii) Burmese art collections and (iii) Nepa lese and Tibetan Art and Craft were declared open to the public on the 30th May, by Dr. S. K. Mukherjee, Vice-Chancellor, Cal cutta University. About 285 selected specimens of applied, ritual as well as sculptural art, which fairly represent a cross-section of these phases of -ail in these five countries, were displayed. The work of setting up a Physical Anthropology Gallery of the Anthropology Section is in progress and is expected to be com pleted within a few months. A Plan for setting up a' Gallery for the display of the coins has been finalised and the v'.ork will be undertaken shortly. Publications The following publications have been published dui\n;i the year under report : — (1) Multi-coloured picture Postcards (Painting arid Ar chaeology)—Reprint. (2) Tribes of Ancient India' (I.M. Mono. No. 7 )— Smt. Mamata Chowdhury. O ) Medical Science in Pali Literature (I.M. Mono-. ! 0) — Dr. .1. R. Haidar. (4) India Museum Bulletins, Vol. X No. 2, Vo.. XII, No. 1. (5) Archaeology Guide Book (English)—Reprint. The following publications are in Press : — (1) Indian Museum Bulletins, Vol. XT, No. 2, Vol. XII, No. 1. (2) Remains of the Bharhut Stupa' in the Indian Museum (I.M. Mono. No. 9)—Shri A- Ghosh. (3) Asokan Studies— Dr. D. C. Sircar. (4) Kushana Coins of the Land of the five Rivers (I.M. Mono No. 12)—Dr. B. N. Mukherjee. Exhibitions (a) An exposition on “Recent Collections of the Indian Museum” displaying the acquisitions of the Art, Archaeology and Anthropology Sections of the 264 Museum since 1972 to-date was inaugurated on the 8th September, 1978 by Mr. Raymond L. Perkins, Consul-General, United States of America. (b) The Exhibition on “Sculpture on Pala—Sena Art” inaugurated by Prof. S. K. Saraswati on the 13th March, continued upto 27th March, 1978. The Exhibition attracted a good number of visitors. (c) An exhibition on Mythological Lithographs was in augurated by Mr. Prafula Chandra Gupta, Vice Chancellor, Rabindra Bharati, on 1st December, 1978 which continued upto 5th December. 33 Litho prints of Mahavidyas, Avalares, Krishnalila and Hindu divinities were on show- (d) An exhibition on selected objects of folk arts was inaugurated by Prof. Niharranjan Ray on 19th December, 1978 folk and tribal objects like scroll paintings, ornaments, wooden dolls, wood carvings, textiles, Kanthas, Bhokra metal objects, tribes of West Bengal, photographs, charts and others were on show. (e) A series of temporary exhibitions entitled “Exhibit of the Month” was displayed every month in the specially oriented show-case set-up at the entrance hall of the Museum. Lectures A number of lectures under the Mass Education Scheme was organised during the year under report. In order to mark the hundred years of opening of Galleries in the present building, the museum also arranged a special lecture programme entitled Museum-Reviewed. Seninar Indian Museum in collaboration with Science Club and the Centre for Study of Man and Environment organised one day seminar on “Environment, Man and Society”. The Museum in collaboration with the Posts and Telegraphs Department organised a function on “Release of stamps on Museums of India”. Shri T. N. Singh, Governor of West Bengal, 265 released a set of four stamps, one of which depicted Kaloadruma stone capital from the Indian Museum on 27th July, 1978. Mobile Exhibition The Museo-Bus containing dioramas on Indian History and Archaeology travelled different districts of North Bengal from 17th April 1978. The Musco-Bus also placed and kept in view at different Educational Institutions and Museums in Calcutta, viz., National Library, Victoria Memorial. Jadavpur University and Children Little Theatre. Salar Jung Museum, Hyderabad Acquisition of art objects The programmes of ‘.he Salar Jung Museum, Hyderabad are intended to acquire, document, preserve, exhibit and interpret the objects of ancient and medieval art and culture. The following are the significant activities of the Museum for the year under reference : Documentation Apart from the basic accession registers of the museum, docu mentation of the exhibits has been taken up on modern and scientific lines by means of card indexing of various mediums of ntt objects in the museum. Further a special documentation of the inscribed art objects in the museum collection has been taken u d . Exhibition & Presentation A ‘Gallery of Jade and precious Stones’, renovated and syste matically presented was opened on 19th September, 1978. Educational programmes and services (i) 13th All India Museums’ Camp was held from 20th to 26th June, 1978. Official delegates from various museums all over the country attended and discussed the subject of ‘Protection of moveable cultural property’. 266 (ii) A lecture was arranged on ‘Devi Mahatmya in Pahari paintings’ by Sri F. S. Aijazuddin, an expert in the field of 1r.'li,uu miniatures. (iii) An exhibition on ‘Conservation ot art objects represent by photographs and also scientific instruments was held a; wocn 20th to 26th June, 1978. (iv) Ail exhibition on ‘Pictorial Art of East India Compa/)/ was arranged based on the objects in the museum from '4-fk .o 20th November, 1978. (v) An exhibition on 'Calendar Architecture’ wii arranged by the museum in collaboration with Max-Mueller Bh.ivan at Hyderabad from 24th November to 2nd December. 1078. (vi) The Children’s week was celebrated from 14th ; ■ 20:ii November. As usual school children below the age of 12 year; were allowed free of admission charge. As part of the set viccs during this week film shows were held by the museum daily during this period on art, monuments and children’s films. Handouts containing the information on museum galleries were distributed freely to the visitors in four languages (Telugu, Urdu, Hindi lu: J English) on Salar Jung Museum, European Statuary, clock root:1., Indian miniature paintings, European oil paintings and jade an.: precious stones. As part of this programme educational compe titions were held for the school and junior collcge students v: essay writing and debating (in four languages) :md also -n drawing. Conservation During this period about 5,985 objects of different mediums were given preservation treatment. Publications Salar Jung Museum Bi-Annual Research Journal Voi. IX and X was published. A catalogue of Arabic manuscripts (in the Salar Jung Museum Collection) Vol. Ill was also released on 19th September, 1978. Special events In connection with the birth anniversary of Salar Jung III a multilingual poet gathering was held on 19th September, 1978 267 and also the catalogue of Arabic manuscript Vol. Ill was released on the same day by H.E. Sri K. C. Abraham, Governor of Andhra Pradesh and Chairman, Salar Jung Museum Board, Victoria Memorial Hall, Calcutta The Memorial in Us new: wie as a period Museum Pursuant to the programme of re-orientation of the Memorial as a period museum of Indian History (1700— 1900), the Memo rial took steps to acquire contemporary Indian source materials consisting of maps, paintings, drawings, manuscripts, documents, coins and arms and weapons. Archival materials have received considerable additions in the form of manuscripts and rare books. About 2000 photo-prints have been obtained of objects and relics bearing relevance to the period 1700— 1900 of Indian history. A significant acquisition is a large oil-painting of C. Rajagopala- chari donated by the Rajaji Birth Centenary Celebration Committee of Madras. The Research Unit has initialed a project of photographic and historical studies on houses in the Indian town of Calcutta. The project envisages preparation not only of photographic records but also of relevant historical and biographical data on the Indian families to which the houses belonged. The number of houses so far covered in camera is 52. Preparatory work for remodelling the existing Durbar Hall as a People’s Hall and for construction of a new auditorium-cum- administrative block has been undertaken. Work in connection with the setting up of a Centre for Advanced Study on Calcutta, is also in progress. Another item in the project of display provides for setting up of new boards and cases for display of new acquisitions, besides a suitably designed display stand accommodating select objects relevant for recalling momentous events in Indian History on anniversary occasions. The project also envisages the installa tion of a device of taped-voice recording recitals, music and songs by way of illustrating the various phases of our national move ment with special reference to the activities of the great leaders whose portraits adorn the galleries. Popular lectures on the museum subject and special exhibitions on themes like Aesthetic of Architectures; Cities and Towns in 268 India 18-19 cent.) ; Rare Books in the collection of Victoria Memorial and the Common Man in India (18th and 19th centuries) so as to re-capture with visual aids various important phase-1 of India's political, artistic and cultural activities of the 18th .rid 19th centuries were the highlights of the Memorial’s educaf onal programmes. 7'he publications brought out have been planned with the iwc~H> d object of acquainting visitors and the larger public with classified sectional catalogues of museum objects and of supple ment'ng the work of educational institutions through features like ‘The City of Job Charnock’ in the History Portfolio Series brought out in succession to the Nawabs of Bengal, the biographical sketches of National leaders of India, autograph of national leaders of Indii; and low-priced pamphlets. The Bulletin continues to be an annual item in the Memorial’s publications. The programme also provides for publication of low-priced illustrated folders in addition to picture and folio cards in colour. Nafonal Museum of Man I'i i National Museum of Man has been conccived as an Institution where man and his activities from the earliest prehisto ric tirno shall be dealt with. The main focus of the Museum will be or the following topics . A. Evolution of man and human variation. B. Man and Culture and C. Material Culture in Indian Unity and Diversity. The collection of the Museum is still limited, about 144 specimens in number. Steps have already been taken for the for mation of a purchase Committee to advise purchase of necessary object' for the Museum. The Photographic Section of the Museum has prepared about 750 colour slides, 800 black and white prints in addition to 1200 negatives and 300 ft. cine coverage and one cassette sound recording concerning the Pushkar Fair. The Photo Office:" has been deputed also to cover the Ganga Sagar Mela. The National Museum of Man has built a very useful library consisting of books pertaining to the various ethnographical fields of specialisation. Tt has now in its collection about 3089 volumes. 269 National Research Laboratory for Conservation of Cultural Property The Laboratory is no v housed in a more spacious building and the nucleus having been started during 1977-78, more scientific and technical posts were created during the year. Many of them have been filled up and others are in the proccss of being filled up. The laboratory now has some special equipment like Emission Spectrograph, Flame Photometer, Metallurgical Microscope and Mlicro-chemicul Ki, ctc. The Laboratory continued its research programmes during the period under report. Several museums and archaeology departments asked for advice on conservation pro blems Suitable comments were sent to them for their assistance. Important Conservation Projects Preservation of wall paintings at Virupaksha Temple, Hampi On the request of the Director of Archaeology and Museums, Karnataka, chemical cleaning and conservation of wall paintings at Virupaksha temple, Hampi was carried out. The paintings had a thick coating of oily accretions. A complete photographic docu mentation of the work done at Hampi was maintained. Now the paintings of Vijayanagar period in this temple have been exposed to their true tonal value. Conservation of stone sculptures at Mathura On the request of the Director of the Government Museum, Mathura, a team was sent to Mathura for cleaning and consolida tion of sculptures found at Govindnagar and now housed in the Government Museurm, Mathura. There were thick deposits of lime and clay on the surface of the sculptures thus obliterating ihe fine carved details. Layers in these sculptures were separating out. The surface of these sculptures has now been cleaned and the stone strengthened. Preservation of wall paintings at Kusum Sarovar, Govanlh.an On the request of the Director of Archaeology, U.P. Govern ment, a special project has been undertaken to preserve the wall paintings at Kusum Sarovar, Govardhan. The wall paintings have been executed on lime plaster which has separated away from the brick wall at many places. All the paintings are covered with white and black stains. Full photographic documentation of the wall 270 painticgs has been completed. The causes of deterioration -'iave been tsccrtained and the w ork of cleaning and strengthening ‘.he paint l.as been taken u d . J I 'lin iu g (a; A six months training course on ‘Conservation of cultural properly’ commenced on the 1st September, 1978. 10 trainees are participating in the course. Three of them are from abroad and the remaining from different museums and Archaeological Departments of various States. The course is given in collaboration with UNESCO and prepares trainees for conservation work. Besides the staff of the Laboratory, experts from other institutions, were invited to deliver lectures to the trainees and ” !,old practical demonstrations. (b) A special course of 10 days’ duration on ‘Car. and maintenance of Museum collections’ was arranged for the s..’dents of the Department of Museology, Faculty of Fine Arts, M. S. University of Baroda. 12 students participated in the cours: Library and Documentation More scientific and technical books and reprints of co.-.^rva- tion articles have been added to the library. Bibliographies on various subjects are being prepared. In collaboration with the International Centre ior Conservation, Rome, this library is being developed as ihe Asian Conservation Documentation Centre Publication The publication “Care and preservation of Museum objects” is being translated into Hindi. This is a fully illustrated book for the uso of the curators. Foreign Missions and Meetings Shri O. P. Agarwal, Project Officer attended the Council meeting of the International Centre for Conservation, Rome, held from 30th April to 5th May, 1978. He also attended the meeting of the Training Experts invited by UNESCO. Shri O. P. Agarwal was the leader of the team which was sponsored by the Government of India to participate in the semi nar on Conservation of paper materials arranged at New York 271 under the auspices of the Indo-U.S. Commission on Art and Culture. The seminar was held in the U.S.A. from the l^th to 16th June, 1978. National Gallery of Modern Art The National Gallery of Modern Art continued its endeavour to enrich its collections by acquiring outstanding pieces of Art. During the period under review, 116 works of art were added. Further, a few more works of art were received as a gift through the courtesy of the Embassy of Yugoslavia. A prestigious exhibition of modern French paintings was arranged including masterpieces by well-known masters such as Monet, Deges, Cezanne and Pissaro etc. On behalf of the Government of India, Department of Culture, an exhibition of Modern Indian art by 89 artists has been sent abroad and was successfully shown in Iran, Syria and Poland. This exhibition will also be shown in Czechoslovakia, Himgary, Bulgaria, USSR and Iraq. Another major exhibition “Swiss Photographers from 1840 until today” was organised in November /December, 1978. The following publications were brought out during this year :— (i) A Handbook of Surrealist paintings from the collection of the National Gallery of Modern Art, (ii) A folder on the National Gallery of Modern Art in Hindi with black and white reproduction, (iii) Half Imperial size multi-colour reproductions of two paintings namely “Companions” by N. S. Bindre and “Mother & Child” by Ganesh Pyne, (iv) A catalogue for the exhibition “Swiss Photographers from 1840 until today”. Under the education programme, 4218 students along with 430 teachers and adults of 65 schools and colleges from all over the country visited the National Gallery of Modern Art and were provided conducted guided tours. 272 Art appreciation programmes were arranged during summer vacations and a series of lectures on History and Art were deli vered for the members of the Association of the Wives of the Diplomats, specially those of the officers of the Ministry of External Affairs. Science Museums The National Council of Science Museums was registered on April 4, 1978 under the West Bengal Societies Registration Act, 1961 and administers— (a) Birla Industrial and Technological Museum, Cakutia. (b) Visvesvaraya Industrial and Technological Mu>~um, Bangalore. (c) Nehru Science Centre, Bombay. These three Museums have been transferred from the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research to the Department of Culture. The Union Minister of Education is the President of the National Council of Science Museums Society. The objects of the NCSM include, inter-alia, the establishment and administration of new museums of the kind. An Indo-US Exhibition on "Technology—The American Ex perience’ was successfully organised at 6 centres in India. Apari from its normal activities, the Visvesvaraya Industrial and Technological Museum at Bangalore had mounted a special exhi bition on the late Sir C. V. Raman, in collaboration with !he Raman Research Institute, Bangalore. The exhibition marked the occasion of the Golden Jubilee of the discovery of Raman Effect which was awarded Nobel Prize. The Birla Museum at Calcutta has recently completed a four-storeyed Technology Centre’ in a record time. The Indo-US Exhibition at Calcutta was organised in the new building and was inaugurated by the Chief Minister of West Bengal. The Birla Industrial and Technological Museum is also engaged in the development of Shri Krishna Vigyan Kendra, Patna for which the land and the partly completed building iiave been gifted by the Government of Bihar. TTie Kendra is func tioning with a skeleton Administrative staff lent from the Birla Industrial and Technological Museum for the present. The Visvesvaraya Industrial and Technological Museum has also com pleted six-storeyed Exhibition Production Centre with facility for design and production of models, training of science teachers in 273 fabrication of demonstration aids, hobby ccntres for the students, etc. The mobile exhibition of the Visvesvaraya Industrial and Technological Museum is being augmented and extended to cover the 4 Southern States. In the Nehru Science Centre, Bombay, piling work for the Science Centre has already been completed, and designs are ready for the structure with a floor area of 98,000 sq. feet. The Centre is also undertaking mobile science exhibitions. Nehru Memorial Museum and Library The Museum attracted, as in the past, a large number of visitors from different pans of the country. A significant activity of the Museum was the opening of a new exhibition entitled ‘Emergence of Gandhi, Non-Co-operation Movement and after’ which proved of great interest to the visitors. This exhibition, which will be on permanent display, unfolds the dramatic events of the years 1915— 29, leading to the emergence of Mahatma Gandhi as the foremost nationalist leader and the transformation of the Indian struggle for freedom into a mass movement of epic dimensions. A very substantial addition was made to the library and archival resources during the period. The number of books added to the pre-existing stock of the library was 2,550. 'hereby in creasing the total holdings to 66. 124, of which 4, 107 com prised old newspaper volumes. The library has also embarked upon a programme of acquiring books in the various regional languages. The resources of the library were also augmented through the purchase of microfilm of the Bengalee newspaper and the acquisition of 40 unpublished dissertations on modern Indian history, raising their total number to 404. The collection of photographs as on 30 November, 1978 had reached the figure of 47,623. ‘ The Reprography unit maintained a high level of activity, microfilming segments of back files of old newspapers including A mrita Bazar Patrika, Hindustan Times, People, the Twentieth Century, Radiance and the Servant of India. A special effort is being made to build up resources in vernacular newspapers, the objective being to have at least one representative newspaper in each regional language. Under this programme the A iia m ia t (Urdu daily), the Krishna P atrika (Telugu), the Mathrubhumi (Malayalam daily) Mazdoor Kisan (Punjabi) were some of the newspapers microfilmed during the period. An equally significant 274 activity of the unit, was the filming of nearly 100 land settlement reports, and the Debates and Questions on Indian Affairs (1890— 1937) which comprise selections from the proceedings of the British Parliament. The Preservation unit continued the work of renovation and rehabilitation of manuscripts. The Manuscript section was enriched through the acquisition oi the records of the Servants of India Society and the private papers of prominent public figures such as Gopi Chand Bhargava, H.N. Kunzru, Sunder Singh Majithia, Saifuddin Kitchkw, Ajil Prasad Jain, Syama Prasad Mookerjee, Tej Bahadur Sajpru, Birba! Sahni, Giani Gurmukh Singh Musafir, Shankar Rao Deo, Bisnuram Mchdi, and Ram Manohar Lohia, to mention only a few. The papers of Jamaitul-ulema-i-Hind, and Maharshi D. K. Karve were microfilmed. The Oral history section recorded one hundred and eleven sessions of interviews with thirty persons. Prominent among those interviewed are Shri Jagjivan Ram, Shri Y.B. Chavan, Shri Gulzari Lai Nanda, Shri Hitendra Desai, Shri Brahm Perkash, Shri Tridib Chaudhuri and Shri B.T. Ranadive. A number of lectures and seminars bearing on Indian na tionalism and the history of modern India were arranged. The seminar on ‘Recent Writings on Gandhi’ was attended by dis tinguished scholars. The symposium on ‘Jawaharlal Nehru and Parliament’ was held on 13 November 1978, which was presided over by the President of India. The speakers included Shri Y.B. Chavan, Dr. Sushila Nayar, Shri N.K. Krishnan and Shri Frank Anthony. A volume of “Essays in Modern Indian History,” and an other entitled “Gandhi and Nehru”, based on the papers presented at the seminars and lectures arranged by Nehru Memorial Museum and Library were edited, and sent to the press for publication. Dr. Zakir Husain Memorial Museum, New Delhi The Dr. Zakir Husain Memorial Museum, New Delhi was opened to the public on the 3rd May, 1976. Initially the Museum was set up with the material which was then available. The Museum is functioning under the supervision of the National Museum, New Delhi. Gandhi Darshan Samiti The object of the Samiti is lo acquire, maintain anti preserve the personal papers and other historical materials pertaining to the life and work of Mahatma Gandhi in consultation and col laboration with other institutions and organisations engaged in Gandhian work. 74572 persons visited the Gandhi Darshan Exhibition during the period under report. The Gandhi Darshan Exhibition remains open to the public daily from 9.30 a.m. to 5.30 p.m. except on Mondays and gazet ted holidays. Following special programmes were organised during the period under report : To highlight the importance of World Environment Day ori 5th June, an exhibition "Gandhiji and Environment" at Rabindra Bhawan, New Delhi was organised. It was inaugurated by the Liason Officer of the United Nations. Mr. Graham Searle. Dr. B. D. Nag Chaudhary, Vice Chancellor, Jawaharlal Nehru Uni versity presided over the inaugural function. This exhibition remained open till 12th June 1978. Gandhi Darshan put up a “Bapu Mandap” in ihe Gandh) Mela organised by the Municipal Corporation of Delhi from 29th September to 5th Octcbcv, 1978- This Mandap was vivted by lacs of people and was very much appreciated by them. Exhibitions in the Darshan complex were held during the year. Besides, a 4-day Bal Mela was organised on the 2nd October, 1978. Gandhi Darshan put up on 17th November, 1978 a '‘Gandhi Mandap'’ in the National Small Industries Fair on an invitation of the Trade Fair Authority of India. This exhibition whose theme was “Sevagram Sadhana” remained open to the public till 19th December, 1978. During this period about 5 lacs people drawn from all walks of life visited this Mandap put up by Gandhi Darshan. Special films were also shown to groups of children. Taking Gandhi to Schools programme The ‘Taking Gandhi to Schools Programme’, which was started in November, 1977, has proved very successful and the school community has shown a keen interest in this programme. 16 ESW/78—19 276 During the period under report, a group of about 100 students and teachers of various schools and a few staff members were taken on a 15-day educational-cum-excursion tour of South India commencing from 27th May 1978. The main aim of organising this tour was to acquaint the students wirh various places connected with Mahatma Gandhi and also with cultural heritage of India. Besides the above, various orientation camps were also arranged for students and teachers in the Gandhi Darshan com plex itself. A survey has also been made by the employees of this unit to find out the possibilities of conducting classes under the Adult Education Programme, which has recently been launched all over the country. Youth Training Centre Under this scheme three 11-day camps were arranged at Village Baheri in Himachal Pradesh. During the duration of these camps the participants undertook the manual labour work by repairing the roads. Besides cultural programmes and routine works, visits were also arranged for keeping a contact with these villages. Several 1-day camps were also arranged for the students of schools/colleges of Delhi. The main aim of organising these camps was to acquaint the student community with the teachings of Gandhiji with a view to enabling them to feel the relevance of his teaching’s in the present times. Arrangements for providing accommodation have been made in the Maharashtra Mandap of Gandhi Darshan, where the groups of students and teachers from other states are allowed to st.iy during their visit to the Capital. Some charges are recovered from them towards electricity, sanitation etc. Art and Exhibition Wing The Art and Exhibition Unit of the Gandhi Darshan organised 4 main exhibitions during the period under report. Photo Unit_ During the period under report a number of photo enlarge ments were prepared in the photo-unit for various exhibitions. 277 A few photographs were also supplied to Government and other departments for display and exhibitions. General To popularise the Gandhi Darshan and its activities free film shows were most frequently organised for which press releases were given in the engagement columns of daily newspapers and also over the All India Radio from time to time during the period under report. A mini-bus has been purchased. This bus is being used for mobile exhibitions and cinema shows around Delhi. Schemc of reorganisation and development of other Museums Under this scheme, non-recurring grants are given to the Tribal Art Museums. Textile Museums, Crafts Museums, Anti quity Museums, Tantra Art Museums, Numismatic Museums. Memorial Museums, Paintings and Photographic Museums. Chil dren Museums and School Museums, managed by the voluntary institutions, societies, trusts, colleges, universities, municipalities, corporations, i.e. all museums except those directly managed by the State Governments and the Central Government, for (i) establishment of museums, (ii) equipments, (Hi) publication of catalogues, guides to galleries, card indexes, etc. (iv) Museum laboratories and Museum libraries. All India Museum Camp Every year a Museum Camp is held in a big museum. Participants from various museums in the country discuss various aspects of museology and mtlseum management and establish personal contacts with museum personnel in their line. 13th All Indian Museum Camp was held in Salar Jung Museum, Hyderabad in June, 1978. L ibraries National Library, Calcutta National Library is at present a subordinate office under the Department of Culture and the Director enjoys the financial and administrative powers as are delegated to the Head of the Department. Professor R.K. Das Gupta functioned as the Director during the period. 278 The Library is the biggest library in the country and has 1.7 million volumes, stored in the main building at Belvedere and in three others—the Annexe, the New Stack and the Esplanade Read ing Room. Under the Delivery of Books Act the Library receives books, periodicals, newpapers and documents of all sorts issued for general circulation. The Library is also the foremost reposi tory of documents emanating from the United Nations and its agencies. The Library has exchange relations with 144 institution-: in 50 countries. Professor Elena Savova, Director, Central Library, Bulgarian Academy of Sciences visited India for a period of one month under an lndo-Bulgarian Cultural Exchange Programme. Shri Gobinda Lai Ray, Assistant Librarian visited USSR under Indo-Soviet Cultural Exchange Programme. The Library has published bibliographies and catalogues of its holdings with a view to disseminating information. The Library celebrated the Platinum Jubilee during April 1978. Also the Mahakavi Vallathol Centenary Exhibition and the Exhibitions arranged during the Platinum Jubilee Celebration deserve special mention. During the year under review, the Labo ..tory Division of the Library disinfected 4.55,500 volumes and chemical treatment of 4,55,500 books and 44,260 sheets was also undertaken. Central Reference Library, Calcutta The Central Reference Library has been publishing the Indian National Bibliography since the last quarter of 1957. During the year under review the following Roman script issues were com piled and printed : 9 Monthly issues from July, 1977 to Vtarch, 1978 have been compiled and edited. The following language bibliographies are in the State Gov ernment Presses under print: Marathi Bibliography 1970 Punjabi Bibliography 1973-74 Tamil Bibliography 1968— 74 Oriya Bibliography 1964-68 Hindi Bibliography 1971 Malayalam Bibliography 1977 279 The following language fascicules of the Indian National Bibliography have been compiled and made ready for the press : Assamese Bibliography 1971-78 Bengali Bibliography 1978 Hindi Bibliography 1972-76 Malayalam Bibliography 1978 Oriya Bibliography 1969-78 Punjabi Bibliography 1975-78 Sanskrit Bibliography 1968-77 Telugu Bibliography 1971-72 Kannada Bibliography 1972-74 Urdu Bibliography 1966-75 Index Indiana This is a quarterly publication containing the indexes oi articles appearing in Indian language periodicals in major Indian languages recorgnised by the Constitution. An experimental fasci cule of Index Indiana covering three languages—Hindi. Marathi and Tamil, has been compiled and cyclostyled. Copies have been sent to various libraries and educational institutions m India and abroad for their comments. First Quarterly issue for the period, January to March. 1977 covering 6 languages—Hindi, Marathi, Tamil, Gujarati, Bengali and Malayalam has been compiled and printed in cyclostyled form. April-June issue is setting ready for the press. Khuda Baksh Oriental Public Library, Patna The Khuda Baksh Oriental Public Library, Patna is a major Library with a collection of Arabic and Persian manuscripis. The Library possesses about 65,000 printed books and 12.750 manuscripts. During the year about 46 manuscripts have been acquired. In printed book section 510 printed books have been acquired. Memoirs of Jahangir, Diwan of Mushafi, Diwan-i-Hafiz are being reproduced, most of them in photo-offset. A ciuarterly journal with an aim to introduce the Librarv malerin1 to the outer world of research, is being published. To tuui'C lie grow ing number of manuscripts and printed books, a scheme to extend the librarv building has been prepared and finalised at the esti mated cost of Rs. 13 to 14 lakhs. 280 Raja Kammohan Roy Library Foundation, Calcutta The Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation was establish ed in 1972 as an autonomous body to strengthen the library movement in the rural areas. The Foundation has so far rendered assistance to more than 8000 libraries at various levels all over the country. The Foundation has also undertaken the schemes of developing mobile library services and rural book deposit centres. The Evaluation Committee appointed by the Foundation last year has given its report. The Committee has recommended substantial expansion of its activities during the Sixth Plan period. T.M.S.S.M. Library, Thanjavur The Thanjavur Maharaja Serfoji Saraswati Mahal Library, Thanjavur has a rich collection of manuscripts numbering 40,000 in Sanskrit, Marathi, Telugu, Tamil and other languages. Besides manuscripts, it has a collection of over 23,000 books in the Indian and European languages covering various disciplines. The question of treating the Library as an institution of national importance has been under consideration. It was suggest ed to the Government of Tamil Nadu that the management of the Library should be entrusted to a body to be set up under an Act of Parliament on the pattern of the Board of the Khuda Bakhsh Oriental Public Library. Patna. The reply from the present Gov ernment of Tamil Nadu for entrusting the management of the said library to a high powered Board is awaived. The Gov;rnmcnt of India have set up a small committee to assess the financial re quirements of the Library and also make recommendations for its future development. The Report of Committee has been accepted by the Government of India. The main recommendation of the Committee deals with purchase of equipment for lami nation famigation. micro-filming, reprography and for air condi tioning of selected portions for preservation of manuscripts. A recurring annual expenditure of Rs. 3 lakhs (approximately) is to be borne by the Government of India for the maintenance of the Library in addition to the grant of Rs. 57,500 which the Govern ment of Tamil Nadu have agreed to pay to this Library. Delhi Public Library', Delhi The Delhi Public Library provides public library service for the people of the Union Territory of Delhi and acts as a model for the public library development in India- It has a main library, 4 branch libraries, 18 sub-branches, 14 deposit stations and 4 book mobiles. 281 44 022 volumes were added to the book stock of the Library during the period raising the net book-stock to 5,95,383 out of which 3,27,309 are in Hindi. 1,64,401 in English, 68.326 in Urdu, 25,098 in Punjabi, 2,098 in Sindhi, 1,093 in Bengali and 7,058 in Braille. About 54,770 adults and 4308 children participated in the cultural activities (e.g. lectures, discussions, dramas, film shows, television viewing etc.) organised by the Library. The Library had 2586 Gramophone Records, which were borrowed by mem bers about 48.695 times up to the period under report. The registered membership of the Library stood at 1,04,387 during the period under report. The total number of books issued during the period was 24.75,922. Indian Council of World Affairs, Library, New Delhi The Indian Council of World Affairs Library is the only v.vll- equipped research library in Asia and Africa on international relations and area studies. The Department of Culture is pay ing as ad-hoc grant of Rs. 1.00 lakh to the library every year for meeting the recurring and non-recurring expenditure. The working of the Library was reviewed by a Committee. On the basis of the report of the Committee which has been accepted by the Government it is proposed to give an increased assistance to this Library. Central Library, Bombay This is one of three libraries which are at present authorised to receive books and newspapers published in the countrv under the Delivery of Books and Newspapers (Public Libraries) Act. 1954 as amended in 1956. The Central Government is assisting this Library to the extent of two-thirds of the non-recurring ex penditure and half of the recurring expenditure on the DBA Section of the Library. The report of the Committee appointed by the Government of India in consultation with the Government of Maharashtra has since been accepted by the Government of Tndia. Increased finan cial assistance will be given to this Librarv after the repo'f of the Committee is put into operation by the Government of Mahara shtra. 282 Rampur Raza Library, Rampur Rampur Raza Library, Rampur has valuable holdings of man uscripts in oriental languages of Persian. Arabic and Urdu as well as a collection of rare Moghul and Iranian paintings and other rare published works. This library, apart from acquiring more manu scripts and printed works every year, provide facilities to resear chers working in different fields of oriental and Islamic learning. This Library is also continuing its programme of publication of Arabic, Persian and Urdu manuscripts catalogues. It has also planned to get 5000 manuscripts and books bound in the coming years. Library of Tibetan Works and Archives, Dharamsala The Library is functioning as a registered societv and is managed by a Board with H. H. the Dalai Lama as Chairman. Its aims and objectives arc to acquire and conserve Tibetan books and manuscripts, to provide intensive reference scrvice and to act as a Centre for enquiries on Tibetan sourcc materials. It has a rich collection of Tibetan manuscripts, paintings and objects d’ arts. The library is maintained on grants from the Government of India and H.H. the Dalai Lama. Centra) Secretariat Library The Central Secretariat Library and its branch at R.una- krishnapuram. New Delhi, continue to provide reference and lending facilities to the employees of the Ministries. Departments and attached and subordinate offices of the Government of India, Delhi Administration, autonomous organisations and the accre dited correspondents. The membership of the Library stood at 13.849 on Decem ber 31, 1978 including 3145 members enrolled during 1978. During the year 1.48,228 books were lent out for home read ing and 6.596 books were added to the Library including 2352 Indian Official Documents and 958 Foreign Official Document. The Library received 29.298 issues of 782 titles of newspapers/ periodicals by wav of purchase, gift and exchange durins the year. The Reprographic Division of the Library xeroxed 943 copies and produced 13200 copies by off-set printing. The Regional Languages Library, the Central Hindi Library and Sanskrit Library located in Bahawalpur House, New Delhi have been thrown open to the Registered Members of Central 283 Secretariat Library with effect from January 1, 1978 for borrow ing of books for home reading. During the year 6702 books were borrowed from the Regional Languages Library and 2274 from the Central Hindi Library. The Central Secretariat Library has embarked upon a project of Computerization of its Catalogue. It will enable the Library to keep its catalogue up-to-date through periodic printouts. 16 ESW/78—20 II. FINANCIAL ALLOCATIONS (IN LAKHS OF RUPEES) ITEMS DISCUSSED IN VARIOUS CHAPTERS Budget Estimates Budget Plan 1978-79 Estimates ------1979-80 S. No. Item N on-Plan Original R evised 1 2 3 4 5 6 Department of Education School Education 1 ■ Science T eaching P r o g r a m m e ...... Plan 4 .0 0 4 .0 0 2. Junior Division NCC Troops in Public/Residential and N on-Plan 4 .0 0 3 .5 0 3 .5 0 Central Schools 284 3. Bal Bhawan ...... Plan 11.00 11.00 15 35 N on -P lan 3 .3 0 3 .3 0 2 .15 4. Educational Concessions for children of Officers and Men N on -P lan 1 .00 1.00 1.00 of Armed Forces killed or disabled during hostilities 5. Financial Assistance to Voluntary Organisations working in Plan 6 .6 2 6 .6 2 11 .3 5 the Field of School Education N on-Plan 0.11 0.11 0 .1 5 6 . Vocationalisation of Higher Education Plan 5 0 .00 50.00 125.00 7. National Council of Educational Research and Training Plan 2 5 4 .0 0 2 5 4 .0 0 1 25.00 N on-Plan 339.23 3 39.23 3 9 4 .0 9 8. Educational Technology Programme Plan 36.00 33.00 85.00 9. Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Non-Plan 1760.00 1750.00 1890.00 10. Central Tibetan Schools Administration Non-Plan 83.36 8 3 .3 6 8 8 .2 5 11. National Awards to Teachers N on -P lan 2 .0 0 2 .0 0 2 .0 0 12. National Foundation for Teachers1 W elfare N on-Plan 1.00 1.00 1 .00 Higher Education and Research 1. University Grants Commission Plan 4902.00 4902.00 2800.00 Non-Plan 3652.29 3653.03 4916.00 2. Improvement of salary scales of University and college Non-Plan 1500.00 1500.00 1000.00 teachers 3. Indian. Institute of Advanced Study, Simla Non-Plan 32-00 2 4 .3 9 3 5 .0 0 Plan 5 .0 0 2 .8 3 4. Institutions of Higher Learning of All India Importance Plan 2 .5 0 5 .0 0 5 .0 0 N on-Plan 8 .0 0 8 .0 0 8 .0 0 5. Loan to Panjab University Plan 20 .0 0 2 0 .0 0 2 0 .0 0 6 . Shastri Indo-Canadian Institute N on -P lan 16.00 16.00 16.00 7. Association of Indian Universities Plan 2 .5 0 2.50 4.00 285 N on-P lan 1 .2 0 1 .20 1.25 8 . Grants to Deemed Universities Plan 5 .0 0 5 .0 0 Non-Plan 72.37 74-27 1 4 .5 0 9. Zakir Husain College, Delhi Plan 1 0 .00 5 .0 0 1 0 .0 0 N on-Plan 1.50 1.58 1 .6 5 10. U S. Educational Foundation in India N on-P lan 2 .2 5 2 .2 5 2 .2 5 11. Short-term Groups of Educational Professors of US Univer Non-Plan 0.50 0.50 0 .5 0 sities/Colleges 12. American Studies Research Centre, Hyderabad Non-Plan 0.24 1 .8 5 Indian Council o f Soda) Science Research, New Delhi- Grants to the Council Plan 1 25.00 125.00 50..00 N on-Plan 3 4 .4 8 34 .4 8 110 .00 1 2 3 4 5 6 National Staff College for Educational Planners and Admi nistrators, New Delhi. 1 0 .5 0 1. Grants to the College Plan 18.00 1 6 .90 N on-Plan 3 .3 8 3 .3 8 15.33 2. Installation of Mini-Computor Terminal in the Ministry Plan 2 .0 0 Indian Council o f Historical Research, New Delhi Plan 2 0 .0 0 2 0 .0 0 11.00 N on-P lan 5 .8 6 5 .8 0 9 .0 0 Technical Education 1. Quality Improvement Programme Plan 9 0 .0 0 9 0 .0 0 8 5 .0 0 2. Programme of Apprenticeship Plan 1 30.00 102.48 2 3 .0 0 N on-P lan 4 5 .0 0 4 5 .0 0 1 30.00 286 3. Direct Central Assistance to Engineering and Technological 2 2 0 .0 0 Institutions Plan 2 0 0 .0 0 20 0 .0 0 Indian Institutes of Technology 4. B om bay Plan 176.00 181.25 1 98.50 N on-Plan 372,00 3 73.75 4 0 0 .4 7 5. K anpur Plan 2 2 6 .0 0 2 6 9 .3 6 2 0 6 .6 0 N on-P lan 4 0 1 .0 3 4 0 4 .7 8 4 3 6 .3 6 2 3 0 .0 0 6 . M adras Plan 2 2 2 .0 0 2 0 7 .4 6 N on-P lan 3 2 9 .0 4 3 24.35 3 5 8 .1 9 7. Kharagpur Plan 2 5 8 .0 0 2 5 7 .6 0 2 53.75 N on-Plan 336.91 3 43.17 3 77.88 178.78 8 . D elhi Plan 166.25 1 65.64 N on-Plan 310.46 2 83.83 363.31 9. Regional Engineering Colleges Plan 3 0 0 .0 0 3 0 0 .0 0 3 0 0 .0 0 Non-Plan 436.00 436.00 450.00 10. National Institute for Training in Industrial Engineering, Plan 22.00 22.00 22.00 Bombay Non-Plan 39.17 23.85 40.78 11. National Institute for Foundry and Forge Technology, Plan 15.00 14.60 15.00 Ranchi Non-Plan 24.00 27.81 26.98 12. School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi Plan 20.00 20.00 20.00 Non-Plan 38.85 38.85 44.70 13. Technical Teachers’ Training Institutes Plan 91.00 91.00 85.00 Non-Plan 66.78 53.59 81.19 Indian Institutes of Management 14. Calcutta Plan 50.00 47.60 48.00 Non-Plan 42.39 41.35 51.79 15. Bangalore Plan 105.00 85.29 122.00 Non-Plan 23.45 21 .27 76.00 16. Ahmedabad Plan 45.00 52.04 30.00 287 Non-Plan 61.64 62.63 82.01 17. Grants to Non-Government Scientific and Technical Institu Plan 32.00 32.00 •• tions for Development and Improvement 18. Loans for Construction of Students Hostels in Technical Plan 30.00 30.00 Institutions Non-Plan 5.00 19. Asian Institute ot Technology, Bangkok Plan 6.00 2.00 4.00 Scholarships 1. National Scholarships Scheme Plan 210.00 180.00 77.00 Non-Plan 4.41 4.41 2. National Loan Scholarships Scheme Plan 72.75 72.75 Non-Plan 333.00 333.00 403.55 3. National Scholarships for the children of Primary and Secon Plan 7.50 7.50 dary School teachers Non-Plan 0.64 0.64 5.64 3 4 6 4. National Scholarships at the Secondary stage for Talented Plan 102.00 102.00 57.00 children from Rural areas 5. Scholarships for Students from Non-Hindi speaking States Plan 18.00 18.00 for Post-Matric Studies in Hindi Non-Plan 20.00 20.00 33.00 6. Scholarships in Approved Residential Secondary Schools Plan 44.75 34.50 Non-Plan 30.00 30.00 72.00 7. National Scholarships for Studies Abroad Plan 45.00 27.50 Non-Plan 30.00 30.00 70.00 8. General Cultural Scholarships Scheme Non-Plan 41 .00 41.00 41 .00 9. Scholarships for Nationals of Bangladesh Non-Plan 10.00 12.00 12.00 10. Special English Course for Foreign Students Non-Plan 0.10 0.10 0.10 11. Indian scholars going abroad against Scholarships offered Non-Plan 4.00 3.00 9.00 by Foreign Governments/Organisations 12. TA/DA to Non-official Members of Selection Committees Non-Plan 1.50 2.50 2.00 13. Partial Financial Assistance (Loan) Scheme" Non-Plan 0.40 0.40 0.40 14. Scholarships to Foreign Students for study in India Non-Plan 15.00 26,00 26.00 Plan 11 .00 0.50 Book Promotion and Copyright 1. National Book Trust. (1) Normal Activities Non-Plan 9.62 11.11 14.8) (2) Aadan-Pradan Plan 4.50 2.91 5.00 Plan 10.00 5.45 6.00 (3) Subsidised Publication of University Level Books in Plan 30.00 19.50 22,00 English by Indian Authors. (4) Nehru Bhawan Plan 5.00 5.00 4.00 (5) World Book Fair Plan 0.50 0.05 10.00 (6) Nehru Bal Pustakalaya Plan 6.08 3.37 5.00 2. Publication of Low p ric e d University level Books of Foreign Plan 2.25 0.25 1.00 o rig in 3. National Book Development Board Plan 3.00 1.00 1.00 4. Book Export Promotional Activities Plan 6.00 4.50 5.00 5. TA to Non-official Members of the Copyright Board Non-Plan 0.30 0.10 0.30 6. Honorarium to Chairman and non-official members of the Non-Plan 0.45 0.45 0.45 Copyright Board 7. Contribution to the International Union for ihe Protection Non-Plan 2.50 4.22 4.87 of Literary and Artistic Works Youth Services 289 1. National Service Scheme Plan 220.00 220.00 29.12 Non-Plan 19.00 18.14 220.00 21.25 2. National Service Volunteer Scheme Plan 15.00 11.50 3.00 Non-Plan 15.00 3. Promotion of National Integration Plan 7.00 3.00 3.00 4. Planning Forums Plan 4.00 3.30 1.00 5. Nehru Yuvak Kendras Plan 76.00 129.00 74.45 Non-Plan 36.00 36.00 108.50 6. Financ nisations working in Plan 13.00 15.00 16.00 the fie! 7. Scouti Plan 7.00 7.00 3.00 Non-Plan 1.35 0.40 4.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 8. Promotion of Adventure. Plan 15.00 12.00 9.00 Non-Plan . . 3.00 9. Commonwealth Youth Programme Plan 5.00 7.00 1.00 Non-Plan 5.00 Physical Education and Sports 1. Netaji Subhas National Institute of Sports, Patiala and Na Plan 50.00 45.95 39.00 tional Coaching Scheme Non-Plan 52.00 48.39 87.00 2. Grants to National Sports Federation Plan 30.00 27.50 22.00 Non-Plan 9.00 9.00 10.00 3. Grants to State Sports Councils Plan 30.00 30.00 32.00 to VO 4. National Sports Organisation Plan 18.00 18.00 22.00 o 5. Sports Talent Search Scholarships Scheme Plan 9.00 8.46 Non-Plan 3.50 3.50 12.50 6. Rural Sports Tournaments Plan 10.00 10.00 Non-Plan 10.00 7. Lakshmibai National College of Physical Education, Plan 10.00 9.00 8.00 Gwalior Non-Plan 15.50 15.50 16.68 8. National Physical Efficiency Drive Plan 4.00 4.00 Non-Plan 4.00 9. Promotion of Yoga Plan 6.00 6.00 6.00 Non-Plan 3.00 3.00 3.50 10. National Sports Complex Plan 1.00 1.00 Non-Plan 1.00 11. Arjuna Awards Non-Plan 0.20 0.20 0.65 12. Secretariat of the All India Council of Sports Plan .. .. 0.75 13. Exchange of visits under Cultural Exchange Programme Plan .. .. 3.00 14. Organisation of IX Asian Games Non-Plan .. .. 50.00 15. Grants to Womens’ Sports Plan .. .. 2.00 Non-Plan .. .. 6.00 16. Grants to Physical Education Teacher Training Institutions Plan .. .. 3.00 Languages 1. Appointment of Hindi Teachers in non-Hindi speaking States Plan 290.00 290.00 19.50 2. Establishment of Hindi Teachers Training Wings/Colleges Plan 10.00 10.00 2.00 in non-Hindi speaking States 3. Opening of Hindi Medium Sections in the existing colleges Plan 2.00 2.00 4. Assistance to Voluntary Hindi Organisations Plan 29.00 29.00 17.50 Non-Plan 11.00 5. Award of prizes to Hindi writers of non-Hindi speaking Plan 0.40 0.30 0.40 States 6. Kendriya Hindi Sansthan, Agra Plan 30.00 28.30 25.50 Non-Plan 21.00 19.30 35.10 7. Central Hindi Directorate Plan 1.10 1.10 Non-Plan 47.43 48.03 50.83 8. Correspondence Courses in Hindi Plan 9.00 9.00 Non-Plan 9.00 9. Propagation of Hindi abroad Plan 5.00 8.50 7.50 Non-Plan 3.00 3.00 4.79 10. Publications Plan 15.60 15.60 12.20 1 ]. Central Hindi Directorate Library Non-Plan 0.25 0.25 0.30 I 2 3 4 5 6 12. Scholarships for Study of Hindi at Post-Matric level for stu Plan 18.00 18.00 dents from Non-Hindi speaking States Non-Plan 20.00 20.00 33.00 13. Library of Nagari Pracharini Sabha Plan 6.00 6.00 14. Production of Books in Urdu (Tarraqui-e-Urdu; Plan 16.00 16.00 12.30 Non-Plan 6.60 6.60 7.50 15. Production of Books in Sindhi Plan 1.00 0.50 1.90 16. Production of Core Books Plan 8.00 7.00 2.00 17. Production of University Level Books Plan 150.00 150.00 136.00 nancing of Book Production through CSTT Pian 9.00 8.00 7.80 19. National Award of Prizes to Authors of Original Standard Plan 3.00 3.00 2.80 Works 20. Assistance to Voluntary Organisations for Modern Indian Plan 6.00 4.00 5.70 Languages 21. Central Institute of Indian Languages, Mysore and Regional Plan 33.00 33.00 24.00 Centres Non-Plan 45.55 45.55 53.50 22. English Language Teacher’s Institutes Plan 1.80 23. Appointment of Teachers in Modern Indian Languages Plan 0.50 24. Prizes on books/MSS in Indian Languages other than Hindi. Plan 0.50 0.50 Sanskrit and Mother Tongue 25. Voluntary Sanskrit Organisations Plan 25.00 30.00 29.80 26. Production of Sanskrit Dictionary Plan 3.75 3.75 0.50 Non-Plan 2.50 2.50 6.25 27. Production of Sanskrit Literal urc Plan 6.00 6.00 6.50 28. Centrally sponsored schemes Plan 19.33 20.00 19.80 29. Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan Plan 50.00 44.00 so. 00 30. Scholarships to Post-Matric Students Shastri and Acharya Plan 5.10 5.10 courses and Research Scholarships Non-Plan 4.00 4.00 9.10 31. Other Schemes for Propagation of Sanskrit Plan 0.82 0.82 1 .00 32. Adarsh Sanskrit Pathshalas Plan 5.00 6.00 8.00 Non-Plan 2.00 33. Voluntary Arabic and Persian Organisation"; Plan 5.00 5.00 5.00 34. Award of Certificate-’ of Honour Non-Plan 4.00 3.00 4.00 Indian National Commission for Cooperation with UNESCO 1. Expenditure for publication of Hindi and Tamil editions Non-Plan 3.95 4.75 5.75 of Unesco Courier 2. Indian National Commission for Unesco Non-Plan 0.50 0.40 0.50 3. Grants to Non-Govemm;nt organisations for Programmes of Non-Plan 0.30 0.30 0.30, th^ Indian National Commission for UNESCO 4. Hospitality and Entertainment on schemes connected with Non-Plan 0.09 0.09 0.09 UNESCO 5. Contribution to Unesco Non-Plan 72.00 72.00 72.00 6. Deputation/Delegation — 5.00 5.00 5.00 1. >sauorut’i Committee Tor Ganan'i Centenary celebration —. 1 .00 0.10 1 .00 1 2 3 4 5 6 Adult Education 1. Schsme of Assistance to Voluntary Agencies working in the Plan 75.00 125.00 410.00 Field of Adult Education Non-Plan 5.25 2. Directorate of Adult Education Plan 9.90 9.90 30.00 Non-Plan 9.29 9.29 19.83 3. Printing Press Plan 2.87 2.46 Non-Plan 2.46 4. Shramik Vidyapeeth Plan 20.00 20.00 20.00 Non-Plan 15.00 5. Strengthening of Administrative Structures in States'Union Plan 50.00 50.00 9.00 294 Territories for implementation of the National Adult Edu cation Programme 6. Farmers Functional Literacy Projects Plan 294.13 352.60 1350.00 7. Non-Formal Education for youth in the age-group 15-25/35 Plan 72.60 59.10, including Rs. 130 lakhs as non-plan. 8. Production of Literature for Neo-literates. (1) Prize competition of manuscripts for Neo-literates. Plan 1.50 1.50 1.50 (2) Grant-in-aid to States'Union Territories for production Plan 9.00 9.00 •• of literature for Neo-literates. 9. Adult Education through Universities. Plan 14.00 .. Publication Departments o f Education <6 Culture Non-Plan 5.00 5.00 6.00 Department of Culture Cultural Affairs 1. Sahitya Akademi, New Delhi Plan 8.95 8.56 10.00 Non-Plan 15.22 15.22 20.00 2. Lalk Kala Akademi, New Delhi Plan 10.00 9.88 13.00 Non-Plan 18.26 17.15 22.41 3. Sangeet Natak Akademi, New Delhi Plan 8.00 8 10 13.74 Non-Plan 24.79 24.89 31.29 4. National School of Drama Plan 4.29 5.13 6.00 Non-Plan 13.39 13.39 18.75 5. School of Buddhist Philosophy, Leh Plan 2.00 13.00 Non-Plan 5.50 4.97 6.00 6. Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies, Varanasi Plan 1.50 7.08 20.00 Non-Plan 9.00 9.00 14.50 7. Sikkim Research Institute of Tibetology, Gangtok Non-Plan 1.00 1.00 1.00 8. Financial Assistance to Professional Dance, Drama and Plan 12.00 11.00 25.00 Theatre Ensembles Non-Plan 4.80 4.80 4.80 9. Building Grants to Voluntary Cultural Organisations Plan 9.00 9.00 10.00 10. Inter-State Exchange of Cultural Troupes Plan 5.00 5.00 5.00 11. Scheme of Award of Fellowships Plan 2.40 1.90 2.65 Non-Plan 3.16 12. Propagation of Culture among College and School P/an 20.00 20.00 20.00 Students 1 2 3 4 5 6 13. Scholarships to Young Workers in Different Cultural Fields Plan 2.48 2.48 2.50 Non-Plan 2.20 2.20 3.68 14. Cultural Talent Search Scholarships Scheme Plan 5.18 5.00 2.00 Non-Plan 4.00 15. Centenaries and Anniversaries Plan 9.80 9.80 5.00 16. Gazetteers (1) Revision of Indian Gazetteers Plan 1,00 0.75 0.75 (2) Revision of District Gazetteers Plan 14.06 13.96 (3) Revision of State Gazetteers Plan 0.44 0.44 1.32 (4) Supplements to District Gazetteers Plan 0.50 0.50 1.00 17. Cultural Agreements and Cultural Exchange programmes— Plan 43.25 43.25 Foreign Cultural Delegations Non-Plan 9.16 9.16 7.00 18. Presentation of Books in Foreign Countries Non-Plan 2.00 2.00 2.00 19. Essay Competitions Abroad Non-Plan 0.50 0.50 0.50 20. Indo-Foreign Friendship Societies working Abroad Non-Plan 2,60 2.60 3.50 21. Institutions and Organisations in Literary and Cultural Plan 2.00 1 .50 0.50 Activities Non-Plan 5.35 5.23 5.91 22. Delegations under Indo-Foreign Joint Committee Plan 30.50 30.50 Non-Plan 10.00 10.00 5.00 23. Scheme of Financial Assistance to Persons distinguished Plan 3.95 3.38 in letters, arts etc. Non-Plan 0,35 0.38 4.00 24. Reconstruction of the Projector! Asian Encyclopaedia Plan 1.00 25. Studies of Performing Arts in South-East Asia Plan 1.00 26. Development of Expertise in South-East Asian Languages Plan 1 .00 27. Ramayana Festival Plan 4.00 Archaeological Survey o f India Plan 170.00 120.00 89.00 Non-Plan 549.95 551.43 606.48 Anthropological Survey oj India 1. Anthropological Survey of India Plan 14.00 15.00 11.00 Non-Plan 70.00 70.00 82.00 2. National Museum of Man, Bhopal Plan 10.00 10.00 24.00 Archives National Archives of India Plan 24.95 24.95 27.50 Non-Plan 38.81 38.81 41.00 Museums and Libraries and their Conservation and Development 1. National Museum, New Delhi Plan 20.00 16.00 60.00 Non-Plan 32.49 38.49 46.00 2. National Gallery of Modern Art, New Delhi Plan 7.00 7.00 7.50 Non-Plan 7.81 7.58 7.90 3. Indian Museum, Calcutta Plan 6.37 6.37 8.04 Non-Plan 21.14 21.14 24.90 4. Salarjang Museum, Hyderabad Plan 8.70 8.70 9.00 Non-Plan 10.60 10.60 13.50 5. Victoria Memorial Hall, Calcutta Plan 4.00 4.00 12.00 Non-Plan 8.00 8.00 9.85 6. Nehru Memorial Museum and Library, New Delhi Plan 4.70 3.78 6.00 Non-Plan 26.50 22.49 28,85 7. Gandhi Darshan, New Delhi Plan 3.00 3.27 3.00 Non-Plan 13.00 13.82 14.40 8. Dr. Zakir Hussain Memorial Museum New Del 0.72 0.72 Non-Plan •• 0.72 9(a) Scheme of Reorganisation and Development of other Museums Plan 7.50 7.50T 10.00 (b) All India Museum Camp Plan 0.50 0.35 J 10. National Library, Calcutta Plan 27.50 20.00 20.00 Non-Plan 57.75 59.25 63.35 11. Central Reference Library, Calcutta Plan 5.00 4.00 3.00 Non-Plan 7.05 6.94 8.00 12. Khuda Baksh Oriental Public Library, Patna Plan 4.00 4.50 3.00 Non-Plan 3.62 3.44 3.75 13. Rampur Raza Library, Rampur Plan 3.50 2.50 2.00 14. TMSSM Library, Tanjavur Plan 4.00 2.50 2.00 15. Central Library, Bombay Plan 4.00 2.00 2.00 Non-Plan 1.60 1.55 2.11 16. Delhi Public Library, Delhi Plan 25.00 22.00 10.00 Non-Plan 27.00 26.00 28.00 17. Library of Tibetan Works and Archives, Dharmsala Plan 3.50 1.94 2.50 18. Central Secretariat Library, New Delhi. Plan 15.00 14.00 10.00 Non-Plan 1.15 1.11 1.25 19. Indian Council of World Affairs Library, New Delhi Plan 1.00 1.00 1.00 20. National Research Laboratory for Conservation of Cultural Property Plan 13.51 14.49 25.00 21. National Council of Science Museums Plan 7.40 92.00 Non-Plan , . 3.26 56.54 22. Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation, Calcutta. Plan 30.00 30.00 20.00 Non-Plan 3.00 MGIPRRND—Sec. VIII—16 ESW/78—2-4-79—2,500 administrative c h a r t DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION A t, U ...... ADMINISTRATION & U N IV E B S T V AMO H 'S H E fi EDUCATION S Y...... STUDENT YOU™ B P ...... BOOK PBOMOTtOH NSY. . . . NO*4-STUD£N t y O U T H A E ...... AOULT ItuCATSON SP ...... SPORTS s...... s c m o o u s £ ...... ESTABLISHMENT p ...... F IN A N C IA L A D V ISE R *•...... tAN*UAS£S N S ...... N A T IO N A L S C H O L A R S H IP S * ...... TtCHHIfcAC eOUCATtO** 0 * 1 . 9 BOOK fROMOTIOM I SCHOLARSHIP* 6 S ...... EXTERNAL SCHOLARSHIPS • C O M M O N PO S TM| SC ...... 5TUOENTS CELL * T U € N T $ t>P EDLJCATiON 1 CU LTU RE • V A C A N J PH ...... P O L IC Y N O R M S t6 ESW/78—21 ADMINISTRATIVE CHART DEPARTMENT OF CULTURE LEGEND LEGEND A & U ...... ADMINISTRATION & UNIVERSITIES « . COMMON FOR THE DEPARTMENTS OF EDUCATION 4, CULTURE E...... ESTABLISHMENT S ..BOOK PROMOTION 4 SCHOLARSHIPS E&C ...... ESTABLISHMENT & CASH C H.... .CULTURAL HERITAGE CIL ...... CULTURE & LANGUAGES I. C R INTERNATIONAL CULTURAL RELATIONS GA 2 . GAZETTEER O . . VACANT AS ON 17.1,1979 16 ESW/78—22